manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5030, Service Manual, Page: 387 / 1455

Share
Download
Canon IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5030 Service Manual Download Page 387

4

4

4-121

4-121

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit > Procedure

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit > Procedure

 

■

Actions after Replacement

Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it differs 
depending on the color.
If 4 colors are replaced simultaneously, execute INISET-4.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y Initialization of Y Developing Assembly (toner 
ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M Initialization of M Developing Assembly 
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C Initialization of C Developing Assembly (toner 
ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly 
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-4 Initialization of 4-colors Developing 
Assembly (toner ratio and patch)

Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and 
Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit

 

■

Preparations

1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.

 

■

Procedure

CAUTION:

Do not touch the surface of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.

F-4-197

1) Place the paper to put the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit.
2) Remove the rear stopper.
•  1 claw

F-4-198

Summary of Contents for IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5030

Page 1: ...DVANCE C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 Series Service Manual September 13 2017 Revision 15 Product Overvew Technology Periodical Service Parts Replacement and Cleaning Adjustment Troubleshooting Error Code Service Mode Installation Appendix ...

Page 2: ...mation as the need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copy...

Page 3: ...switch closing the front door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically a...

Page 4: ... View 1 13 Operation 1 14 Power Switch 1 14 Description of Control Panel 1 15 Service Mode 1 17 Contents 2 Technology Basic Configuration 2 2 Functional Configuration 2 2 Controller System 2 5 Overview 2 5 Controls 2 11 Service Operations 2 29 Laser Exposure System 2 30 Overview 2 30 Various Controls 2 32 Service Works 2 42 Image Formation System 2 43 Overview 2 43 Controls 2 46 Service work 2 79 ...

Page 5: ...ed RDS 2 177 Product Overview 2 177 Limitations 2 178 Service cautions 2 179 E RDS Setup 2 179 FAQ 2 191 Troubleshooting 2 193 Error code and strings 2 196 Updater 2 199 Overview 2 199 Installing MEAP Application System Option 2 200 Limitations and Cautions 2 203 Preparation 2 204 System Management Operations 2 212 Maintenance 2 219 FAQ 2 220 3 Periodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts...

Page 6: ...144 Cleaning the Shutter Cover 4 145 Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing 4 146 Pickup Feed System 4 148 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide 4 148 Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide 4 148 Cleaning the Registration Roller 4 149 Cleaning the Pre registration Guide Assembly 4 149 Cleaning the Transparency Sensor 4 150 Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet...

Page 7: ...trol Panel 12V Check Flow 6 22 Flow C Main Controller Analysis Flow 6 25 Flow D All night Power Supply 3 3V System Flow 6 27 Flow E 12V Power Supply System Flow 6 30 Flow F Connector Disconnection Flow 6 33 Reference Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight 6 34 Flow G Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis 6 35 Procedure A Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagn...

Page 8: ...ings to do Before Installation 9 2 Selecting an Installing Location 9 2 Points to Note Before Installation 9 3 Combination Table of Accessory Installation 9 4 Combination of the Options installing to the Right Side of the Host Machine 9 4 Checking the Contents 9 4 Unpacking 9 7 Installation Procedure 9 10 Installing the Drum Unit 9 10 Fixing the Machine in Place 9 18 Setting the Environment Heater...

Page 9: ...re 9 86 Checking after installation 9 93 Operation Check 9 93 Card Reader C1 Copy Card Reader F1 9 94 Points to Note at Installation 9 94 Checking the Contents 9 94 Turning OFF the Host Machine 9 97 Installation Procedure 9 97 Setting After Installation 9 106 Copy Tray J1 9 107 Checking the contents 9 107 Turning OFF the host machine 9 107 Installation procedure 9 108 Setting after installation 9 ...

Page 10: ...ution of Auto Adjust Gradation Only when installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 207 TYPE 5 2 Option HDDs 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 208 Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit has been Installed 9 208 Checking the Contents 9 208 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup Export 9 211 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only 9 212 Check Items wh...

Page 11: ...a Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 306 TYPE 9 2 Option HDDs 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 307 Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit has been Installed 9 307 Checking the Contents 9 307 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup Export 9 312 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only 9 313 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 316 Insta...

Page 12: ...media Reader Writer A2 9 415 Writing Check 9 415 Reading Check 9 416 Memory Media Removal 9 417 How to check this installation procedure 9 418 When using the parts included in the package 9 418 Symbols in the illustration 9 418 Points to Note at Installation 9 419 Checking the Contents 9 419 Serial Intreface KIT K2 9 419 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 420 Installation Outline Drawin...

Page 13: ...ent Maintenance 10 38 Function Settings 10 39 Set Destination 10 50 Management Settings 10 51 Backup Data 10 55 Detail of HDD partition 10 58 Soft counter specifications 10 59 Soft counter specifications 10 59 ...

Page 14: ...ing of Laser System Turn power switch ON Safety of Toner Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Notes Before it Works Serving Points to Note at Cleaning imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 Series Safety Precautions ...

Page 15: ...ns of a warning label Figure If you must open the cover and defeat interlock switches be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye during the work The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles EN60950 1 Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist gefährlich wenn dieser S...

Page 16: ...ff with water Do not use warm water which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth Tonner is easy to react with plastic material avoid contact with plastic Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS The following warnings are given to comply...

Page 17: ...1 1 Product Overvew Product Overvew Product Lineup Feature Specification Name of Parts Operation ...

Page 18: ... type C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 Print Speed BW Color 51 51ppm 45 45ppm 35 35ppm 30 30ppm Positioning High speed high quality Middle Office model Target machine iRC5180 4580 3880Series Cost prioritized Standard Office model Target machine iRC3380 2880Series iRC6800Series iRC3100Series imageRUNNER ADVANCE C50 51 A Product category 90 Production model 50 Office model B Print speed unit is ppm print per...

Page 19: ...SU Reverse Duplex Type DADF Reader 6 Color Image Reader Unit B2 Copyboard Reader 7 Printer Cover C1 8 Copy Tray J1 9 Cassette Heater Unit 32 Deck Heater for Paper Deck Unit B1 10 Paper Deck Unit B1 11 Envelope Feeder Attachment D1 Cassette Attachment for envelope 12 FL Cassette AG1 13 FL Cassette AH1 14 Cassette Heater Unit 37 Cassette Heater for host machine 2 Cassette Pedestal AD1 15 Cassette Fe...

Page 20: ... A1 is required 16 Super G3 FAX Board AE1 17 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AE1 1 line FAX board is required 18 Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board AE1 1 line FAX board additional 2nd line FAX Board is required A European region is excluded 19 imagePASS B1 20 IPSec Board B2 PCI bus expansion kit F1 is required 21 Wireless LAN Board B1 22 Signal Interface Kit A1 23 Serial Interface Kit K1 24 PCL Printer K...

Page 21: ...able of 1200 dpi Developing Assembly ACR control is adopted Developing Assembly Drum Highly durable drum is High speed support High speed support Low running cost High image quality High image quality High image quality Unit are separated adopted BK only is adopted adopted F 1 5 Features at servicing Improvement on upgrade operation It is possible to upgrade options through the host machine Same a...

Page 22: ...r 52 to 63g m2 Recycled paper 64 to 81g m2 Color paper Pre Punched paper Bond paper Plain paper 64 to 105g m2 Heavy paper 106 to 256g m2 Textured paper Tracking paper Coater paper Labels paper Washi paper Transparency film Tab Paper size upper cassette B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R LGL LTRR LTR EXEC Custom size Min 139 7mm x 182mm to Max 304 8mm x 390mm K8 K16 K16R Paper size lower cassette A3 B4 A4 A4R B5...

Page 23: ...1 0 31 0 45 0 31 0 Thick paper 105 163 25 5 15 5 25 5 15 5 164 209 20 0 15 5 20 15 5 210 256 T 1 6 Size Mode Paper type Paper basis weight g m2 ImageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 C5045 Cassette Multi purpose tray Cassette Multi purpose tray Color B W Color B W Color B W Color B W A3 LDR 1 sided Plain paper 52 81 25 5 19 5 25 5 19 5 82 105 25 5 19 5 25 5 19 5 Thick paper 105 163 12 5 9 8 12 5 9 8 164 209 10...

Page 24: ... 3 279 3 to 432 0 Irregular size 1 4 432 1 to 487 7 Irregular size 2 1 182 0 to 209 9 182 0 to 210 0 Irregular size 2 2 210 0 to 279 2 Irregular size 2 3 279 3 to 432 0 Irregular size 2 4 432 1 to 487 7 Irregular size 3 1 182 0 to 209 9 210 1 to 297 0 Irregular size 3 2 210 0 to 279 2 Irregular size 3 3 279 3 to 432 0 Irregular size 3 4 432 1 to 487 7 Irregular size 4 1 182 0 to 209 9 297 1 to 330...

Page 25: ...Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B5R 257 0 182 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B5 182 0 257 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 148 0 210 0 Yes Yes A5R 210 0 148 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Y...

Page 26: ...Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes Yes SRA3 450 0 320 0 Yes Yes 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Irregular ...

Page 27: ...s 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes Pre Punched paper 75 to 81g m2 A4R 297 0 210 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A4 210 0 297 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Transparency film 151 to 209g m2 A4 210 0 297 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Washi paper 93g m2 A4R 297 0 210 0 Yes A4 210 0 297 0 Yes...

Page 28: ...er4 11 Control Panel 5 Paper Drawer3 12 Rear Cover 6 Paper Drawer2 13 Rear Rower Cover 7 Paper Drawer1 14 Breaker Be sure to perform the following procedure for checking the breaker 1 Turn OFF the main power switch and check that the Control Panel LED is off 2 Using a pen point press the test button of the breaker on the rear side of the machine 3 Check that the breaker switch is OFF O side 4 Retu...

Page 29: ...ser scanner unit BK C 6 Third delivery roller 21 2 side delivery lower roller 36 Laser scanner unit M Y 7 Second third delivery entrance roller 22 Registration roller 37 Developing unit Bk Drum unit Bk 8 2 side entrance roller 23 Bypass feeding roller 38 Developing unit C Drum unit C 9 Primary delivery roller 24 Bypass pick up roller 39 Developing unit M Drum unit M 10 Primary delivery flapper 25 ...

Page 30: ...ent Heater Switch is to supply and shut the power to Cassette Heater and Reader Heater F 1 8 How to turn ON OFF the power and points to note While progress bar is kept displayed at power on HDD access is processing thus never turn OFF the Main Power Switch To turn off the power turn off the Main Power Switch Conventional shutdown sequence operation is not required After power OFF after the Main Po...

Page 31: ...rtion Slot 10 Touch Panel Display 3 Settings Registration Key 11 Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial 4 Counter Check Key 12 FAX Volume Adjustment Key 5 Operation Pen 13 Status Check Stop Key 6 Main Power Lamp 14 Custom Menu Key 7 Error Lamp 15 Main Menu Key 8 Execution Memory Lamp F 1 9 Main Menu iR ADVANCE C5051 5045 5035 5030 Series Scan and Send Fax I Fax Inbox 3 4 2 1 7 8 6 5 9 1 Copy 6 Secured ...

Page 32: ...ation menu iR ADVANCE C5051 5045 5035 5030 Series Log in Settings Registration Select an item to set Preferences Adjustment Maintenance Function Settings Set Destination TOP OK 1 1 Management Settings 1 2 3 4 5 1 Preferences 4 Set Destination 2 Adjustment Maintenance 5 Management Settings 3 Function Settings Difference of Settings Registration menu iRC 3380 2880 Series iR ADVANCE C5151 5045 5035 5...

Page 33: ...ibed later are not available in MODELIST CLASSIC mode When MODELIST or MODELIST CLASSIC is pressed initial screen of each mode is displayed F 1 12 Description display of service mode item Enables to display the description of initial screen large category middle category and small category Select any from initial screen large category middle category small category and press i information button s...

Page 34: ...ion it is possible to check the signal input output status on a screen 1 Press the button Which button to press will depend on which electrical parts intended and its device classification For instance if the host machine uses paper pass detection sensor then press the button on the COPIER and P Sensor position Device classification Electrical parts classification 2 Then the selected electrical pa...

Page 35: ...lated development IMG DEV Development related Image related laser latent IMG LSR Laser latent image related Image related reader ADF IMG RDR Reader ADF image related Image related controller others IMG MCON MN CON image related and image related items other than above Image quality copy speed IMG SPD Down sequence Cleaning CLEANING Cleaning of Charging Assembly Drum Transfer Roller ITB etc Environ...

Page 36: ...2 R CON PANEL FEEDER SORTER DECK NIB MN CONT VERSION READY LEVEL 1 1 8 Counter Test Option Adjust I O i Function Display DC CON 43 44 00 52 4C 50 44 46 54 53 42 4E 4E 4D LANG DA LANG EL LANG ES LANG ET LANG HU LANG FI LANG KO VERSION READY LEVEL 2 1 2 Counter Test Option Adjust I O i Function Display LANG CS 53 43 41 44 4C 45 53 45 54 45 49 46 55 48 4F 4B F 1 16 ...

Page 37: ...2 2 Technology Technology Basic Configuration Controller System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System Pickup Feed System MEAP Embedded RDS Updater ...

Page 38: ...er system Fixing system Image formation system Pickup feed system Laser exposure system F 2 1 Basic sequence Sequence at Power On Reader Reader Motor Scanning Lamp HP Sensor SSTBY SREADY Backwarding Forwarding Optical unit position HP Shading position Gain correction Offset correction Backwarding Forwarding Shift shading Fixing shading White plate dust detection control Shading correction HP Shadi...

Page 39: ...val in which the copy print request signal can be accepted T 2 1 Print sequence Reader Start Key ON Reader Motor Scanning Lamp HP Sensor SSTBY SSTBY SREADY SCRW SCFW Backwarding Optical unit position End of the image Forwarding Backwarding Forwarding Forwarding HP Shading HP Shading Stream reading position ON ON Forwarding Backwarding Forwarding Backwarding Printer disengage Fixing heater H3 Fixin...

Page 40: ...ween the completion of the shading correction and switching the Start key ON turning the main power OFF PSTBY Print Standby State An interval in which the copy print request signal can be accepted PRINTR Printer Intial Rotation An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state the image signal is sent PRINT An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper and th...

Page 41: ...lectric power voice I Fs PCI USB host RTC Flash PCB Boot program TPM PCB To generate and save encryption key Available only when TPM settings is ON Management Settings Data Management TPM Settings default OFF Not available with China models Main controller PCB 2 CPU 400 MHz Image control Various image processing color space conversion enlarge reduction rotation composition compression rasterizing ...

Page 42: ...cifications features DDR2 SDRAM M1 1 GB standard clock frequency 200MHz Rasterizing rendering resolution conversion coding decoding DDR2 SDRAM M0 512 MB standard Op clock frequency 200MHz Product name Additional Memory Type B 512MB Rasterizing rendering resolution conversion coding decoding To be used when using the following options PS Printer Kit AE1 Direct Print Kit for PDF XPS H1 imagePASS B1 ...

Page 43: ...J1017 LAN I F 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T Also to be used as I F for imagePASS B1 ColorPASS GX300 Op J1026 I F for control interface kit Op J1027 I F for card reader I F for serial interface kit I F for coin manager all Op J1019 Riser PCB I F 1 There is 1 port on the control panel as well F 2 11 T 2 6 Main controller PCB 2 E Ex xt te er rn na al l I I F F I In nt te er rn na al l I I F F Reader...

Page 44: ...oard B1 IPSec Board B2 is installed Wireless LAN PCB Product name Wireless LAN Board B1 Expansion Bus F1 is required Only for non Japanese models Parallel use with imagePASS B1 ColorPASS GX300 is NOT available IPSec PCB Encryption composition processing of packet data Product name IPSec Board B2 Expansion Bus F1 is required Parallel use with imagePASS B1 ColorPASS GX300 is NOT available F 2 13 T 2...

Page 45: ...dress book filter MEAP application Universal data MEAP saving data System log Text management table PDL related file font registration form etc Job archiving chasing System software System language RUI etc Thumbnail For Advanced Box For distribution server F 2 15 Boot sequence Starting BIOS Main controller PCB 1 Starting IPL OS Flash PCB Starting application Initialization process of hardware Stan...

Page 46: ... Before turning OFF the main power switch it is necessary to perform HDD completion processing to prevent damage on the HDD cooling of the internal printer to prevent fixed toner due to high temperature and exhaust to prevent smeared image due to chemical reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum This sequential processing is called shutdown sequence and was executed on the legacy m...

Page 47: ...HDD HDD writing reading LAN Controller Rendering I F To DC Controller F 2 17 F 2 18 SEND Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Riser PCB HDD Reader Image processing Resolution conversion Image rotation JPEG compression extension Image data buffer memory Data conversion Tile raster conversion JPEG encode HDD writing reading Network LAN Controller Box Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB ...

Page 48: ...etting ON OFF by default F 2 21 Configuration of Security Information The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI This machine provides the two types of TPM settings See the figure below for the security information flow in each setting TPM PCB TPM Key Backup Key for TPM failure Public Key Common Key Password HDD When the TPM setting is ON Backup USB flash...

Page 49: ...is decodable correctly even after servicing Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON the password information stored in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted However the password information is maintained in the SRAM TPM Setting for Security Information The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM settings in Setting Registr...

Page 50: ...ed only at TPM PCB replacement Unless the key is restored the security information passwords encryption key and certificates cannot be used When the key restoration is failed due to the USB flash drive lost or others Initialize All Data Settings should be executed to reactivate TPM functionality The security may be undermined if the old Setting Registration data are maintained as it is 1 Enable Fu...

Page 51: ...the control panel as well as the main controller PCB CAUTION Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected the message is shown to notify that the backup is failed MEMO The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number Thus backup files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB flash drive 2 Click Back up TPM Ke...

Page 52: ... advice users on the following points The USB flash drive should be securely stored Once the TPM key backup file is saved in the USB flash drive never save the backup file on a server or the like accessible to unanimous users MEMO Name of TPM key backup file The serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name 3 Restore of TPM key Procedure is about the same as the b...

Page 53: ...rashed 4 Disable the feature To set OFF for the TPM setting execute Initialize All Data Settings CAUTION Points to note when disabling functionality To disable the use of TPM all data and settings should be initialized If this is executed user information saved in the HDD SRAM is totally cleared Ensure to back up the data before disabling TPM settings List of data to be cleared Data saved in BOX A...

Page 54: ...nt Error Code TPM PCB 1 Check the TPM PCB connection 2 Replace the TPM PCBs 3 Turn OFF ON the power 4 See the section of Restoring TPM Key to restore the TPM key 5 Turn OFF ON the main power for recovery N A TPM PCB is not in use when the TPM setting is set to OFF Initially E746 0031 is shown on the screen When the power is turned OFF ON after the TPM PCB is replaced E746 0032 is shown only when t...

Page 55: ...n of Address Book Yes HDD Password PIN MEAP Authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO H Yes HDD Certificate Secret Key SSL AMS Device key pair SSL AMS No HDD Certificate Secret Key Signature SEND User key pair No HDD Others User setting information Key information linked to user password No SRAM Password PIN BOX Password for encryption at BOX backup No SRAM Passw...

Page 56: ... 14 High capacity HDD Option The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 80GB as standard Mounting a 2 5 inch 250GB HDD D1 option makes 250GB in HDD capacity High capacity is required in the case of saving large amounts of data with Advanced Box Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box 9GB in the case of 80GB HDD capacity 114GB in the case of 250GB HDD capacity TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTD...

Page 57: ... ro or ri in ng g K Ki it t D D1 1 2 2 5 5i in nc ch h 2 25 50 0G GB B H HD DD D D D1 1 2 2 5 5i in nc ch h 2 25 50 0G GB B H HD DD D D D1 1 Ch A Ch B 80 GB Standard 80 GB Option Ch A Ch B 250 GB Option 250 GB Option F 2 33 Works before using this functionality installation Turn OFF the main power Turn ON the mirroring feature Turn ON the main power Lv 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID 1 The storage d...

Page 58: ...ed on the LED PCB is blinking If only one HDD is faulty the operation is continued by the other HDD If both two HDDs are faulty E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the operation F 2 35 List of operation status LED HDD operation statuses are indicated with 4 LEDs mounted on the LED PCB The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress while the red LED indicates any failur...

Page 59: ...e master HDD is copied rebuilt to the backup HDD The machine can be used under this condition In normal operation In recovery from the trouble Copying data of Master HDD Halt mode Both HDDs are in trouble see 1 In trouble HDD not installed HDD installed not registered HDD disconnected while the mirroring board is in operation With troubles HDD not installed HDD installed not registered HDD disconn...

Page 60: ...me of Mode Status Action for Recovery HDD1 ChA HDD2 ChB Red LED Red LED Mirror Mode Normal at standby Under normal operation Degrade Mode see 1 HDD1 in trouble 1 Check the connection between HDD1 and Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2 2 When the trouble is not recovered replace the HDD1 A HDD2 in trouble 1 Check the connection between HDD2 and Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2 2 When ...

Page 61: ... Master HDD which is accessed firstly after power on 3 For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently instruct them not to change the removable HDD location in advance Change of HDD locations after power OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode Otherwise HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed 4 The following conditions are required to re...

Page 62: ...ated in a HDD the encryption functionality can be independently enabled Data Encryption Mechanism The encryption board receives signals transmitted from the controller board and encrypts and saves them in the HDD The encryption board receives the encrypted data saved in the HDD to decode and send them to the controller The encryption board can be configured with a HDD and an encryption mirroring b...

Page 63: ... shown to confirm whether to initialize the encryption board Key Clear Key Clear will disable accesses to HDD data permanently Cautions should be taken in Key Clear execution Points to Note in Initialization via SST The screen below is shown when you gain access to SST in safe mode due to E602 2000 Poor board connection also causes this error Check the board connection to seek error recovery Initi...

Page 64: ...encryption key Error in initialization Failed to initialize the encryption processing unit Turn OFF ON the power If the error is not recovered this may be caused by hardware related factors 0201 Failure in the HDD encryption key Error in the encryption processing unit Turn OFF ON the power If the error is not recovered this may be caused by hardware related factors 0202 Failure in the HDD encrypti...

Page 65: ...up of the set registered data HDD format Downloading system software Restoring the backup data Executing Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Main Controller PCB 1 Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB Main Controller PCB 2 Backup of the set registered data Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB Restoring the backup data TPM PCB When TPM setting is ON Restoring the TPM key Consumable...

Page 66: ...rrection Motor C M33 Laser Scanner Unit 2 BD Sensor C Bk Laser Driver PCB C UN15 Laser Driver PCB Bk UN14 BD Sensor Y M Laser Driver PCB Y UN13 Laser Driver PCB M UN12 Scanner Mirror Scanner Mirror Laser Scanner Unit 1 This machine emits the laser to the image area on the drum negatively charged Non image area Image area Non image area Laser ON Enlarged view F 2 44 F 2 45 Y M C Bk Imaging Lens Ima...

Page 67: ...5045 4 beam for each color imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 C5030 2 beam for each color Resolution 1200dpi Motor type Brushless motor Number of motor rotation imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 C5045 Approx 29100rpm imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 C5030 Approx 37800rpm Number of scanner mirror facet 6 facet phi 40 Control list Laser ON OFF control Horizontal scanning synchronous control Vertical scanning synchronous co...

Page 68: ...e the scanner mirror by the specified speed BD correction control To correct the gap BD timing gap due to the angle variation of Scanner Mirror Laser shutter control To prevent the laser light from being emitted to the machine inside Image tilt correction control To correct the image tilt in vertical scanning direction this control is operated based on the result of color displacement correction c...

Page 69: ...INTR PRINT LSTR F 2 48 T 2 24 F 2 49 Horizontal scanning synchronous control Purpose This is to align the writing start position in horizontal scanning direction Execution timing Per 1 line Execution time Approx 7 5µs Control detail 1 DC Controller forcibly emits the laser diode on M laser driver PCB by setting the laser control signal of M laser to APC mode Also DC controller forcibly emits the l...

Page 70: ...lign the writing start position in vertical scanning direction Execution timing Per printing Execution time 500ms Control detail 1 When DC Controller receives the print instruction it detects the reference signal Based on this signal it creates the vertical scanning synchronous signal PVREQ and sends to Main Controller 2 Main Controller is synchronized with PVREQ signal and sends VDO signal to DC ...

Page 71: ...pose This is to make the laser light for 1 line consistent amount Execution timing Per each line before image writing Execution time Approx 2 µs Control details 1 DC Controller outputs the laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC on the Laser Driver PCB 2 APC mode is specified to the Laser Driver IC and it forcibly emits the laser diode of each color At the same time each laser driver IC monito...

Page 72: ...er PCB Bk Laser Driver PCB Y Laser M Laser C Laser Bk Laser F 2 54 Laser scanner motor control Purpose This is to rotate the scanner mirror by the specified speed Execution timing At power ON per printing Execution time Approx 3s at power ON approx 1s at printing Control detail 1 DC Controller forcibly rotates the motors in the two Laser Scanner Units 2 It detects the speed detection signal FG1 to...

Page 73: ...the Laser Scanner Unit 1 YM laser is started or print operation is processing if the BD signal cannot be detected after the specified time E100 0300 BD error laser scanner unit 2 When the Laser Scanner Unit 2 CBk laser is started or print operation is processing if the BD signal cannot be detected after the specified time E100 B000 BD error laser scanner unit 1 2 When the Laser Scanner Unit 1 2 is...

Page 74: ...ontrol detail 1 DC Controller measures the BD interval after the constant speed rotation control of Scanner Motor is completed 2 DC Controller calculates the correction value according to the gap of BD interval 3 Based on the foregoing correction value image writing position is corrected BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 BD1 BD2 α α BD3 BD4 BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 VDO VDO VDO VDO START END Scanner motor control finish Cons...

Page 75: ...pened Control detail While the Laser Scanner Motor is operating the Laser Shutter is opened During other period the laser shutter is closed Also the Front Cover Sensor PS18 or the Right Cover Sensor PS20 works together and it stops the output signal of laser driver At the same time if the Front Cover or Right Cover is opened the Shutter is closed and the laser light path is forcibly blocked Those ...

Page 76: ...r PS29 is not in the home position after approx 10 sec from the shutter close operation E0112 0002 Laser shutter motor error operation failure at shutter open If the Laser Shutter Sensor PS29 is still in the home position after approx 10 sec from the shutter open operation F 2 58 Image tilt correction control Purpose This is to prevent the gap of laser emission Execution timing At power ON per tot...

Page 77: ...ens Imaging Lens Skew Correction Motor Arm Arm Arm Arm Cam Cam Cam Arm Cam Cam Photosensitive Drum Skew Correction Motor Position relation of imaging lens and arm Position relation of imaging lens and arm Imaging Lens Photosensitive Drum Skew Correction Motor Imaging Lens Before correction After correction Scanner Mirror Skew Correction Motor Reflection Mirror Imaging Lens Arm Cam F 2 59 F 2 60 ...

Page 78: ... periodically replaced part Consumables No Parts Name Parts Number Qty Estimated Life 1 Dust blocking Glass cleaning pad FL2 9476 1 150k Periodical service list Parts name Dust blocking Glass Expected life per 50K sheet Operation Clean it with the Dust blocking Glass Cleaning tool stored in the machine Dust blocking glass cleaning tool Operation at parts replacement N A Points to note at servicing...

Page 79: ... 62 Specifications Item Function Method Photosensitive Drum Material OPC O D of drum 30mm Cleaning Cleaning blade Process speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 246mm s imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5045 215mm s imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 5030 160mm s Drum heater Mounted with Bk drum as a standard Assigned as an option for color drums Developing assembly Developing cylinder 1pc single developing Developing method ...

Page 80: ...arge the surface of photosensitive drum to be uniformed negative potential 3 Laser exposure To create static latent image on the surface of photosensitive drum by emitting laser light image exposure laser exposure area becomes image area Developing block 4 Developing To attach negatively charged toner from the developing cylinder to the photosensitive drum by non negative 2 component jumping devel...

Page 81: ... Roller Secondary transfer bias DC Approx 3kV Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Secondary transfer cleaning bias DC Approx 1 0kV Aforementioned biases are created by 3 HVT and are supplied to the loads used in the printing process Y M C Bk Y M C Bk HVT1 UN16 HVT2 UN17 HVT3 UN18 UN43 UN44 UN45 UN46 Secondary transfer outer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Primary charging roller Developing AC D...

Page 82: ...ontrol D half control ARCDAT control PASCAL control Color displacement correction control ATVC control Toner supply Toner cap automatic opening control Toner level detection toner supply control Waste toner feeding Waste toner full level detection Waste toner case presence detection T 2 29 Pre exposure Pre exposure control Removing residual potential on the photosensitive drum before executing the...

Page 83: ...tential The primary charging bias AC DC negative generated by HVT1 2 PCB is applied to the primary charging roller DC controller UN1 AC DC negative HVT1 2 UN16 17 Photosensitive drum Primary charging roller Cleaning brush roller Discharge current control To apply optimal primary charging bias according to the environmental change or use condition of photosensitive drum Execution timing 1 When the ...

Page 84: ...XE0 The change in current level for Drum film thickness detection is too much compared to the previous time E061 0XF0 Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the Drum film thickness large current level E061 0XF1 Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the Drum film thickness small current level x indicates the corresponding color 0 Y 1 M 2 C 3 Bk F 2...

Page 85: ...e To apply DC bias to the electrode plate to increase retention strength of toner on the developing cylinder Drive configuration Parts name Function M5 to M8 Developing motor To rotate the developing cylinder and the toner feeding screw TS5 to TS8 ATR sensor To detect the ratio of developer toner carrier in the developing assembly F 2 71 T 2 30 T 2 31 Developing bias control To create toner image ...

Page 86: ...me based on the ATR control result Return screw Toner feeding screw A Toner feeding screw B Flow of toner Toner feeding screw C ATR sensor Toner discharge outlet Toner supply inlet Toner supply inlet Return screw Toner feeding screw A Toner feeding screw B Toner feeding screw C Toner discharge outlet F 2 73 Toner blocking bias control This control prevents scattering of toner on the developing cyl...

Page 87: ... photosensitive drum Primary charging roller To make the surface of photosensitive drum to be evenly charged potential Charging cleaning brush roller To remove residual toner on the primary charging roller Drum cleaning blade To remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum Waste toner screw To feed residual toner F 2 75 T 2 32 Drive configuration Pre exposure LED light guide Photosensitive dru...

Page 88: ... control panel HVT1 UN16 DC controller UN1 Primary charging roller Current monitoring signal Primary charging AC Y M C Bk HVT2 UN17 Primary charging AC Current monitoring signal F 2 77 Old new detection of drum unit To detect whether the drum unit is new or old Detection timing 1 When the power is turned ON 2 At recovery from sleep mode Detection description To check state of the fuse that is atta...

Page 89: ...This is used when replacing a Drum Unit temporarily and checking the image to identify a cause of a trouble etc 0 Initialization is executed when a new one is installed Fuse meltdown is executed Default 1 Initialization is not executed when a new one is installed Fuse melt down is not executed Make sure to set this service mode to 1 only when it is necessary at servicing Be sure to reset this serv...

Page 90: ... accurate than that of existing models Ideal drum life shif Image of actual drum life shift 20k 100 0 Drum life 40k 60k 80k Image When the current is high at initialization When the Drum Cartridge is replaced with a new one the drum is initialized and the backup value is changed Therefore if a new Drum Cartridge is temporarily installed and then the old Drum Cartridge is installed again the life o...

Page 91: ... roller Y Tension roller ITB Cleaning blade Waste toner feeding screw Drive roller steering roller ITB scraper Post secondary transfer static eliminator Primary transfer auxiliary roller Toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred on paper Parts name Function ITB unit To transfer toner on the photosensitive drum to the paper ITB Intermediate Transfer Belt To transfer toner on the photosensitiv...

Page 92: ...Roller and Primary Transfer Roller Y M C are pressurized condition PS23 Primary transfer detachment sensor 2 To detect whether the Tension Roller and the Primary Transfer Roller Y M C is disengaged condition PS25 to 28 ITB displacement sensor To detect position of the ITB UN47 to 48 Patch Sensor front rear To detect color displacement level amount UN49 Patch Sensor center To detect patch density f...

Page 93: ...ler Related error code E074 0001 ITB pressurized operation error E074 0002 ITB disengaged operation error E074 0003 Breakdown of Primary Transfer Pressure Sensor and Primary Transfer Disengage Sensor F 2 84 Primary transfer bias control This control transfers toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB The primary transfer bias DC which has been generated by HVT2 UN17 is applied to the primary tra...

Page 94: ...B due to displacement of the ITB Execution timing When the ITB is rotated Control description 1 The ITB displacement sensors PS25 to 28 detect displacement of the ITB 2 Drive of the ITB displacement control motor M14 rotates the cam The cam position is detected by the steering position sensor PS24 3 Rotation of the cam moves the drive shaft up down to tilt the steering roller 4 Tilt of the steerin...

Page 95: ... or more OFF OFF OFF OFF Error code E075 0003 stops the main unit Displacement to the rear approx 4 0mm to 5 7mm OFF OFF OFF ON Steering roller rear is moved down Displacement to the rear approx 2 1mm to 3 9mm OFF OFF ON ON Reference position OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Steering roller rear is moved up Displacement to the front approx 2 1mm to 3 9mm ON ON ON OFF Displacement to the front approx 4 0mm...

Page 96: ...tive residual toner both types of residual toner need to be removed Therefore positively charged bias is applied on the 1st cycle of ITB while negatively charged bias is applied on the 2nd cycle of ITB Secondary transfer outer roller Cleaning bias2 ITB cleaning blade Drive roller steering roller Waste toner feeding screw Related Service Mode Forced execution of the secondary transfer outer roller ...

Page 97: ...91 Image stabilization control Overview To prevent image fault due to environmental change or deterioration of photosensitive drum to make stable print image Laser scanner unit Drum film thickness detection ATR control Toner Toner Toner Toner D max control PASCAL control D half control ARCDAT control Color displacement correction control ATVC control Main controller 2 DC controller UN1 Y M C Bk Pa...

Page 98: ...per total of 100 sheets Model A approx 8 4 Model B approx 12 8 During printing per total of 250 sheets Model A approx 3 3 Model B approx 4 3 During printing per total of 700 sheets Model A approx 11 1 Model B approx 16 8 During printing per total of 360 sheets model A or total of 240 sheets Model B Model A approx 6 1 Model B approx 9 3 During printing per total image ratio 2000 Model A approx 2 8 ...

Page 99: ...nsitive drum Drum count data Drum film thickness data SRAM IC2 Y M C Y M C Monitor signal Primary charging roller Y M C Bk Primary charging AC bias drive signal MEMO Bk Drum for highly durable type the drum is no shave Therefore Bk drum is not the thickness detection The result of drum thickness detection is reflected to the following data Developing bias Primary transfer bias ATR patch detection ...

Page 100: ...e gradation density characteristics which vary according to the environmental change or deterioration of photosensitive drum PASCAL 1st Sheet D maxPASCAL PG ITB PG Vdc PG LUT PG 10 Patch 3 Screen x 4 color PG 3 Patch 3 Screen x 4 color PS49 PS49 PS49 Main Controller 2 2nd 4th Sheet Gradation PASCAL Standard data for D half Standard data for ARCDAT DC Controller UN1 Patch Sensor Center Patch Sensor...

Page 101: ...SCAL control Patch image date F 2 97 Start Patch pattern is created Patch scanning Patch sensor Center UN49 PASCAL correction table is created Y M C Bk Actual gradation characteristics Ideal gradation characteristics 0 100 Density data D CON Y1 Y2 Data output M CON Y63Y64 Output of patch pattern data Main controller2 DC controller UN1 Main controller2 Output of density data 100 Actual gradation ch...

Page 102: ...Controller 2 DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color Y M C Bk on the ITB based on this data 3 DC Controller measures the patch pattern with the Patch Sensor center UN49 and returns the result to the Main Controller 2 4 The Main Controller 2 executes the gradation correction to realize the ideal halftone image based on this data Also this control creates the standard patch used at ARC...

Page 103: ...N1 D half correction table is created Y M C Bk Output of patch pattern data Y D half correction table MEMO Following 4 types of patch patterns are created on this control Copy pattern 10 patch per each color Letter priority pattern 10 patch per each color Photo priority pattern 10 patch per each color Standard pattern for ARCDAT control 3 patch per each color F 2 100 Correction value calculation f...

Page 104: ... every 100 prints to execute this control Control details 1 DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color Y M C Bk on the ITB 3 patterns per each color total 12 patterns 2 DC Controller measures the patch pattern with the Patch Sensor center UN49 and returns the result to the Main Controller 2 3 The Main Controller 2 compares the actual measured data with the backed up standard data for AR...

Page 105: ...n Patch pattern formation Data output D CON Density data D CON Offset value alpha determination i e difference between SIN and INT Inclusion of result in D half correction table Patch sensor center UN49 Main controller2 Main controller2 Main controller2 DC controller UN1 Patch scanning Start DC controller UN1 F 2 103 Color displacement correction control This control corrects uneven exposure of th...

Page 106: ...Yes No Change position of laser exposure by the laser scanner unit T 2 39 ATR control This control supplies developer to the developing assembly to keep ideal ratio of developer in the developing assembly Timing to start When replacing with a new drum unit ATR sensor At every print Developing Assembly Toner Supply Count ATR sensor In the case of post rotation every time the total reaches 150 print...

Page 107: ... limit E020 0x91 Error in ATR sensor more than the upper limit E020 0xB0 Error in developer ratio when making prints less than the lower limit E020 0xB1 Error in developer ration when making prints more than the upper limit x indicates the target color 1 Y 2 M 3 C 4 Bk ATVC control This control prevents transfer failure due to environmental change or deterioration of the primary transfer roller or...

Page 108: ...roller UN1 Primary transfer DC Bias Secondary transfer DC Bias Current monitoring signal Current monitoring signal F 2 106 Toner supply assembly Overview To supply toner in the toner container to the developing assembly Toner supply screw Developing assembly Toner stirring plateB Toner container Toner stirring plateA Cap drive link holder Cap release holder Hopper unit Toner supply drive unit Part...

Page 109: ...ink holder Hold the toner cap 4 Operation of the toner container drive motors M9 to 12 moves the cap drive link holder to the left Release the toner cap F 2 108 Related Error Codes E025 0100 Error in lock of toner container drive motor Y E025 0200 Error in lock of toner container drive motor M E025 0300 Error in lock of toner container drive motor C E025 0400 Error in lock of toner container drive...

Page 110: ...of M9 to 12 make M9 to 12 driven for 2 seconds and then stopped for 2 seconds and repeat this procedure up to 20 times Due to this operation when performing continuous printing with high image ratio Preparing toner may be displayed on the UI screen In that case wait for up to 80 seconds until the machine is recovered F 2 109 T 2 42 Toner level detection Detection description Detection timing Detec...

Page 111: ...es E025 0100 Error in toner container drive motor Y E025 0200 Error in toner container drive motor M E025 0300 Error in toner container drive motor C E025 0400 Error in toner container drive motor K E027 0100 Error in supply to developing assembly Y E027 0200 Error in supply to developing assembly M E027 0300 Error in supply to developing assembly C E027 0400 Error in supply to developing assembly...

Page 112: ...e detect signal UN21 F 2 112 Detection description Detection timing Detection source Message operation of main unit Waste toner full level warning approx 7 until the waste toner level is full When the output result of sensor is changed from H to L Waste toner full level sensor Please prepare a waste toner case continuous print is available Waste toner full level warning approx 0 until the waste to...

Page 113: ...tirring plate motor ITB cleaner unit Waste toner screw1 Waste toner feeding screw Developing assembly Drum unit Waste toner screw2 Waste toner case There is waste toner case Sensor OFF There is not waste toner case Sensor ON Waste toner ITB unit Waste toner case sensor Waste toner case detect signal UN21 F 2 113 In order to prevent the toner leakage at removal of Waste Toner Case the Shutter is pr...

Page 114: ...ent agent on the transparency is attached on the ITB it reduces transfer efficiency on the attached area If considerable amount of resistance adjustment agent is attached on the ITB it can cause fusion in the ITB cleaning assembly To prevent this symptom toner width full width of ITB length 80mm solid black band is supplied to the ITB cleaning blade Execution timing Sheet to sheet interval after 1...

Page 115: ...ning blade FM3 6018 1 150k 6 Transfer separation guide unit FM3 8893 1 500k 7 Developing assembly Y FM3 8977 1 500k imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 5045 Developing assembly M FM3 8978 1 500k imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 5030 Developing assembly C FM3 8979 1 500k Developing assembly Bk FM3 8939 1 500k 8 Developing assembly Y FM3 8973 1 500k Developing assembly M FM3 8974 1 500k Developing assembly C FM3 897...

Page 116: ...y roller Inner delivery roller Pressure roller Fixing inlet guide Fixing heater F 2 115 1 Saving energy Fast warm up reduces standby electric power thanks to low heat capacity 2 High speed 51ppm is enabled by introducing a new toner and the film capable of high heat transfer 3 Supported media Feeding 52g m2 paper is available due to the modification of film path and Separation Guide and image qual...

Page 117: ...Purpose to control temperature rise at the edge Control temperature Target temperature at printing plain paper 1 64 to 81 g m2 51 45 ppm machine 169 180 deg C 35 30 ppm machine 150 163 deg C Temperature detection By the main thermistors 2pc and the sub thermistors 2pc Protection feature Thermistors To block power supply to the fixing heater when a failure is detected Temperature fuse Rated operati...

Page 118: ... Temperature control detection of abnormal temperature rise Sub thermistor 1 To be in contact with the heater non feeding area Temperature control detection of abnormal temperature rise temperature detection cooling control on the edge Sub thermistor 2 To be in contact with the heater non feeding area Temperature control detection of abnormal temperature rise temperature detection cooling control ...

Page 119: ...n temperature control Print temperature control Sheet to sheet temperature control Down sequence control To prevent fixing failure due to rising temperature at the edge or fall in temperature This control causes reduced through put Down sequence when feeding small size paper Down sequence when switching paper size F 2 119 Standby temperature control Flaying start control temperature Time 15 sec PR...

Page 120: ...temperature Time Startup warm up rotation temperature control To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing once the print start command is received Print temperature control To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset and keep the specified target temperature during printing A Setting target temperature see the table on the next page Target temperature is speci...

Page 121: ...Punched Tracing paper Japanese paper 93 1 1 speed 246 mm sec 169 180 51 25 5 20 16 Thin 52 63 148 164 51 25 5 20 16 Plain 2 82 105 Bond 80 90 Except Japan 181 197 51 25 5 20 16 Plain 2 82 105 Bond 80 90 Japan 181 197 40 20 17 14 Heavy 1 106 163 Label 151 180 1 2 speed 123 mm sec 162 179 25 5 12 5 10 8 Heavy 2 164 209 Embossed 150 Postcard 4 on 1 postcard 190 Tab 166 179 20 10 8 7 5 Envelope 149 20...

Page 122: ...s When the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 reaches the specified temperature or higher 250 to 260 deg C during printing Operation Temperature is reduced by making wider sheet to sheet distance to control the temperature at slightly lower than the target temperature for normal print Model Paper type paper weight g m2 Target temperature deg C Print speed ppm 51 45 ppm machine Plain 1 6...

Page 123: ...feeding area Non feeding area Film F 2 122 Starting conditions If the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 exceeds the specified temperature 250 260 deg C when switching to the paper which has longer width than the preceding paper Operation Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as well Completion conditions This down sequence is completed if any o...

Page 124: ...he through put because this control is executed while printing is continued Direction of movement Shutter Shutter motor Shutter motor Shutter position sensor PS32 Shutter position sensor PS32 Shutter Fixing cooling fan front FM5 Fixing cooling fan rear FM6 Shutter HP sensor PS31 Shutter HP sensor PS31 M27 A4 R A4 LTR RB4EXE 8K LTR M27 There is a shutter at the air vent which moves opens in 7 level...

Page 125: ...n error occurs Related Error Codes E009 Error in engagement disengagement of film unit 0000 Error in engagement 0001 Error in disengagement 0002 Error in engagement it is highly possible that grease is scattered on the surface of the cam F 2 124 Protection features Code Description Error Clear E001 Detection of abnormal high temperature 0000 When main thermistor 1 2 detects 255 deg C or more for 0...

Page 126: ...al service works Parts name Parts number Qty Estimated life print Remarks 1 Fixing Separation Cuide FC8 4906 1 300 000 Replace the Film Unit at the same time 2 Shutter Cover XG9 0172 1 300 000 Replace the Film Unit at the same time When replacing parts Film unit pressure roller Check that the fixing nip width is within the specified range Paper to be used A4 LTR size plain paper 80 to 105 g m2 1 S...

Page 127: ...ied value range Center 9 0 1 0mm Edge 145mm from the center of feeding paper 9 0 1 0mm Center Edge Edge 145 mm 145 mm Feeding direction If measured value is out of the specified range reinstall the replaced parts film unit or pressure roller and then measure the nip width again MEMO Fixing nip width cannot be adjusted in the field F 2 126 ...

Page 128: ...y of the tray is increased from 50 sheets to 100 sheets Specification Item Description Paper storage method Front loading method Pickup method Cassette 1 2 Separation retard method Multi purpose tray Simple retard method Paper stack capacity Cassette 1 2 550 sheets 80g m2 paper 650 sheets 64g m2 paper Multi purpose tray 100 sheets 80g m2 paper 100 sheets 64g m2 paper Paper feed reference Center re...

Page 129: ...oller 3 Third Delivery Roller 15 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller 4 Duplex Inlet Roller 16 Vertical Path Roller 1 5 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 17 Registration Roller 6 Duplex Feed Lower Roller 18 Secondary Transfer Roller 7 Multi Purpose Tray Pickup Feed Roller 19 Pressure roller 8 Multi Purpose Tray Separation Roller 20 Post Fixing Roller 9 Vertical Path Roller 2 21 Fixing Inner Delivery Roller 10 Cassette...

Page 130: ...vel Sensor A PS36 Fixing Loop Sensor 2 PS52 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor PS54 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS39 Reverse Sensor PS55 Cassette 1 Pre Registration Sensor PS40 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS56 Cassette 2 Pre Registration Sensor PS41 First Delivery Sensor UN51 OHP Sensor PS42 Second Delivery Sensor UN...

Page 131: ...2 Pickup Solenoid M20 2 Sided Feed Motor SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid M21 Fixing Motor SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid M22 Fixing Delivery Motor SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid M23 First Second Delivery Motor CL1 Multi Purpose Pickup Clutch F 2 129 Paper Path R40 R40 Option Cassette pickup Side deck pickup Third delivery Second delivery First delivery Reverse mouth Cassette 2 picku...

Page 132: ...5 C5030 300mm sec C5051 C5045 400mm sec C5035 C5030 300mm sec 246mm sec Reverse sensor PS39 Delivery speed up position Duplex re pickup position Registration position Pre registration position Pre registration position Duplex paper sensor PS38 Pre registration sensor PS33 Vertical path sensor UN53 Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 Inner delivery sensor PS37 F 2 131 ...

Page 133: ...ration Control Fixing Arch Control Duplex Delivery Assembly Duplex Feed Control Duplex Wait Control JAM Detection JAM Detection F 2 132 T 2 57 Cassette Pickup Assembly Overview Parts Configuration Cassette 1 paper level sensor A Cassette 1 paper level sensor B Cassette 2 paper level sensor B Cassette 2 paper level sensor A Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette 2 pickup solenoid Cassette 2 paper pres...

Page 134: ... Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid SL3 Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid F 2 135 Detection Paper Level Presence Detection There are 3 sensors to detect the paper level and paper presence in the cassette Paper level is displayed on the operation panel OFF OFF OFFON ON ON If the paper is full Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Ca...

Page 135: ... automatically detected by adjusting the position of the guide plate Concavo convex area of the cassette dial is switched when the guide plate is shifted and two Size Switches on a printer are switched Length and width are detected according to the ON OFF combination of switches As long as standard paper both AB type and inch type can be used However size should be found manually on the check scre...

Page 136: ...Pre punched paper Overall OK Prince Joshitsu Especially thin paper 52 gsm etc JPN Canon Europe Canon Recycled 80 Vision Classic White Overall EUR Canon Europe Canon High Grade Mondi Business Paper Especially heavy paper 220 250 gsm etc EUR Canon Digital Office Colour Stora Enso MultiCopy Special Colour Laser Especially heavy paper 160 gsm etc EUR T 2 58 T 2 59 Multi purpose tray pickup 1 sheet fee...

Page 137: ...36 A OFI 37 M OFI 42 FA4 43 FB4 Example When setting G LTR to Cassette 2 COPIER OPTION CST CST2 U3 3 T 2 62 T 2 63 Pre Registration Control To correct the feed variation at pickup and to perform the stabilized paper feed pre registration control is executed When the paper leading edge is detected at the Pre Registration Sensor at Vertical Path Sensor on cassette 1 only on each cassette the machine...

Page 138: ... pickup feed roller M18 SL4 CL1 Multi purpose motor Multi purpose pickup clutch Multi purpose tray lifting solenoid Multi purpose tray Multi Purpose Tray Detachment Roller Detection Paper Presence Detection The paper presence is detected by the Multi Purpose Tray Paper Presence Sensor When the paper absence is detected if there is the same size same type paper exists in other cassette auto cassett...

Page 139: ...p Motor Multi Purpose Tray Pickup Motor Duplex Pickup Motor is turned OFF to stop the paper by the distance from the Registration Sensor to the Registration Roller with arch amount added To reduce the noise when the paper enters the Registration Roller speed is decreased by 200mm sec upon Registration Sensor ON However if the distance with the preceding paper is too far productivity cannot be sati...

Page 140: ...inlet sensor F 2 142 Duplex Delivery Assembly Overview Parts Drive Configuration M20 M23 M25 M24 SL6 SL7 SL5 Duplex paper sensor Duplex inlet roller Reverse roller First delivery roller Second delivery roller Third delivery roller Second third delivery Inlet roller Duplex feed upper roller Duplex feed lower roller M20 Duplex Feed Motor SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid M23 First Second Delivery ...

Page 141: ... goes through the reverse path and jam will occur Following is the each duplex reverse position and the number of sheet circulation by size First Second Delivery Third Delivery Small size LTR or smaller 5 3 Middle size A4R or smaller 3 3 Large size larger than A4R 3 1 Compared to the conventional model imageRUNNER C3380 feed speed at the duplex feed assembly is slowed down This is to get the preci...

Page 142: ... and it is unnecessary to execute detection the Vertical Path Sensor does not execute residual jam detection Jam code Sensor XX Name Code 01 Delay jam 02 Stationary jam 03 Residual jam C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 XX01 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor PS55 N N N N Y Y XX02 Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 Y Y Y Y Y Y XX13 Vertical path sensor UN5...

Page 143: ...C6 6661 1 120K 5 Pickup Assembly Idler Gear FU3 0280 2 120K For Chinese model only Periodical service No Parts Name Execution timing Work Remarks 1 Registration roller 50k Cleaning 2 Pre registration guide 50k Cleaning 3 Transparency sensor 50k Cleaning 4 Fixing delivery guide 50k Cleaning 5 Post fixing roller 50k Cleaning 6 Fixing delivery roller 50k Cleaning 7 First delivery roller 50k Cleaning ...

Page 144: ...1 Host machine First delivery tray First Delivery Sensor PS41 Duplex Paper Sensor PS38 Second delivery tray Second Delivery Sensor PS42 Third delivery tray Third Delivery Sensor PS43 2 In case finisher is installed Finisher Delivery Sensor T 2 68 Fan Overview Fan Layout Process cartridge fan front FM10 Fixing cooling fan front FM5 Delivery fan 2 FM9 Process cartridge fan rear FM4 Power supply cool...

Page 145: ...6 Fixing Cooling Fan rear Cooling down of Fixing Assembly FM7 Delivery Fan 1 Preventing delivery paper adhesion E806 0000 FM8 Secondary Transfer Delivery Fan Heat exhaustion around Secondary Transfer Unit E806 0002 FM9 Delivery Fan 2 Preventing delivery paper adhesion E806 0001 FM10 Process Cartridge Fan front Heat exhaustion around Process Cartridge E807 0001 FM11 Controller Fan 1 Cooling down of...

Page 146: ...2 110 2 110 Technology External Auxiliary System Various Controls Fan Technology External Auxiliary System Various Controls Fan Air flow of fixing system F 2 148 Air flow around the operation system F 2 149 ...

Page 147: ...ing Cooling Fan front Fixing Cooling Fan rear Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan Post rotation Process Cartridge Fan front Fan name Reader Low power Sleep Pre rotation Initial rotation Stand by Copy pint Jam error F 2 150 Power Supply Control Power supply inside the printer Reader heater Drum heater Cassette heater Cassette pedestal heater Deck heater Fixing heater Right switch TP Leakage breaker AC i...

Page 148: ... 5V 24V CMOS PCB DADF LED Lamp Unit 12V 24V 24V 24V 5V Motor Fan Sensor Printer Reader Controller PCB 24V 5V DADF driver PCB F 2 152 Power connection with each option Reader ADFUnit Paper Deck Unit B1 Staple Finisher C1 Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 Built in wiring Connector inside the cover is used for the connection with DADF Unit and the 2 Cassette Pedestal External Cable is used for the connection...

Page 149: ...en option setting is specified When options are installed the machine does not enter Sleep Standby but enters Sleep1 mode Standby In this mode the machine is either operating or ready to start operation immediately and all power is supplied Sleep Standby or Sleep1 Control panel is turned OFF Power supply other than the control panel is the same with Standby mode Deep Sleep 3V for all night power P...

Page 150: ...at servicing Technology External Auxiliary System Service Operations Points to note at servicing Service Operations When Replacing Parts N A Consumables No Parts Name Parts number Qty Execution timing Remark 1 Toner filter FC6 9817 1 100k B W 25k CL Points to note at servicing N A T 2 70 ...

Page 151: ... built in applications in iR ADV models 3 functions services were added These functions support the platform which was reinforced in terms of management In detail information which the MEAP applications manage respectively setting information user setting information a bunch of keys and log can be managed effectively and collectively These 3 functions are shown below 1 MEAP User Preference Service...

Page 152: ... Log data App1 format App1 format App2 format App2 format App2 format Setting and reference Setting and reference Setting and reference Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions App1 App2 Setting and reference Log logging only Configuration Config data common format Device Preference data Log data Platform General purpose management tool Configuration management service common form...

Page 153: ... Credential which the registered information is not discarded even at logout Volatile Credential Volatile Credential is used when sharing the authentication information between applications which log in authenticate to the same security domain Credential is registered using a login application so the application which accesses to the security domain used for authentication by login application can...

Page 154: ...p sleep mode so the application needs to perform reconnection processing This function can be used with the device which MEAP Specifications Ver 54 is supported F 2 161 Checking the Operating Environment Outline This section lists the requirements on the operating environment for the maintenance Note Cookies must be enabled for each session Java Script must be enabled in all environments The requi...

Page 155: ...er for name resolution Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 2000 2003 Domain Name System DNS access privileges Domain controller access privileges System environments for administrator and ordinary user Operating System Supported browser Java Runtime Enviro...

Page 156: ...with KDC Key Distribution Center 389 Communication with directory service using LDAP default is 389 may be changed to any port on LDAP service side T 2 75 Local Device Authentication Management For user registration edit in Local Authentication following system requirements must be satisfied System environments for administrator and ordinary user Operating System Supported browser Java Runtime Env...

Page 157: ... is set to On the message dialog The Default Key is not set Check the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting is shown Press OK button for this message F 2 164 2 Press OK button to return to Main Menu screen 3 Restart the device CAUTION The setting Use HTTP is not actually enabled disabled until you have restarted the device You cannot make a connection through a proxy server If a...

Page 158: ...anged F 2 165 T 2 78 Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication SSL Connection for SMS SMS is always SSL connected so it is required to set a key pair and server certificate as the Default Key When deleting Default Key pre installed key pair and server certificate from the Default Key SMS cannot be accessed When SMS Cannot Be Accessed If Default Key is deleted by mistak...

Page 159: ...te To encrypt the password information input when logging in SSL of the login screen was made effective However it is redirected to new URL effective SSL even when accessing with URL non SSL before Note The default password is MeapSmsLogin The password is case sensitive When you want to change the display original language change in the box in the right of the screen This setting is not affect by ...

Page 160: ... destination registered with Active Directory and then click Log In If the authentication method used is local device authentication enter the user name password and login destination registered in the device and click Log In When using SDL as the login service enter the user information registered in the device as per local device authentication F 2 168 Note The user information is set as below f...

Page 161: ...Start Logged in by RLS authentication Remote UI display setup language Language priority setting of a browser Display setting of a device Display in English Display in the language configured English or Japanese No Refer to the setting of a language displaying in registration initial setting Additional Function Refer to the setting of the Accept Language header which a browser sends out Yes Englis...

Page 162: ... for the following reasons Authentication server is down Network problem no communication with authentication server In the event of either of these cases try the following 1 If local device authentication is active try logging in with local device authentication 2 If only domain authentication is active launch in MEAP safe mode from the device service mode After launching in MEAP safe mode the De...

Page 163: ...ly shown When trying to access the password authentication screen after clicking Start to change the status to Stop the user is automatically redirected to RLS authentication screen Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen F 2 174 F 2 175 Setting for login by RLS Authentication The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start Stop settings are as fo...

Page 164: ...ly shown When accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of Stop the user will be redirected to the password authentication screen RLS authentication started screen and RLS authentication stopped screen F 2 178 F 2 179 CAUTION In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO H if you log in SMS with RLS authentication no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the lo...

Page 165: ...ally in use The following resource information is shown Storage Memory Thread Socket File Descriptor You will not be able to install an application if the size of the remaining storage falls short of the size declared by the application Moreover the specifications have been designed so that an application will not be able to start up if there is a shortage of memory for any of the foregoing items ...

Page 166: ...y being displayed this operation is not necessary 3 Click Start or Stop button shown for the MEAP application to be started or stopped 4 Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either Started or Stopped F 2 183 F 2 184 Checking the Platform Information The check procedure of the platform information This screen allows users to check MEAP Contents versions MEAP Specifica...

Page 167: ...operable in all the environments declared Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine The machine which doesn t support the version declared by the application rejects installation of such an application MEAP Specifications for each model Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks iR...

Page 168: ...XML PowerPoint with visible signature 33 Extended function for imageRUNNER iR ADVANCE series API for address book CTK TopMenu 34 Extended IMI Box function v1 3 0 35 Extended SIS function function to check the network cable status function to check PS print server unit status 36 Reserved 37 CLS Contextual Login Service Supporting API Added 38 imageRUNNER iR ADVANCE Series administrative privileges ...

Page 169: ... in to SMS 2 On System Management menu click System Info 3 Click Details button 4 System information of each application including system applications is shown in anadditional window Copy and paste all the information in a file to attach to AR reports as text information This function is useful to check status information of each application F 2 186 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Applic...

Page 170: ...in use Resolved the application is at rest Installed On It indicates the date on which the application was installed Vendor It is the name of the vendor that developed the application and is the name bundle vendor declared in a statement within the application program License Status It indicates the status of the license specifically None no license is needed Not Installed no license has been inst...

Page 171: ...ource when starting up the application For other resources other than memory check them when installing Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation For details see the User s Guide that comes with the individual applications Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate However the Send function consumes 1 it must be 19 in pract...

Page 172: ...tions show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement Read the terms and click OK 7 Check the message Installing Please wait appears beginning the installation F 2 190 F 2 191 8 Upon installation completed click To MEAP Application Management button shown on the screen to view MEAP Application Management page Note To use the application that you have just installed you must make sure that the app...

Page 173: ...ile Procedure adding a license file Adding a License File Procedure adding a license file 1 Log on to SMS 2 On MEAP Application Management click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file F 2 194 3 In Application License Information page shown on the screen click License Management button F 2 195 ...

Page 174: ...Procedure disabling a license file suspending a license CAUTION To invalidate or suspend a license you must first stop the application in question Once suspended the status of the license will be Not Installed and its application will no longer be available for use You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR the device with the same device serial numbe...

Page 175: ...gy MEAP Disabling a License File Procedure disabling a license file suspending a license 2 Click the name of the application that you want to disable 3 On Application License Information page click License Management button F 2 199 F 2 200 4 License Management page appears Click Disable button 5 Click Yes F 2 201 F 2 202 ...

Page 176: ...you have removed an invalidated license file you will no longer be able to download it form the MEAP device Procedure downloading removing an invalidated license file The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device with the same device serial number 1 Login to SMS 2 Application List page appears On MEAP Application Management page click the name of the applica...

Page 177: ...F 2 207 Reusable license Outline When reinstalling Disable License file should be downloaded see Chapter 0 Disabling a License File and see Chapter 0 Downloading Removing an Invalidated License File in this manual or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS before reinstallation This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications To increase convenience of users only applicat...

Page 178: ...forwarding it to a new device Service engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page not open to users Procedure to create license for forwarding 1 Log in to SMS stop the application to be forwarded see Chapter 0 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application in this manual 2 Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender https IP addres...

Page 179: ...r forwarding Procedure to create license for forwarding 5 The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed Click OK 6 Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading Click Download F 2 212 F 2 213 7 The dialogue File Download is displayed Click Save F 2 214 ...

Page 180: ...he name of product name and serial No of the device as sender and of the name of product name and serial No of the forwarding destination 12 Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company F 2 215 F 2 216 Uninstalling an Application Procedure to uninstall an application CAUTION To uninstall a MEAP application the license status should be set to Not Installed to be ...

Page 181: ...agement in domain authentication the option image WARE accounting manager is required When the setting is SSO H the card reader for the option controller card cannot be used When using SSO H the clock settings of the server managing the Active Directory and the MEAP device and the PC used to log in must be matched If there is a time difference of greater than five minutes in the clock settings an ...

Page 182: ...s recommended that the administrator s user name and password in local device authentication be changed from the factory shipment settings as soon as possible Local device authentication This is an authentication method that is used for single iR devices The authenticating users are registered in the iR device s database User management is performed on the Web application provided by the device or...

Page 183: ...ion is selected as the authentication method without linkage to these systems login will be disabled and Department ID management will not come ON If Department ID management cannot be turned ON when using domain authentication and login is disabled switch the login service to Default Authentication and turn Department ID management OFF In order to link local device authentication and Department I...

Page 184: ...to which device belongs Active Directory address is acquired retrieved from DNS Note The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub net In the Active Directory addresses the Active Directories of the same site are listed Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device Active Dire...

Page 185: ... they were returned by DNS so there is no guarantee that the same Active Directory will be accessed as in the initial settings upon device settings or changes to NW settings etc Site subnet list Site Tokyo 172 24 12 0 24 172 24 35 0 24 Site Osaka 192 168 1 0 24 Site Hakata 211 111 1 0 24 As a result since SSO Tokyo is 172 24 12 80 the subnet is 172 24 12 0 24 and is judged as belonging to site Tok...

Page 186: ...3584 33 Supported Active Directory Windows 2000 Server SP4 Windows Server 2003 SP1 Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows 2008 Server 64BitOS not supported Availability of Department Management Linkage Available only in local authentication Site access Supported SSO SDL handling Conventional SSO and SDL are not packaged in Administrator s CD of this model In addition this model does not support older vers...

Page 187: ... F 2 227 F 2 226 Initializing the Password Outline When a user forgets the password to log in to SMS initialize it to the default value of MeapSmsLogin using the switch license for initializing passwords Follow the steps below Procedure to initialize the SMS login password 1 Get the switch license for initializing the password Request the support of the regional headquarters of the Canon for switc...

Page 188: ...ber CAUTION You must not perform any other work including checking operation until the HDD has been backed up This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings and the HDD contents and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation CAUTION Do not disable the license during the period from backup using SST t...

Page 189: ...ck up the HDD of the iR the PC must have approx 1024MB of free space at maximum Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up T 2 84 Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 1 Switching Login Service Backup of Login User Information If SSO H is used for the login service switch to default authentication before backing up the user information Although SS...

Page 190: ...ting the device using SST When starting SST select the target device type as Single and click Start button 5 Generating backup data to transfer it to the PC uploading Click Upload Data button of SST and select Meapback bin as the item to be backed up to click Start button F 2 230 F 2 231 6 Saving backup data Upon the backup data transferred to the PC enter an appropriate file name and click OK to ...

Page 191: ...nitialized by following the procedure shown in When SMS Cannot Be Accessed in Login to SMS in this manual F 2 234 Procedures to Restore Backup Data 1 Connecting to the device Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2 Restoring backup file Click Upload Data button and select the data backed up in the previous ste...

Page 192: ...ed as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a general user In order to obtain a special license file a service technician needs to contact a person in charge of support of a sales company When contacting the person in charge of support the service technician also needs to provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed In the support departments of regiona...

Page 193: ...is the same as normal installation 5 Importing user information As necessary make login service selections and import user information Note When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications make sure to reinstall the previously installed applications Unless reinstalling them MEAP counter will not be released and the message The number of applications that can be installed has exceede...

Page 194: ... the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a conflict or wrong sequence of registration use You can access to SMS in this condition so that you can take necessary measures for example you can stop application that may cause the trouble If default authentication has been selected the mode of authentication remains valid otherwise the message The login ...

Page 195: ... Product Name Safe Mode F 2 241 CAUTION If the device has been started in the MEAP SAFE mode all MEAP applications stop and the status becomes Installed This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is cancelled and the device is started again in normal mode It is therefore necessary to access SMS after normal startup and start the MEAP application F 2 242 How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode 1...

Page 196: ...ion of MEAP Console Logs Overview When debugging a MEAP application console logs need to be collected in some cases The following shows how to collect MEAP console logs using commercially available terminal software and service mode What to Prepare PC connected with the same network as the device Commercially available terminal software Note In the procedure shown in this manual Tera Term Pro and ...

Page 197: ...d press OK button 5 Check to see that it is reflected in setting field and restart the device F 2 248 F 2 249 F 2 250 PC setting procedure when Tera Term is used 1 Install the terminal software on the PC 2 Start the terminal software make the following settings and then click the OK button Connection Select TCP IP Default Host Device Host Name or IP Address Service Select Telnet TCP port Enter 190...

Page 198: ...he OK button Terminal ID VT100 New line Receive LF 5 Select Log from the File menu F 2 253 F 2 254 6 The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear Set the save destination path and the file name and then click the Save button 7 Perform the operation whose log you want to collect 8 Click the Close button in the log dialog Note To suspend log collection click the Pause b...

Page 199: ...e logs that have been collected are pasted on Notepad and displayed Change directory The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed F 2 258 F 2 259 F 2 260 9 Open the file saved in the save destination and check that the logs are stored correctly Note Depending on the MEAP application the log output setting needs to be made in order to collect logs CAUTION After collecting l...

Page 200: ...ock for Connect using 3 Enter the IP address of the target device in Host address and enter 19001 fixed in Port number F 2 262 F 2 263 F 2 264 4 Click the Properties icon on the Hyper Terminal screen 5 The Console Properties dialog will appear Select the Settings tab select VT100 for Emulation and then click the OK button 6 Return to the Hyper Terminal window and select Transfer Capture Text from ...

Page 201: ...in which the MEAP application uses the default is 8000 for the port on HTTP server and 8443 for the port on HTTPS server In the case that these ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application the MEAP application cannot use the HTTP or HTTPS server s By changing the following ports to use however the MEAP application can be used as well as the existing system HTTP serv...

Page 202: ...re of HTTP Server 1 Startup SERVICE MODE in level 2 2 Press COPIER Option NETWORK buttons 3 Press or button until MEAP PN is shown on the screen Press MEAP PN button F 2 272 F 2 273 4 Press the port number to specify on the control panel the numerical value input in the field is displayed and press OK button 5 Check to see that it is reflected in setting field and turn off the main power and then ...

Page 203: ...edure of HTTPS Server 1 Startup SERVICE MODE in level 2 2 Press COPIER Option NETWORK buttons 3 Press or button until MEAP SSL is shown on the screen Press MEAP SSL button 4 Press the port number to specify on the control panel the numerical value input in the field is displayed and press OK button F 2 276 F 2 277 5 Check to see that it is reflected in setting field and turn off the main power and...

Page 204: ...rk only on the conventional applications that support the MEAP application driver Cannot use USB keyboards Device cannot be detected Cannot use USB keyboards OFF default Native driver Cannot use USB keyboards Device cannot be detected Can use USB keyboards Can use USB keyboards Via software keyboards only Note When any settings changes are made the device must be restarted Setting the USB driver f...

Page 205: ...d keyboard When the software keyboard window is displayed characters can be entered from the USB keyboard in line entry not possible When the software keyboard window is not displayed entered characters will not be remembered The characters which can be entered from a USB keyboard is only a character which can be entered from the software keyboard Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboa...

Page 206: ...erence use registration 1 Start SERVICE MODE in Level 1 2 Press COPIER Function CLEAR buttons 3 Press or button for several times until USBM CLR is shown on the screen Press USBM CLR button F 2 280 F 2 281 4 Press OK button to restart this device USB Device report print To check the vendor IDs idVendor and the product IDs idProduct registered in this device by means of declaration in Manifest file...

Page 207: ...g 1 Atr 80 MxPwr 200mA I If 0 Alt 0 EPs 2 Cls 08 stor Sub 06 Prot 50 Driver sub storage E Ad 81 I Atr 02 Bulk MxPS 512 Ivl 0ms E Ad 02 O Atr 02 Bulk MxPS 512 Ivl 31875us MEAP oreferred device information AppID 8c72686b 29c2 46c5 a07a a6c4177a6le3 VID 04A9 PID 2680 AppID 8c72686b 29c2 46c5 a07a a6c4177a6le3 VID 1234 PID 5678 AppID 8c72686b 29c2 46c5 a07a a6c4177a6le3 VID 4321 PID 8765 Application I...

Page 208: ...yed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned to the input device connected gpusbex It is displayed when a USB device which specific vendor ID Product ID are preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API is connected and the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned E Endpoint The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown T 2 88 Right or wrong of report output ...

Page 209: ...latform Micro Edition Java 2 Platform Micro Edition One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun Microsystems Inc It is applied for MEAP Other devices such as cellular phones and PDA J2RE Java 2 Runtime Environment A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming language of Java2 This set includes Java virtual machine providing runtime environment for Java applications among othe...

Page 210: ...nt for efficient access services When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC it searches the file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found If the requested file is not stored in the cache it accesses the remote server of the URL to acquire the file and at the same time stores the acquired file in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next re...

Page 211: ...e copy screen copy tab on the control panel This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel Default value 1 display Setting range item 0 hide 1 display Setting Procedure 1 Start SERVICE MODE in Level 1 2 Press COPIER Option DSPLY SW buttons 3 Press UI COPY button F 2 288 F 2 289 4 Press either 0 hide or 1 display on control panel the numerical value input in th...

Page 212: ...ing screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen As for the screens for jam and no toner the warning screen animation can be displayed by pressing the followings Device Screen Recovery Procedure As for the screen for door opening the warning screen cannot be displayed because there is no display for Device Screen Recovery Procedure Default value 1 No activation of warning display Setting ...

Page 213: ...d processing of e Maintenance imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment Major Functions Service Call Button If a user touches Service call button when corrupt image paper jam or and other problems has occurred E RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW Moreover E RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request Service Browser Service browser is a ...

Page 214: ... service call log which has been detected by E RDS as an unsent log at the time of power on An alarm log or service call log waiting for retry after its transmission failed When service mode menu transmission when an alarm log or service call error was detected failed Service mode menu data of which processing for acquisition has been already performed when an alarm or service call error subject t...

Page 215: ...Default https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 E RDS Setup Confirmation and preparation in advance To monitor a device with e Maintenance imageWARE Remote the following settings are required 1 Advance confirmation Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e Maintenance imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW 2 Advance preparations Interview the user s system adminis...

Page 216: ... button and enter the System Management ID and System PIN to perform a log in 2 Setting IP address related items 1 Touch the Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings buttons 2 Set the IP address based on the result obtained in 2 Advance preparations Information item 1 and touch the OK button For automatic acquisition select from DHCP RARP BOOTP For manual setting set t...

Page 217: ...led select Secondary DNS Server and make settings 4 When proxy settings are not made touch the Close button to reboot the device F 2 299 F 2 300 4 Proxy Settings 1 Select TCP IP Settings from breadcrumbs of the left columns and then Touch it 2 Touch the TCP IP Settings Proxy Settings 3 Set the proxy server based on the result obtained in 2 Advance preparations Information item 3 a Use Proxy to On ...

Page 218: ...t the following items based on the result obtained in 2 Advance preparations Information item 4 Set Use Proxy Authentication to On Enter User name and Password and touch the OK button f Touch the OK button F 2 303 F 2 304 4 Touch the Close button 5 Reboot the device CAUTION When changes are made to the above mentioned network settings be sure to reboot the device F 2 305 ...

Page 219: ...isplayed Max 30 latest loggings retained Max 128 characters for Error information ERDS DAT Lv 1 COPIER Function CLEAR Initialization of E RDS SRAM data SRAM data of E RDS is initialized and returned to the factory setting value at shipment CA KEY Lv 2 COPIER Function CLEAR Initialization of CA certificate When the power is turned OFF ON after execution the CA certificate in the factory setting is ...

Page 220: ...uching the button at the center of the lower side of the screen displays explanation of each item or detailed operation guide In case of Mode List Classic this button is not appeared F 2 306 2 Select COPIER Function CLEAR ERDS DAT and touch the OK button NOTE This operation initializes the E RDS settings to factory setting values For the setting values to be initialized see the section of Initiali...

Page 221: ...erformed the CA certificate in the factory setting is automatically installed 1 Start Service Mode at Level 2 2 Select COPIER Function CLEAR CA KEY and touch the OK button F 2 308 OK is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized When NG is displayed see the section of Troubleshooting to execute the remedy and then perform initialization of the CA certificate again and check to see if the CA ce...

Page 222: ... mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW F 2 311 7 Select COM TEST and then touch OK NOTE This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW If the communication is successful OK is displayed If NG failed appears refer to the Troubleshooting and repeat until OK is displayed NOTE The c...

Page 223: ...COPIER Option USER SCALL SW 3 Touch the numeric button 1 on the control panel the setting value is changed to 1 and touch the OK button The data is reflected to the setting value field F 2 314 F 2 315 NOTE When the function is enabled the Service Call button is displayed on the bottom of the counter check screen displayed by touching the counter check button Steps for settings of service call comp...

Page 224: ...equest Users should follow the instructions as described below to request a service call 1 Touch the Counter Check button on the control panel to display the counter check screen and touch the Service Call button F 2 317 F 2 318 2 Touch the Select Request button CAUTION When a service call has been already requested another service call cannot be sent The previous service call needs to be canceled...

Page 225: ...l button and touch the Yes button in the check screen NOTE E RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing and sends the alarm to UGW F 2 321 F 2 322 Steps to Service Browser settings 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 For the procedures see Steps to E RDS settings step 1 2 Select COPIER Function INSTALL BRWS ACT and then touch OK NOTE E RDS sends browser information to UGW at th...

Page 226: ...s step 1 2 Select COPIER Function CLEAR ERDS DAT and then touch OK Setting values and data to be initialized The following E RDS settings internal data and Alarm filtering information are initialized COPIER Function INSTALL E RDS COPIER Function INSTALL RGW ADR COPIER Function INSTALL RGW PORT COPIER Function INSTALL COM LOG CAUTION In case of replacing the CA certificate file even if initializati...

Page 227: ...ission of a service mode menu list postServiceModeMenu due to change of the setting value in the service mode menu the service mode data is obtained at every retry to be sent In the case of a SOAP transmission error at transmission of browser information postBrowserInfo due to change of the license status of the device s web browser option the browser information is stored in the retry information...

Page 228: ... Transmission timing Detailed procedure Transmission information Error occurs When the WEB browser option license is entered transferred 1 1 When the power is turned ON check the license condition of the WEB browser option 2 Send browser information to UGW when the license status is turned ON from OFF due to entry of a license or when the license status is turned OFF from ON due to license transfe...

Page 229: ...G Command enter 127 0 0 1 and touch the Start button Does the screen display Response from the host See the next figure YES Proceed to Step 3 NO There is a possibility that the main unit s network settings are wrong Check the details of the IPv4 settings once more F 2 328 3 Confirmation from another PC connected to same network Request the user to ping the main unit from a PC connected to same net...

Page 230: ...touch Start Does the screen display Response from the host YES Proceed to Remedy 2 NO There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong Reconfirm the address with the user s system administrator F 2 331 Remedy 2 Troubleshooting using communication log COM LOG 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Select COPIER Function INSTALL COM LOG and touch the blank field on the right side The communica...

Page 231: ...rformed then device information on the UGW becomes invalid Causes When registration of the E RDS is deleted from the UGW the status will be changed to that the communication test has not completed because related information has lost from a database So device information will also become invalid if that condition will be left for seven days without performing the communication test Remedy Perform ...

Page 232: ...DS 2 0500 0003 SUSPEND Communication test is not performed Rebooting the device while the communication test had not been performed although E RDS is enabled Perform a communication test COM TEST 3 0xxx 0003 E RDS switch is setted OFF A communication test has been attempted with the E RDS switch being OFF Set E RDS switch E RDS to 1 and then perform a communication test COM TEST 4 0xxx 0003 Server...

Page 233: ...tps a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 19 8xxx 2002 URL server specified is illegal A URL different to that specified by the UGW has been set Check that the value of URL of UGW RGW ADR is https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 No Code Error strings Cause Remedy 20 8xxx 2003 Network is not ready try later Communication attempted without confirming network connection just after booting up a device in ...

Page 234: ... being run or Service Browser is being set try again after a period of time 31 8xxx 2048 Service not found There is a mistake in the UGW URL and UGW cannot be accessed Path is wrong Check that the value of URL of UGW RGW ADR is https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 32 8xxx 2052 URL error The data which is not URL is inputted into URL field Check that the value of URL of UGW RGW ADR is https a01 u...

Page 235: ... Yes 1 You can select the version allowed Remote Update T 2 97 a UGW linked Download and Update Full Remote Update If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting are registered on UGW in advance full remote firmware update is available on an imageRUNNER ADVANCE series device Upon downloaded from CDS the firmware is updated on the device UGW 1 Set up customers devic...

Page 236: ... Local UI Local UI Auto No No Yes 1 1 Only the latest version of Remote update enabled version is downloadable Installing MEAP Application System Option The following is the installation method of MEAP application system option which is enabled by applying CDS a LMS linked MEAP Application System Option Installation If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE series device is connected to the external network user ...

Page 237: ...irmware compatibility Yes Checking special firmware Yes Checking latest firmware version Yes Yes Registering deleting firmware distribution schedule Yes Yes Yes Confirming and downloading firmware Yes Yes Yes Yes Updating downloaded firmware Yes Yes Yes Cancelling downloaded firmware Yes Yes Yes Acquiring firmware distribution information registered from UGW Yes Notifying firmware version informat...

Page 238: ... UI Distribution setting Download Via User mode Remote UI Apply Update Via User mode Remote UI Download via SST Update via SST Firmware acquisition 2 1 Schedules for UGW linked distribution are maintained on CDS 2 Functioning supports periodical update with a device after firmware version V50 00 F 2 340 MEAP Application System Option Installation Flow MEAP application system option installation me...

Page 239: ...ob Function Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed This is the Updater specific specification Job Function type Receiving Printing Queued print jobs Sending Queued send jobs COPY Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ PRINT Wait for EOJ end of job Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ FAX Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ I FAX Receipt Cancel processing...

Page 240: ...Button of User Mode LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes T 2 100 T 2 101 Setting Sales Company s HQ When using devices input in the markets listed below the default setting of Sales Company s HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS Unless the setting is changed properly the desired firmwar...

Page 241: ...how to connect the device to the external network Before using UGW link or User mode see the sections below to prepare as required Enabling UGW Link Enabling Update Firmware Button of User Mode Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode NOTE External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server This section des...

Page 242: ...F 2 344 5 Ensure to enter https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif in the field beside the Delivery Server URL button If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field click Delivery Server URL button to show the virtual keypad Check the URL and enter the correct one 6 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set F 2 345 ...

Page 243: ...ttings Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and or the file server 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button F 2 346 3 Press Software Management Settings button 4 Press Test Communication button F 2 347 F 2 348 ...

Page 244: ...Service Technician Setting of Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW 0 1 Setting of UGW WebPortal In Customer Management screen set Do not distribute firmware to Distribute firmware Sales Company s HQ Setting of Authorities on UGW WebPortal See Analysis Firmware Distribution Information to grant the appropriate authorities to each account NOTE See imageWARE Remote Operator s Manu...

Page 245: ...OPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM 0 1 User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled CDS FIRM 0 User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled CDS FIRM 1 F 2 351 F 2 352 Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode To allow users to install applications using Updater the setting of application installation should be set to ON for users in advance Service Technician S...

Page 246: ...n Local PCs the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance Service Technician Setting of Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW LOCLFIRM 0 1 Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled LOCLFIRM 0 Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled LOCLFIRM 1 F 2 355 F 2 356 Enabling Scheduled Update Button of User Mode Service Technician...

Page 247: ...2 2 2 211 2 211 Technology Updater Preparation Enabling Scheduled Update Button of User Mode Technology Updater Preparation Enabling Scheduled Update Button of User Mode F 2 359 F 2 360 ...

Page 248: ... describes how to set URL of the distribution server 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button F 2 361 4 Press Settings button 5 Press Delivery Server URL to show the virtual keypad Enter the URL Delivery Server URL Enter the https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif 6 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution serv...

Page 249: ... Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button F 2 364 4 Press Settings button 5 Select a log level from Log Level dropdown list Log Level Select one of 5 levels ranging from 0 to 4 See the table below for logs output in each level Log Level Log Output Trace Information Important Message Ordinary Error System Error 0 Yes 1 Yes Yes 2 Yes Yes Yes 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Yes ...

Page 250: ...ogs output by firmware type Installation logs by MEAP application Logs related to enabled functions by system option Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors System Error Logs for internal system errors 6 Press OK button to set the selected log level Now the log level is successfully set Displaying Logs Update Logs This section describes how to confirm System Option MEAP Application Installation Lo...

Page 251: ...Technology Updater System Management Operations Displaying Logs 4 Press Select Log Display button 5 Press Display Update Logs button F 2 368 F 2 369 6 System Option MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown Press OK button to exit this operation F 2 370 ...

Page 252: ... System Management Operations Displaying Logs System Logs This section describes how to confirm System Logs 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button F 2 371 4 Press Select Log Display button 5 Press Display System Logs button F 2 372 F 2 373 ...

Page 253: ...eration NOTE See the section of Debug Logs under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual for more detailed information F 2 374 Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and or the file server 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Set...

Page 254: ... the distribution server to execute the communication test to the distribution server Using the download file information for communication test the contents for test are downloaded from the file server for the communication test to the file server F 2 376 F 2 377 6 Upon the communication test completed the communication test result screen is shown Press OK button to exit this operation Caution Ca...

Page 255: ...eplacing HDD See MEAP Service Manual for further information The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored See Preparation in chapter 2 of this manual for details NOTE When formatting or replacing HDD distribution schedule downloaded firmware not updated yet and logs update system logs will be deleted How to Replace Controller Boards The steps are different depending on whic...

Page 256: ...if the user downloads the firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW linked download before A The previously downloaded firmware in the method of UGW linked download will be overridden by the subsequently downloaded one This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device The firmware downloaded in the method of Service mode linked download and...

Page 257: ...th comma or semicolon when you enter multiple E mail addresses in the field No 11 Q How long does the firmware update take A Approx 30 min However this does not include the download time Download time relies on the network environment F 2 379 FAQ on Installing MEAP Application System Option No 1 Q What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free space A An e...

Page 258: ...load and Update via Remote UI Yes Yes Yes Special Download and Update via Remote UI Yes Yes Periodical update Yes Yes Yes For install Application Installation Method Network Settings Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes T 2 105 T 2 106 No 2 Q How can operations...

Page 259: ...3 3 Periodical Service Periodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts ...

Page 260: ...ping unit C FM3 5967 1 DRBL 1 DV UNT C For C5035 C5030 10 Developing unit Bk FM3 5968 1 DRBL 1 DV UNT K For C5035 C5030 11 Image Formation System Primary transfer roller Color FC8 4401 3 DRBL 1 TR ROLC 12 Primary transfer roller Bk FC8 4401 1 DRBL 1 TR ROLK 13 Secondary transfer inner roller FC8 4402 1 Replacing when replace secondary transfer outer roller 14 Secondary transfer outer roller FC8 44...

Page 261: ...hol 34 Second delivery roller 1 Δ If necessary cleaning with alcohol 35 Third delivery roller 1 Δ If necessary cleaning with alcohol 36 Registration roller 1 Δ If necessary cleaning with alcohol 37 Pre registration guide 1 Δ If necessary cleaning with lint free paper 38 Transparency sensor RH7 7129 1 Δ Cleaning with lint free paper 39 Fixing delivery guide 1 Δ If necessary cleaning with lint free ...

Page 262: ...riodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Periodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Recycle toner bottle Dust blocking glass cleaning pad Toner filter F 3 1 ...

Page 263: ...iodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Primary transfer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Secondary transfer outer roller ITB ITB cleaning blade Transfer Separation guide unit Developing unit Y Developing unit M Developing unit C Developing unit Bk F 3 2 ...

Page 264: ...odical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Periodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Roller pressure Fixing bearing Fixing bearing Film unit 100V 120V 230V F 3 3 ...

Page 265: ...iodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Pickup idler gear Pickup idler gear Cassette separation 2 roller Cassette feeding 2 roller Cassette feeding 1 roller Cassette separation 1 roller Multi Purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi Purpose Tray Feed Roller F 3 4 ...

Page 266: ...oller 4 Fixing Inner Delivery Roller 5 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 6 Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly 7 Duplex Feed Lower Roller 8 Registration Roller 9 Pre registration Guide Assembly 10 Lightproof Sheet 11 Vertical path sensor 12 Transparency Sensor 13 Dust blocking Glass 14 Secondary Transfar Guide Assembly 15 Feed Contact Point Guide Assembly 16 Shutter cover 17 Fixing separation guide 18 Post Fixi...

Page 267: ...ement and Cleaning Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Main Controller Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System Pickup Feed System Option Data to be handled by SRAM with HDD Encryption Board ...

Page 268: ...er FC8 7818 5 Control panel side cover 1 FC8 7819 6 Control panel side cover 2 FC8 7820 7 Front right cover FM3 6104 8 Front upper cover FM3 6096 9 Toner replacement cover FC8 4111 10 Front cover FC8 4123 11 Left grip cover FC8 4143 12 Left duct cover FC8 4140 13 Left lower cover FC8 4138 14 Left upper cover FC8 4139 15 Inner bottom cover FC8 4149 16 Reader left cover FC8 6098 6077 17 Reader left ...

Page 269: ... 31 Right rear cover 2 FC8 4131 32 Heater switch cover FC8 4137 33 Right rear cover 3 FC8 4135 34 Right lower sub cover 2 FC8 5298 35 Right lower sub cover 3 FC8 5335 36 Right lower cover FC8 4875 37 casset right upper sub cover 2 38 Right lower sub cover 1 FC8 4922 39 Casset grip 40 casset right upper cover 2 41 casset right upper sub cover 1 FC8 4861 42 casset right upper sub cover 3 43 Right fr...

Page 270: ...ear cover 2 59 Inner rear cover 1 55 Output tray 60 Inner right cover 53 Output frame 61 Inner rear cover 1 No Name Service Parts No Refarence 52 Inner output cover 53 Output frame FC8 5363 54 Output tray guide 55 Output tray FC8 4144 56 Output stopper FC8 4766 57 Inner rear cover 3 FC8 4917 58 Inner rear cover 2 FC8 4145 59 Inner rear cover 1 FC8 4915 60 Inner right cover 61 Inner output sensor c...

Page 271: ...cement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout List of Main Unit Unit Layout Hopper Unit Control Panel Recycle toner container F 4 4 ...

Page 272: ...ts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout Primary transfer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Secondary transfer outer roller ITB ITB cleaning blade Transfer Separation guide unit Developing unit Y Developing unit M Developing unit C Developing unit Bk F 4 5 ...

Page 273: ...List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout Drum Unit Y Toner container Y Toner container M Toner container C Toner container Bk Developing Assembly Y Drum Unit C Developing Assembly C Drum Unit M Developing Assembly M Drum Unit Bk Developing Assembly Bk Process Unit ITB Unit ITB Cleaning Unit Laser Scanner Unit F 4 6 ...

Page 274: ...7 15 Developing Assembly M C5051 C5045 FM3 8978 16 Developing Assembly C C5051 C5045 FM3 8979 17 Developing Assembly Bk C5051 C5045 FM3 8939 18 Developing Assembly Y C5035 C5030 FM3 8973 19 Developing Assembly M C5035 C5030 FM3 8974 20 Developing Assembly C C5035 C5030 FM3 8975 21 Developing Assembly Bk C5035 C5030 FM3 8976 22 Process Unit NPN 23 Laser Scanner Unit C5051 C5045 FM3 5420 24 Laser Sc...

Page 275: ...ette 1 pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL3 No Name Main Unit Service Parts No Refarence SL2 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0408 SL3 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0408 SL5 First delivery flapper solenoid Second and Third Delivery Unit FL3 4274 SL6 Second delivery flapper solenoid Second and Third Delivery Unit FL3 1169 SL7 Third delivery fla...

Page 276: ...purpose pickup clutch CL1 Multi purpose tray lifting solenoid SL4 Registration shutter solenoid SL1 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence CL1 Multi purpose pickup clutch Device Parts rear FH6 5076 SL1 Registration shutter solenoid Device Parts rear FK2 6871 SL4 Multi purpose tray lifting solenoid Device Parts rear FK2 7310 F 4 9 T 4 6 ...

Page 277: ...utch Y CL2 Toner supply clutch M CL3 Toner supply clutch C CL4 Toner supply clutch Bk CL5 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence CL2 Toner supply clutch Y Main Drive Unit FK2 7285 CL3 Toner supply clutch M Main Drive Unit FK2 7285 CL4 Toner supply clutch C Main Drive Unit FK2 7285 CL5 Toner supply clutch Bk Main Drive Unit FK2 7285 F 4 10 T 4 7 ...

Page 278: ... and Cleaning List of Parts Motor Motor Duplex feed motor M20 Registration motor M19 Multi purpose motor M18 Cassette 1 pickup motor M16 Cassette 2 pickup motor M17 Toner container motor Y M9 Toner container motor M M10 Toner container motor C M11 Toner container motor Bk M12 F 4 11 ...

Page 279: ...er container motor M Device parts rear FK2 7895 M11 Toner container motor C Device parts rear FK2 7895 M12 Toner container motor Bk Device parts rear FK2 7895 M16 Cassette 1 pickup motor Device parts rear FK2 7326 M17 Cassette 2 pickup motor Device parts rear FK2 7326 M18 Multi purpose motor Device parts rear FK2 7304 M19 Registration motor Device parts rear FK2 7327 M20 Duplex feed motor Device p...

Page 280: ...ry motor M22 Fixing motor M21 Shutter motor M27 Laser shutter motor M28 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence M21 Fixing motor Device parts center FK2 7302 M22 Fixing delivery motor Device parts center FK2 7304 M27 Shutter motor Device parts center FK2 2069 M28 Laser shutter motor Device parts center FK2 2069 F 4 12 T 4 9 ...

Page 281: ...erse roller motor M24 Image skew correction motor M M32 Scanner motor YM M29 Scanner motor CBk M30 Image skew correction motor Y M31 Image skew correction motor Bk M34 Image skew correction motor C M33 Recycle toner stirring motor M26 Primary transfer separation motor M15 ITB displacement control motor M14 ITB motor M13 Third delivery motor M25 F 4 13 ...

Page 282: ...otor Second and Third Delivery Unit FK2 7304 M24 Reverse roller motor Second and Third Delivery Unit FK2 7304 M25 Third delivery motor Second and Third Delivery Unit FK2 7304 M26 Recycle toner stirring motor Process Unit FK2 7328 M29 Scanner motor YM Laser Scanner Unit M30 Scanner motor CBk Laser Scanner Unit M31 Image skew correction motor Y Laser Scanner Unit M32 Image skew correction motor M La...

Page 283: ...leaning List of Parts Motor Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Motor Drum motor Bk M4 Drum motor C M3 Drum motor M M2 Drum motor Y M1 Developing motor Bk M8 Developing motor C M7 Developing motor M M6 Developing motor Y M5 F 4 14 ...

Page 284: ... M1 Drum motor Y Main Drive Unit FK2 7298 M2 Drum motor M Main Drive Unit FK2 7298 M3 Drum motor C Main Drive Unit FK2 7298 M4 Drum motor Bk Main Drive Unit FK2 7298 M5 Developing motor Y Main Drive Unit FK2 7303 M6 Developing motor M Main Drive Unit FK2 7303 M7 Developing motor C Main Drive Unit FK2 7303 M8 Developing motor Bk Main Drive Unit FK2 7303 T 4 11 ...

Page 285: ...4 4 4 19 4 19 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Fan Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Fan Fan Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 FM1 Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 FM2 Delivery fan 2 FM9 F 4 15 ...

Page 286: ...ist of Parts Fan Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Fan Process cartridge fan front FM10 Process cartridge fan rear FM4 Fixing cooling fan front FM5 Secondary transfer exhaust fan FM8 Fixing cooling fan rear FM6 Delivery fan 1 FM7 F 4 16 ...

Page 287: ...upply cooling fan FM3 Controller fan 3 FM13 HDD cooling fan FM14 Controller fan 1 FM11 Controller fan 2 FM12 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence FM1 Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 Device parts rear FK2 7286 FM2 Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 Device parts rear FK2 3679 FM3 Power supply cooling fan Electric FK2 7286 F 4 17 ...

Page 288: ...xing cooling fan rear Device parts center FK2 3679 FM7 Delivery fan 1 Device parts center FK2 7362 FM8 Secondary transfer exhaust fan Device parts center FK2 7290 FM9 Delivery fan 2 Device parts front FK2 7291 FM10 Process cartridge fan front Device parts center FK2 3679 FM11 Controller fan 1 Electric FK2 8372 FM12 Controller fan 2 Electric FK2 8372 FM13 Controller fan 3 Electric FK2 8372 FM14 HDD...

Page 289: ... Inner delivery sensor PS37 ITB displacement sensor 1 PS25 ITB steering sensor PS24 Primary transfer detachment sensor 1 PS22 Primary transfer detachment sensor 2 PS23 Second delivery tray full sensor PS45 Second delivery sensor PS42 Duplex inlet sensor PS40 Third delivery sensor PS43 Reverse sensor PS39 ITB displacement sensor 3 PS27 ITB displacement sensor 2 PS26 ITB displacement sensor 4 PS28 F...

Page 290: ...placement sensor 3 ITB Unit WG8 5848 PS28 ITB displacement sensor 4 ITB Unit WG8 5848 PS30 Fixing pressure sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5783 PS31 Shutter HP sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5783 PS32 Shutter position sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5783 PS37 Inner delivery sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5783 PS39 Reverse sensor Second and Third Delivery Unit WG8 5848 PS40 Duplex inlet sensor Second and Third Deliv...

Page 291: ...6 12 14 13 16 15 8 9 7 11 10 New old detection fuse Y UN56 Y drum rotation sensor 1 UN31 Y drum rotation sensor 2 UN32 M drum rotation sensor 1 UN33 M drum rotation sensor 2 UN34 C drum rotation sensor 1 UN35 C drum rotation sensor 2 UN36 Bk drum rotation sensor 1 UN37 Bk drum rotation sensor 2 UN38 New old detection fuse M UN57 New old detection fuse C UN58 New old detection fuse Bk UN59 F 4 19 ...

Page 292: ... 5848 14 PS11 Toner cap position sensor C Hopper Unit WG8 5783 15 PS7 Toner container cam HP sensor C Hopper Unit WG8 5848 16 PS12 Toner cap position sensor Bk Hopper Unit WG8 5783 No Name Main Unit Service parts No Refarence TS5 ATR sensor Y Developing Assembly TS6 ATR sensor M Developing Assembly TS7 ATR sensor C Developing Assembly TS8 ATR sensor Bk Developing Assembly UN31 Y drum rotation sens...

Page 293: ... container outer cover sensor PS17 Front door sensor PS18 Laser shutter sensor PS29 Environment sensor 1 UN22 Registration sensor PS33 Patch sensor rear UN48 Patch sensor center UN49 Patch sensor front UN47 First delivery tray full sensor PS44 Right door sensor PS20 First delivery sensor PS41 Second third delivery door sensor PS21 Fixing inlet sensor PS34 Fixing arch sensor 1 PS35 Fixing arch sens...

Page 294: ...nsor Device Parts center WG8 5848 PS21 Second third delivery door sensor Device Parts center WG8 5848 PS29 Laser shutter sensor Device Parts center WG8 5783 PS33 Registration sensor Device Parts center WG8 5848 PS35 Fixing arch sensor 1 2 side Unit WG8 5848 PS36 Fixing arch sensor 2 2 side Unit WG8 5848 PS41 First delivery sensor Device Parts center WG8 5783 PS44 First delivery tray full sensor De...

Page 295: ... 1 paper level sensor B PS52 Cassette 2 paper level sensor A PS53 Cassette 2 paper sensor PS50 Cassette 1 paper sensor PS49 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor PS55 Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 Cassette 2 paper level sensor B PS54 Multi purpose paper sensor PS47 Multi purpose size sensor UN52 Duplex paper sensor PS38 Right lower door sensor PS19 F 4 21 ...

Page 296: ...te Pickup Unit FK2 0149 PS50 Cassette 2 paper sensor Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0149 PS51 Cassette 1 paper level sensor A Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0149 PS52 Cassette 1 paper level sensor B Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0149 PS53 Cassette 2 paper level sensor A Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0149 PS54 Cassette 2 paper level sensor B Cassette Pickup Unit FK2 0149 PS55 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor Cassette ...

Page 297: ...List of Parts Heater Other Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Heater Other Heater Other Main thermistor 2 TH1 Main thermistor 1 TH1 Sub thermistor 1 TH1 Sub thermistor 2 TH1 Temperature fuse TP1 Fixing heater H1 Drum heater Bk H2 F 4 22 ...

Page 298: ...4 4 4 32 4 32 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Heater Other Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Heater Other Speaker SP1 Leakage breaker ELCB1 F 4 23 ...

Page 299: ... ELCB1 Leakage breaker Electric FH7 7626 100 120V 7625 230V H1 Fixing heater Fixing Assembly H2 Drum heater Bk Process Unit FK2 7295 100 120V 7296 230V SP1 Speaker Electric FK2 0428 TH1 Main thermistor 2 Fixing Assembly TH1 Main thermistor 1 Fixing Assembly TH1 Sub thermistor 1 Fixing Assembly TH1 Sub thermistor 2 Fixing Assembly TP1 Temperature fuse Fixing Assembly T 4 18 ...

Page 300: ...itch Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Switch Switch DC interlock switch 1 SW3 Cassette 1 size switch B SW7 Cassette 2 size switch B SW9 Cassette 1 size switch A SW6 Cassette 2 size switch A SW8 DC interlock switch 2 SW4 AC interlock switch SW5 F 4 24 ...

Page 301: ...4 4 4 35 4 35 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Switch Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Switch Main power supply switch SW1 Environment switch SW2 F 4 25 ...

Page 302: ...FM3 7799 SW2 Environment switch Electric FM3 7792 SW3 DC interlock switch 1 Device Parts front FM3 7808 SW4 DC interlock switch 2 Device Parts front FM3 7808 SW5 AC interlock switch Device Parts rear FM3 7800 SW6 Cassette 1 size switch A Cassette FM3 5933 SW7 Cassette 1 size switch B Cassette FM3 5933 SW8 Cassette 2 size switch A Cassette FM3 5933 SW9 Cassette 2 size switch B Cassette FM3 5933 T 4...

Page 303: ... Parts PCB PCB Laser driver PCB Y UN13 Laser driver PCB M UN12 Laser driver PCB C UN15 Laser driver PCB Bk UN14 Toner sensor relay PCB Y UN39 Toner sensor relay PCB M UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB C UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB Bk UN42 Hub PCB Ten key PCB Inverter PCB CPU PCB Volume PCB Sub key PCB F 4 26 ...

Page 304: ...Scanner Unit FM3 5420 UN15 Laser driver PCB C Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5420 C5035 C5030 UN12 Laser driver PCB M Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5425 UN13 Laser driver PCB Y Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5425 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5425 UN15 Laser driver PCB C Laser Scanner Unit FM3 5425 UN39 Toner sensor relay PCB Y Hopper Unit FM3 7948 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M Hopper Unit FM3 7948 UN4...

Page 305: ...r UN28 M pre exposure LED PCB rear UN26 Y pre exposure LED PCB rear UN24 Y pre exposure LED PCB front UN23 M pre exposure LED PCB front UN25 C pre exposure LED PCB front UN27 Drum unit new old detection PCB UN19 Process unit relay PCB UN20 Recycle toner sensor PCB UN21 Developing sub bias PCB M UN44 Developing sub bias PCB C UN45 Developing sub bias PCB Bk UN46 Bk pre exposure LED PCB front UN29 F...

Page 306: ...posure LED PCB rear Process Unit FM3 7945 UN25 M pre exposure LED PCB front Process Unit FM3 7945 UN26 M pre exposure LED PCB rear Process Unit FM3 7945 UN27 C pre exposure LED PCB front Process Unit FM3 7945 UN28 C pre exposure LED PCB rear Process Unit FM3 7945 UN29 Bk pre exposure LED PCB front Process Unit FM3 7945 UN30 Bk pre exposure LED PCB rear Process Unit FM3 7945 UN43 Developing sub bia...

Page 307: ...DD Main controller PCB 1 Main controller PCB 2 DC controller PCB UN1 HVT 3 PCB UN18 Pickup feed driver PCB UN2 Cassette feed driver PCB UN3 AC driver PCB UN6 AC sub driver PCB UN7 12V power supply PCB UN11 24V power supply PCB 1 UN8 HVT 1 PCB UN16 Drum driver PCB UN4 Relay PCB UN5 24V power supply PCB 2 UN10 All night power PCB UN9 F 4 28 ...

Page 308: ...953 C5051 C5045 120V FM3 7937 C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 100V FM3 7952 C5035 C5030 100V FM3 7954 C5035 C5030 120V UN7 AC sub driver PCB Electric FM3 7950 UN8 24V power supply PCB 1 Electric FM3 7955 UN9 All night power PCB Electric FK2 6324 100 120V FK2 6325 230V UN10 24V power supply PCB 2 Electric UN11 12V power supply PCB Electric UN16 HVT 1 PCB Electric FK2 7348 UN17 HVT 2 PCB Electric FM3 6038 U...

Page 309: ... Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Conector 25 25 25 25 28 27 30 29 13 24 23 1 10 22 7 31 6 5 4 3 2 17 26 12 16 19 18 21 11 20 14 9 8 F 4 29 ...

Page 310: ...rum driver PCB 7 J110 UN1 DC controller PCB J5044 20 J654 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 7 J110 UN1 DC controller PCB J5044 21 J653 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 8 J111 UN1 DC controller PCB 22 J656 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 8 J111 UN1 DC controller PCB 23 J655 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 9 J112 UN1 DC controller PCB J5026 J5036 24 J5061 SW1 Main power supply switch 9 J112 UN1 DC controller PCB J5026 J5036 J5075 J5012 25 J42 TH1 Main thermistor 1 9 J1...

Page 311: ...4 4 45 4 45 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 24 32 30 35 34 33 31 1 2 11 8 7 12 6 5 4 9 25 18 17 10 3 15 16 13 14 19 21 20 F 4 30 ...

Page 312: ...S36 Fixing arch sensor 2 5 J123 UN1 DC controller PCB J5028 J5068 21 J6085 PS35 Fixing arch sensor 1 6 J124 UN1 DC controller PCB J5045 24 J6084 M21 Fixing motor 7 J125 UN1 DC controller PCB 25 J203 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB 8 J126 UN1 DC controller PCB J5071 J815 Buffer Pass Unit G1 8 J126 UN1 DC controller PCB J5071 J816 Inner Finisher A1 9 J127 UN1 DC controller PCB J5037 J809 Booklet Finisher...

Page 313: ...4 47 4 47 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 26 24 19 20 6 9 17 1 4 5 3 2 16 12 10 15 14 13 18 8 28 29 7 21 27 31 22 23 11 25 F 4 31 ...

Page 314: ... UN21 Waste toner sensor PCB 3 J207 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5048 J5046 16 J6108 UN49 Patch sensor center 3 J207 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5048 J5046 17 J6107 UN48 Patch sensor rear 3 J207 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5048 J5046 18 J6106 UN47 Patch sensor front 4 J210 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5032 J5108 19 J6076 PS40 Duplex inlet sensor 4 J210 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5032 20 J6075 PS43 ...

Page 315: ... 4 49 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 14 13 12 11 20 21 22 23 25 6 4 1 3 2 5 27 7 8 9 18 19 10 33 31 26 17 15 30 34 24 29 16 32 F 4 32 ...

Page 316: ...ickup motor 3 J215 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB 19 J6156 M17 Cassette 2 pickup motor 4 J216 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5036 J5075 J5012 20 J6103 PS31 Shutter HP sensor 4 J216 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5036 J5075 J5012 21 J6102 PS32 Shutter position sensor 4 J216 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5036 J5075 J5012 J5060 22 J6104 PS30 Fixing pressure sensor 4 J216 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB J5038 J5075 J5...

Page 317: ...4 4 4 51 4 51 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 19 3 1 2 7 5 4 10 11 8 12 9 6 15 13 16 17 14 25 24 23 22 21 20 F 4 33 ...

Page 318: ... 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5040 J5064 13 J6133 SL2 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5040 J5064 14 J6132 PS55 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5040 J5064 15 J6131 PS52 Cassette 1 paper level sensor B 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5040 J5064 16 J6130 PS51 Cassette 1 paper level sensor A 2 J235 UN3 Cassette feed d...

Page 319: ...ement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 42 45 44 43 41 40 37 33 30 17 18 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 8 9 1 3 6 5 4 2 7 19 20 31 32 29 10 11 12 13 34 16 35 36 39 14 15 38 F 4 34 ...

Page 320: ...J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 26 J6019 UN36 C drum rotation sensor 2 4 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 27 J6018 UN37 Bk drum rotation sensor 1 4 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 28 J6017 UN38 Bk drum rotation sensor 2 5 J307 UN4 Drum driver PCB 29 J6010 M1 Drum motor Y 6 J308 UN4 Drum driver PCB 30 J6009 M4 Drum motor Bk 6 J308 UN4 Drum driver PCB 31 J6014 M3 Drum motor C 6 J308 UN4 Drum driver PCB 32 J6016 M2 Drum m...

Page 321: ...4 4 4 55 4 55 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 31 23 24 2 11 16 1 3 34 4 9 30 22 19 21 18 20 15 32 14 8 10 7 12 5 6 F 4 35 ...

Page 322: ...y PCB 19 J211 UN2 Pickup feed driver PCB 7 J424 UN5 Relay PCB 20 J301 UN4 Drum driver PCB 7 J424 UN5 Relay PCB 21 J302 UN4 Drum driver PCB 8 J425 UN5 Relay PCB J5043 22 J650 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 8 J425 UN5 Relay PCB 23 J651 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 8 J425 UN5 Relay PCB 24 J652 UN18 HVT 3 PCB 9 J427 UN5 Relay PCB J5081 J802 USB Device Port B1 10 J428 UN5 Relay PCB J5080 J804 Inner Finisher A1 10 J428 UN5 Relay PCB...

Page 323: ... 4 4 57 4 57 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 26 25 21 22 32 15 19 29 18 30 31 20 3 4 8 12 13 14 10 1 2 5 6 9 7 32 11 27 F 4 36 ...

Page 324: ... Fixing heater SW5 AC interlock switch J5006 J5087 J5012 J5007 TP1 Temperature fuse 6 J1006 UN6 AC driver PCB J5006 J5010 SW1 Main power supply switch 7 J1007 UN6 AC driver PCB 32 J5005 H4 Cassette heater 32 J1008 UN6 AC driver PCB Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 8 J1009 UN6 AC driver PCB SW2 Environment switch 9 J1010 UN6 AC driver PCB J5102 Reader controll PCB 10 J1011 UN6 AC driver PCB J5038 25 J5088...

Page 325: ... 2 J204 UN12 Laser driver PCB M 8 J6159 M32 Image skew correction motor M 2 J204 UN12 Laser driver PCB M 9 J6160 M31 Image skew correction motor Y 3 J205 UN12 Laser driver PCB M 10 J6161 M29 Scanner motor YM 4 J202 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 11 J103 UN15 Laser driver PCB C 5 J204 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 12 J6166 M33 Image skew correction motor C 5 J204 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 13 J6165 M34 Image sk...

Page 326: ...Drum unit new old detection PCB 13 J5095 UN45 Developing sub bias PCB C 4 J905 UN19 Drum unit new old detection PCB J5096 14 J6120 TS8 ATR sensor Bk 4 J905 UN19 Drum unit new old detection PCB 14 J5096 UN46 Developing sub bias PCB Bk 5 J601 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 15 J6115 UN23 Y pre exposure LED PCB front 6 J602 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 16 J6147 UN24 Y pre exposure LED PCB rear 6 J602 UN20...

Page 327: ...J659 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M 10 J6038 PS10 Toner cap position sensor M 2 J659 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M 11 J6037 PS2 Toner supply sensor M 2 J659 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M 12 J6036 TS2 Piezo sensor M 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C 13 J6152 PS7 Toner container cam HP sensor C 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C 14 J6041 PS11 Toner cap position sensor C 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor ...

Page 328: ...d Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 14 15 9 43 1 4 8 11 41 7 10 17 42 13 12 6 5 3 40 2 34 30 33 29 38 21 19 26 16 45 44 37 31 36 35 32 49 28 48 47 20 24 22 39 23 50 18 25 27 46 F 4 40 ...

Page 329: ...troller PCB 1 13 J1026 Main controller PCB 1 CC VI I F cable TBD Option 14 J1006 Main controller PCB 1 USB FLASH no use 15 J1013 Main controller PCB 1 POSTPONE I F dealer only 16 J1025 Main controller PCB 1 YON RISER PCI Bridge option 17 J1022 Main controller PCB 1 TPM 18 J11 Main controller PCB 2 DDR2 SDRAM M1 19 J12 Main controller PCB 2 DDR2 SDRAM M0 20 J13 Main controller PCB 2 DDR2 DIMM P 21 ...

Page 330: ...J No Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo J No Symbol Parts Name 1 J1002 CPU PCB Relay PCB 2 J1003 CPU PCB 8 J4001 Sub key PCB 2 J1003 CPU PCB 9 J9001 Inverter PCB 3 J1006 CPU PCB 10 J2002 Hub PCB 4 J1007 CPU PCB 11 J1 LCD 5 J1008 CPU PCB 12 J3002 Ten key PCB 6 J1009 CPU PCB 13 J3001 Ten key PCB 7 J4002 Sub key PCB 14 J5001 Volume PCB F 4 41 T 4 35 ...

Page 331: ...agement Import Export 2 Execute the following in service mode The Settings Registration data values that cannot be backed up by using remote UI are printed out as a list Lv 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P USER PRT Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Right Upper Cover and the Right Rear Cover 1 F 4 42 2 Open the HDD Lid 1 screw 3 Remove the signal cable and the power cable from the HDD x2 Signal cable ...

Page 332: ... HDD Unit 2 screws x2 6 Remove the plate 2 screws x2 F 4 46 F 4 47 7 1 Remove the HDD Newtype with gusket 4 screws x4 HDD HDD Fixing Plate 7 2 Remove the HDD 4 screws 1 grounding plate 4 spacers 4 vibration prevention dumpers x4 HDD HDD fixing plate Spacers Vibration prevention dumpers HDD grounding plate CAUTION At installation Not install the grounding plate F 4 48 F 4 49 ...

Page 333: ... switch perform the following operations from Settings Registration mode In Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Page Totals be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created Set the following Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask In Management Settings User Management System Manager Information Settings...

Page 334: ...crew RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw Procedure 1 If the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader power cable Cable guide Wire saddles F 4 50 F 4 51 2 Remove the USB cable and the control panel communication cable x2 Control panel communication cable USB cable 3 Remove the 2 screws and lift the grip x2 Grips 4 Hold...

Page 335: ...ller PCB 1 is fixed to the device F 4 56 Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 Actions before Replacement You can evacuate by contents of the SRAM in Main Controller PCB 2 when you use SST execute Lev1 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD OK 5 BACKUP But you cannot use this function when there is HDD Encryption Board When there is HDD Encryption Board 1 Backup of the set registered data Use the Remote UI ...

Page 336: ...Procedure 2 If the Reader Unit is installed remove the reader signal cable 1 connector 3 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook Hook Left rear sub cover F 4 58 F 4 59 Procedure 1 If the FAX Unit is installed remove the connector of communication cable 2 Hold the grip and remove the Main Controller PCB 2 2 screws x2 Grip NOTE When the option PCB is installed remove it F 4 60 F 4 61 ...

Page 337: ...DOWNLOAD OK 5 BACKUP has been executed before replacement execute Lev1 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD OK 8 Download Menu 2 2 Restore If the machine has the HDD Encryption Board 1 Execute the following in remote UI to restore the backup data Management Settings Data Management Import Export 2 Specify and register the data again See the list of Settings Registration data that was printed before rep...

Page 338: ...r 3 Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover 4 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 Rubber caps Rear cover Claw F 4 62 Procedure 1 When the Reader is installed remove the reader power cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader power cable Cable guide Wire saddles NOTE If the Fax Unit is not installed refer to step 2 1 If the Fax Unit is ...

Page 339: ...ing the DC Controller PCB Actions before Replacement When replacing the DC Controller PCB execute the following Service Mode to backup the DC Controller PCB SRAM Execute COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP LEVEL2 After ACTIVE is displayed for approx 2 minutes OK is displayed After the above execution is completed turn OFF the main power supply Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper ...

Page 340: ...achine Actions after Replacement Turn ON the main power supply and restore the DC Controller PCB SRAM Execute COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES LEVEL2 After the above execution ACTIVE is displayed for approx 2 minutes then OK is displayed Restoration is completed now Removing the Main Power Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Remove th...

Page 341: ... Power Unit Procedure 7 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 2 claws 2 hooks x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook F 4 70 Procedure 1 Open the Drum Driver Unit 1 screw Drum Driver Unit Screw 2 Remove the FIN Lattice Connector Unit 2 connectors 1 wire saddle 3 screws x3 x2 Screws Screw Connector Connector Wire saddle Finisher laffice connector unit F 4 71 F 4 72 ...

Page 342: ... saddles Wire saddles x14 x5 Connector Main power unit 12 Connectors Connector F 4 73 F 4 74 Removing the AC Driver Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Remove the Left Rear Cover and Left Rear Sub Cover 4 Remove the Rear Cover 5 Remove the Rear Lower Cover Procedure 1 Remove all the connector on the PCB and remove the AC Driver 6 wire sad...

Page 343: ... Cleaning Main Controller Removing the Control Panel Procedure Removing the Control Panel Procedure 1 Pull out the Control Panel and remove the mold Mold Control panel 2 Remove the stopper 2 screws x2 Stopper F 4 76 F 4 77 3 Stand the Control Panel as indicated 4 Remove the cover 1 seal 1 screw Cover Seal F 4 78 F 4 79 ...

Page 344: ...Cleaning Main Controller Removing the Control Panel Procedure Parts Replacement and Cleaning Main Controller Removing the Control Panel Procedure 5 Remove the cable 2 wire saddles 2 connectors x2 x2 Connector Connector Wire saddles F 4 80 ...

Page 345: ...aning Laser Exposure System Cleaning the Dust blocking Glass Procedure Laser Exposure System Cleaning the Dust blocking Glass Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Glass Cleaning Tool F 4 81 F 4 82 2 Clean the Dust blocking Glass from the 4 holes of the Waste Toner Container Dust blocking glass cleaning tool F 4 83 ...

Page 346: ...er Procedure 1 Remove the Glass Cleaning Tool 2 Remove the Dust blocking Glass Cleaning Pad F 4 84 F 4 85 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the ITB Cover 2 screws loosen CAUTION Do not touch the ITB surface When installing the ITB Cover be sure to push it to the left If the pushing is insufficient the plate is not i...

Page 347: ...ever in the right direction until the protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure ITB pressure release lever CAUTION Before operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever check that the Right Lower Cover is open F 4 88 F 4 89 5 Remove the 2 connectors x2 CAUTION When pulling out the ITB Unit be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever below the posit...

Page 348: ...ulling it out F 4 91 6 Pull out the ITB Unit up to the stop label position flatly 2 screws Stop label position x2 7 Hold the ITB Unit as show in the below figure and remove in the direction of the arrow F 4 92 F 4 93 CAUTION When installing the ITB Unit align the ITB Unit with the 2 positions at the lead edge of rail ITB unit Rails F 4 94 Removing the Process Unit CAUTION When installing removing ...

Page 349: ...F 4 96 F 4 97 F 4 98 12 Take the 2 rails of Process Unit back to the host machine Procedure CAUTION When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit When removing the Laser Scanner Unit be sure to check the serial numbers affixed on both units and installation position of the units before operation Before installing the units be sure to see the foregoing serial numbers and install each unit to the original p...

Page 350: ... Remove the Drum Heater 1 screw Drum heater Screw 2 Remove the Image Formation Suction Duct 1 screw 1 claw Image formation suction duct Screw Claw NOTE When removing the Laser Scanner Unit 1 Y M laser F 4 100 F 4 101 3 Remove the Left Upper Cover 5 rubber caps 5 screws 3 hooks 5 claws Rubber caps x5 x3 x5 Claws Claws Left upper cover 4 Remove the Left Duct Unit 2 screws x2 Left duct unit F 4 102 F...

Page 351: ... Laser Scanner Unit 4 connectors Laser scanner unit Connectors Connectors x2 x2 CAUTION Since the Laser Scanner Unit needs adjustment do not disassemble it F 4 104 F 4 105 CAUTION At installation push the protrusion of Laser Scanner Unit into the hole of rear plate and adjust the front boss with the plate hole and install it Boss Protrusion Laser scanner unit Protrusion Hole CAUTION At installatio...

Page 352: ...w Claw 2 Remove the Fan Protection Plate and the Toner Filter Fan protection plate Toner filter F 4 106 F 4 107 Removing the ITB Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the ITB Cover 2 screws loosen CAUTION Do not touch the ITB surface When installing the ITB Cover be sure to push it to the left If the pushing is insufficient the plate is not inser...

Page 353: ...irection until the protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure ITB pressure release lever CAUTION Before operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever check that the Right Lower Cover is open F 4 110 F 4 111 3 Remove the 2 connectors x2 CAUTION When pulling out the ITB Unit be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever below the position where clicky ...

Page 354: ...as show in the below figure and remove in the direction of the arrow F 4 113 F 4 114 CAUTION When installing the ITB Unit align the ITB Unit with the 2 positions at the lead edge of rail ITB unit Rails Actions after Replacement Be sure to execute the following procedure after replacing the ITB 1 After installing the ITB Unit put the machine into a standby state 2 When the machine is in a standby s...

Page 355: ...n swab moistened with water and tightly wrung by wiping it in one direction After cleaning make sure that there is no toner contamination on the sensor surface CAUTION Do not use the alcohol since it melts the sensor window and causes while turbidity Do not dry wipe it since the sensor window is charged and attracts the toner Patch sensor Patch sensor shutter F 4 115 Remove the Patch Sensor front ...

Page 356: ...g it 2 screws x2 Secondary Transfer Guide Grounding Cable 3 Remove the mold 4 screws 4 bosses Boss x4 F 4 117 F 4 118 4 Remove the Wire Saddle Reuse band and Edge Saddle to make the Sensor Assembly moving freely 2 Wire Saddles 1 Reuse Band 1 Edge Saddle x4 Edge Saddle Wire Saddles 5 Remove the sensor desired to be replaced Patch Sensor Rear as an example 2 Screws 1 Connector x2 Connector Actions a...

Page 357: ... Cover 3 Remove the ITB Unit Procedure CAUTION When removing installing it do not contact the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB 1 Hold the left and right grip and remove the ITB Cleaning Unit in the direction of the arrow 2 screws x2 F 4 121 2 Place the removed ITB Cleaning Unit on the paper Actions after Replacement 1 To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection make the main body in standby stat...

Page 358: ...move the ITB Cover 3 Remove the ITB Unit 4 Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit Procedure 1 Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit and put it on the paper 1 screw NOTE Hold the screw area of 2 screws on the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit so that it is easy to remove F 4 123 Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the ITB Cover 3 Remo...

Page 359: ...dure 1 Insert an A4 size paper between the Blade Unit installation position of the ITB Cleaning Unit and the sheet Sheet Paper F 4 124 2 Check that the Blade Alignment Plate is installed and then install the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit At this time be sure to move the paper inserted in step 1 toward the direction shown in the figure to prevent the sheet from flipping before the installation Paper Shee...

Page 360: ...ole area indicated in the figure below CAUTION When applying tospearl be careful not to scatter it on inside of the ITB the Drive Roller and the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller If it is scattered on inside of the ITB the Drive Roller or the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller wipe it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by hand At this time turn the motor counterclockwi...

Page 361: ... Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 3 Remove the ITB Cover 4 Remove the ITB Unit 5 Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit CAUTION Do not tough the surface of ITB If needed hold the ITB within 10mm from both edge of the belt Procedure 1 Turn over the ITB Unit 2 Remove the Push Slider 1 stop ring F 4 129 3 Pull the ITB Pressure Release Lever to the front 4 Remove the harness 3 wire saddles 1 edge saddle x4 5 R...

Page 362: ...ON Make sure that it is removed from the front and rear hooks Make sure to align the claw of the ITB Cover with the cut off of protection sheet 2 claws x2 Hooks ITB cover Claws Claw F 4 132 7 Pull out the front pin NOTE To lock the pressure pull out the pin while holding the ITB Unit with hand 1 screw 8 Bend the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit by 90 degree and reinstall it with the pin remove...

Page 363: ...thin 10mm from the edge and remove it upward 10mm 10mm F 4 135 F 4 136 CAUTION Do not touch the surface of ITB Drive Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure CAUTION When replacing ITB with a new one affix the label to the specific position near the Waste Toner Ejection Mouth of the ITB Cleaning Unit after the ITB Unit is installed When a...

Page 364: ...e the Auto gradation correction 3 Execute the ITB equilibrium position detection in service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INT This service mode will take approx 2 to 3 minutes Removing the Primary Transfer Roller Bk Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the ITB Cover 3 Remove the ITB Unit 4 Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit 5 Remove the ITB Procedure CAU...

Page 365: ... place it onto the paper in the position where the roller is placed upside 2 claws Paper ITB unit ITB cover Claws x2 4 While holding the front bushing pinch the claw and remove the Disengagement Engagement Arm Stopper Bushing F 4 137 F 4 138 F 4 139 5 Remove the Primary Transfer Roller Bk 1 bushing 1 spring Spring Primary transfer roller Bk Bushing NOTE There is no particular direction for the Pri...

Page 366: ...andby state 2 Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT Level 1 This service mode will take approx 2 to 3 minutes Removing the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the ITB Cover 3 Remove the ITB Unit 4 Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit 5 Remove the ITB Procedure NOTE This proc...

Page 367: ... it onto the paper 2 claws Paper ITB unit ITB cover Claws x2 4 Turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever to make the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y lifted ITB sub pressure release lever Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer roller M Primary transferr oller Y F 4 141 F 4 142 F 4 143 5 While holding the front bushing pinch the claw and remove the Disengagement Engagement Arm Disengagement engageme...

Page 368: ...r surface Primary transfer roller C Paper CAUTION After installing the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever to make sure that the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y moves up and down After checking be sure to make the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y lowered position ITB sub pressure release lever Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer roller M Primary transfer roller ...

Page 369: ...ove the ITB Cover 3 Remove the ITB Unit 4 Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit 5 Remove the ITB Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure F 4 147 1 Pull out the pin and make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight 2 Install the pin removed in step 1 to the original position 3 Remove the...

Page 370: ...ry Transfer Bearing Holder 1 screw Grounding plate Secondary transfer bearing holder 5 Remove the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller F 4 150 F 4 151 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction when installing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Actions after Replacement 1 To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection make the main body in standby state 2 Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position ...

Page 371: ...B Cleaning Unit 6 Remove the ITB Procedure 1 Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is in the below position ITB sub pressure release lever 2 Stand the ITB Unit on the ITB Cover 2 claws x2 ITB cover Claws Claw F 4 152 F 4 153 3 Place papers on the ITB Cover to prevent bending of the ITB because pressure is applied to a point when installing the ITB 4 Hold within 10mm from the edge of the IT...

Page 372: ...act with the ITB edge at the center of the figure and then align the marking line on the right side of the figure with the position of the ITB Marking Line ITB Displacement sensor flag Belt Retainer Sheet CAUTION When installing the ITB be sure that the Plastic Film on the ITB Unit is inside of the ITB F 4 156 7 Return the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit to straight and then install the pin r...

Page 373: ...mation System Reinstalling the ITB Procedure 9 Install the rear pin 1 screw 10 Push the ITB Pressure Release Lever and install the Bush Slider to the boss 1 stop ring F 4 159 F 4 160 CAUTION Make sure that there is no gap between the ITB Pressure Release Lever and the Plate space 11 Install the harness 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles x4 F 4 161 ...

Page 374: ...ning Unit CAUTION When replacing ITB with a new one after installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit apply tospearl on the whole area indicated in the figure below When applying tospearl be careful not to scatter it on inside of the ITB the Drive Roller and the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller If it is scattered on inside of the ITB the Drive Roller or the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller wipe...

Page 375: ...ion near the Waste Toner Ejection Mouth of the ITB Cleaning Unit after the ITB Unit is installed When affixing the new label be sure to remove the old label and replace with the new one on the same position Actions after Replacement 1 Turn ON the power of the host machine 2 When the machine is in standby condition execute the Auto gradation correction 3 Execute the ITB equilibrium position detecti...

Page 376: ...tle CAUTION Do not tilt the Recycle Toner Bottle Because it may cause misdetection on the Full Detection Sensor F 4 162 F 4 163 Pulling Out the Process Unit Preparations 1 Open theRight Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Open the Front Cover 3 Remove the ITB Cover Procedure 1 Make sure that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark of the plate If it is not ali...

Page 377: ... ITB Pressure Release Lever in the right direction and release the pressure CAUTION When releasing the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever make sure that the protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark of plate ITB pressure release lever 3 Pull out the Process Unit until it stops 2 screws x2 F 4 165 F 4 166 4 Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light...

Page 378: ...alling removing the Process Unit do not remove the Recycle Toner Bottle 1 Remove the 4 stepped screws fixed on the right and left rails x4 2 Hold the front and rear of Process Unit and remove it flatly F 4 168 F 4 169 3 Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light Paper 4 Take the 2 rails of Process Unit back to the host machine NOTE When installing the Process Uni...

Page 379: ...Cover 4 Pull out the Process Unit 5 Remove the Process Unit Procedure 1 Pull out the 2 rails of Process Unit from the host machine 2 Align the 4 protrusions of Process Unit with the positioning pin of rail and install it Protrusions of process unit Positioning pins Positioning pins Protrusions of process unit F 4 172 F 4 173 3 Install the right and left rails and the Process Unit with 4 stepped sc...

Page 380: ... the edge of each Drum Unit from above as described below If the Drum Unit is not secured it may cause the color displacement F 4 177 F 4 176 5 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the left direction to apply the pressure CAUTION When applying the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever make sure that the protrusion of grip is aligned with the lower triangle mark of plate 6 Install the ITB Cover ...

Page 381: ...he Drum Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Open the Front Cover 3 Remove the ITB Cover 4 Pull out the Process Unit Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the drum surface 1 Hold the grip with both hands press the Drum Unit against the Developing Assembly and pull it out vertically Grips F 4 180 CAUTION When removing the Drum Unit do not pull it out from one handle F 4 1...

Page 382: ...5 Remove the Drum Unit Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the drum surface 1 Hold the grip and install it from the top vertically Grips F 4 182 CAUTION When installing it at an angle the shutter may be damaged Thus make sure to install it from directly above F 4 183 2 Align the guide of Process Unit with the guide of Drum Unit and install the Drum Unit Guide of drum unit Guide of process unit Guide of...

Page 383: ...the half fold paper included in the packaging box on the Developing Assembly Bk Be sure to set the edge of half fold paper over the Toner Collecting Sheet of the Developing Assembly Toner Collecting Sheet F 4 186 NOTE 2 2 While the paper is set install the Drum Unit Bk to the host machine Drum Unit BK 2 3 Hold the folded portion and pull this paper out to the direction of arrow F 4 187 3 Hold the ...

Page 384: ...emove the Recycle Toner Bottle Procedure NOTE This procedure describes the removal of Bk Developing Assembly Go through the same procedure for removing the Y M C Developing Assembly CAUTION When installing removing it do not touch the Developing Sleeve CAUTION When installing removing the Developing Assembly be sure to remove the Recycle Toner Bottle 1 Remove the harness from the 2 harness guides ...

Page 385: ...Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C Initialization of C Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET 4 Initialization of 4 colors Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch Installing a new Developing Assembly Preparations 1 Open the Righ...

Page 386: ...on the Seal on the Developing Assembly is stressed and may cause tear of the seal F 4 194 CAUTION If the Seal on the Developing Assembly is torn remove the torn seal by pulling the end of it in the direction of the arrow At that time be careful not to leave the torn sheet in the Developing Assembly Seal Seal Front side Rear side F 4 195 3 By following installing the Drum Unit install the each colo...

Page 387: ...veloping Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M Initialization of M Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C Initialization of C Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET 4 Initialization of 4 colors Developing Ass...

Page 388: ...econdary Transfer Separation Guide Unit Procedure 3 Pinch the claws on both sides of bearing holder and remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit 4 claws x4 4 Remove the Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit 1 bushing 2 springs Bushing Secondary transfer separation guide unit Spring Spring F 4 199 F 4 200 5 Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 2 bearing holders 2 bearings Secondary ...

Page 389: ...Cover 2 Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1 Fit the side with longer shaft to the hole of Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit and install the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Longer shaft Shorter shaft Hole CAUTION After installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Rol...

Page 390: ...nd install it one after other 5 Reinstall the rear stopper Actions after Replacement When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller execute the service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING TNR COAT F 4 205 Removing the Toner Bottle manually Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw Remove the Left Re...

Page 391: ... the Reader Unit is installed remove the reader signal cable 1 connector 5 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook Hook Left rear sub cover F 4 208 F 4 209 6 Remove the Rear Cover 3 rubber caps 3 screws 1 claw x2 Rubber caps Rear cover Claw 7 When the Reader is installed remove the reader power cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader power cable Cable guide Wi...

Page 392: ...he Fax Unit is installed refer to step 8 2 8 1 Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box 2 screws x2 8 2 Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box and the FAX Unit 3 screws x3 F 4 212 F 4 213 Procedure NOTE This procedure describes the procedure of Toner Bottle Bk Go through the same procedure for Toner Bottle C M Y 1 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 2 Remove the handle 1 screw Screw 3 Ins...

Page 393: ...tion make sure to insert the Toner Container all the way in and close the small cover F 4 217 F 4 216 Removing the Main Drive Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover 4 Remove the Connector Cover 1 screw 5 When the Cassette Pedestal is installed remove the connector 5 connectors 6 har...

Page 394: ...g the Main Drive Unit Procedure 3 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 2 claws 2 hooks x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook F 4 220 Procedure 1 Remove the Left Upper Cover 5 rubber caps 5 screws x5 Rubber caps Left upper cover NOTE If the Fax Unit is installed remove it from the host machine 2 Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box 2 screws x2 F 4 221 F 4 222 ...

Page 395: ... the Main Drive Unit Procedure 3 Open the High voltage PCB 2 screws HVT PCB x2 4 Remove the Drum Driver PCB 3 screws x3 Drum driver PCB F 4 223 F 4 224 5 Remove the Harness Guide Cover 2 screws Harness guide cover x2 6 Pull out the harness of Laser Scanner and make a space by hooking the claw of harness guide 1 edge saddle 1 claw Claw Harness Edge saddle F 4 225 F 4 226 ...

Page 396: ...s 1 connector 1 claw Claw Connector Fan duct x2 8 Remove the harness of Hopper 8 connectors Connectors Connectors x8 F 4 227 F 4 228 9 Remove the 9 connectors and 10 Wire Saddles from the Drum Driver PCB Wire saddles Wire saddles Wire saddle Connectors Connectors Connectors x9 x10 Wire saddles Wire saddles Drum driver PCB Connectors 10 Remove the Main Drive Unit 2 connectors 6 screws Main drive un...

Page 397: ...ually refer to the step 1 to 4 in Removing the Toner Container manually At that time do not pull out the toner container 3 Turn OFF the power before closing the Small Cover and the Toner Replacement Cover 4 Close the 4 Small Covers and the Toner Replacement Cover Same in manual operation 5 Open the Front Cover the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 6 Remove the ITB Unit 7 Remove the Process U...

Page 398: ...eaning Image Formation System Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Procedure 4 Remove the Front Upper Right Cover 5 Remove the Delivery Tray 6 Open the 4 Small Covers and remove the 4 Toner Containers F 4 234 F 4 235 F 4 236 7 Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover 1 connector 1 wire saddle 4 screws RS x4 Wire saddle Connector F 4 237 ...

Page 399: ...ter When the option is installed 6 Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Toner Tray 1 screw M4 binding 2 While avoiding the duct sheet remove the Hopper Unit 1 connector 1 wire saddle 5 screws RS Wire saddle Connector x3 x2 Duct sheet Hopper Unit F 4 238 F 4 239 CAUTION If it is placed sideways toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the operation failure...

Page 400: ...it in order Otherwise toner supply failure may occur Actions after Replacement When replacing the Developing Assembly make sure to initialize before installing the Toner Container COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M If install the Toner Container before initialization T D ratio cannot set the right value Removing the Hopper Y Preparations 1 Release the lock of Toner Container By service mode 2 Open t...

Page 401: ...eet remove the Hopper Unit 1 connector 1 wire saddle 5 screws RS x2 x3 Connector Hopper Unit Wire saddle Duct sheet F 4 245 F 4 246 CAUTION If it is placed sideways toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the operation failure Thus stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper Paper F 4 247 CAUTION When installing the Hopper align the cut off A part of Bottle Fixing Ring with the Bottle ...

Page 402: ...r Unit in order Otherwise toner supply failure may occur Actions after Replacement When replacing the Developing Assembly make sure to initialize before installing the Toner Container COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y If install the Toner Container before initialization T D ratio cannot set the right value Removing the Hopper C Preparations 1 Release the lock of Toner Container By service mode 2 Op...

Page 403: ...ide 2 screws RS x2 4 Remove the Hopper Upper Stay 3 screws RS x3 5 Remove the Secondary Delivery Duct 2 screws P tight x2 F 4 251 F 4 252 F 4 253 6 Remove the rail Retaining Plate 4 screws M4 binding x4 7 Remove the Toner Tray 1 screw M4 binding 8 While avoiding the Duct Sheet remove the Hopper Unit 1 connector 1 wire saddle 5 screws RS x3 x2 Hopper Unit Duct sheet Connector Wire saddle F 4 254 F ...

Page 404: ...d install it to the host machine A B F 4 258 CAUTION When installing the Toner Tray align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever and install it Rod lever Toner cover Open Close rod lever F 4 259 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container be sure not to shake it CAUTION When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously make sure to install the Main Drive Unit first and th...

Page 405: ...t Upper Cover 3 Remove the ITB Unit 4 Remove the Process Unit 5 Remove the Color Drum Heater When the option is installed 6 Remove the Drum Heater Bk 7 Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover 8 Remove the Hopper C Procedure 1 Remove the Harness from the Fixing Guide Guide Harness 2 Remove all the Toner Trays 3 screws M4 binding x3 F 4 260 F 4 261 3 Remove the Duct Sheet 2 screws binding x2 4 ...

Page 406: ...nd install it to the host machine A B F 4 265 CAUTION When installing the Toner Tray align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever and install it Rod lever Toner cover Open Close rod lever F 4 266 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container be sure not to shake it CAUTION When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously make sure to install the Main Drive Unit first and t...

Page 407: ...Cover Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Rail and loosen the 4 screws Loosen the screws Loosen the screws Fixing Rail Fixing Rail F 4 267 F 4 268 2 Pinch and pull out the tab of Fixing Assembly Tabs 3 Hold the grip and remove the Fixing Assembly CAUTION Be sure to insert the Fixing Assembly until it stops at the time of installation In case of the faulty installation of the Fixing Assembly either E009 or...

Page 408: ...ge the direction of the Fixing Assembly Place it in the position where the Drawer connector side faces up 2 Remove the harness 3 connectors 6 harness guides Connectors Drawer connector Harness guides Harness guides Harness x3 x8 F 4 271 3 Remove the Shutter Unit 4 screws x4 4 Turn the pressure gear with hand and make the Pressure Roller engaged condition Pressure roller engaged condition CAUTION W...

Page 409: ...Do not leave the Pressure Roller engaged for a long time 5 Open the left and right Pressure Levers 2 screws x2 6 Remove the left and right Fixing Plates and the Terminal Plate 3 screws x3 Fixing Plates Terminal Plate F 4 275 F 4 276 7 Remove the harness from the harness guide and remove the Film Unit 8 Remove the Separation Guide from the Film Unit 2 leaf springs F 4 277 F 4 278 ...

Page 410: ... is placed on the rib A Illustration at the right The Fixing Separation Guide is installed in opposite direction Checking method After installing the Fixing Separation Guide swing the guide with your finger If it is installed properly it is stable If not it becomes wobbly When installing the Leaf Spring while the guide is not installed properly the spring will be expanded awkwardly F 4 279 Cleanin...

Page 411: ...move the Fixing Unit Procedure NOTE When installing removing it do not touch the Film Unit and Pressure Roller 1 Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly Place it in the position where the Drawer connector side faces up 2 Remove the harness 3 connectors 6 harness guides Connectors Drawer connector Harness guides Harness guides Harness x3 x8 F 4 281 3 Remove the Shutter Unit 4 screws x4 4 Clean ...

Page 412: ... Unit 3 Remove the Film Unit Procedure NOTE When installing removing it do not touch the Pressure Roller 1 Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide 1 claw 1 screw 3 hooks Fixing inlet guide Claw Hook Hooks F 4 284 CAUTION At installation install it after fitting the 3 hooks to the notches F 4 285 2 When installing removing it to prevent the Pressure Roller from being damaged insert the paper approx 5mm under...

Page 413: ... the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing Procedure 3 Lift the right side and remove the Pressure Roller Unit Pressure roller unit 4 Remove the Pressure Roller and the 2 Pressure Roller Bearings from the Pressure Roller Unit 2 bearing holders 1 E ring 1 gear E ring Gear Pressure roller bearing Pressure roller bearing Bearing holder Bearing holder Roller unit F 4 287 F 4 288 ...

Page 414: ...he Secondary Transfer Guide Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Clean the Transfer Guide with the lint free paper moistened with alcohol Secondary transfer guide F 4 289 F 4 290 Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Clean the Feed Contact Point Guide with lint free paper moistened wi...

Page 415: ...stened with alcohol Registration roller 2 Clean the Outer Registration Roller with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Registration roller F 4 292 F 4 293 Cleaning the Pre registration Guide Assembly Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Clean the inside of Pre registration Guide Assembly with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Seconda...

Page 416: ...ency Sensor Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Clean the Transparency Sensor with lint free paper moistened with water in one direction Transparency sensor 2 Clean the Prism with lint free paper Prism F 4 296 F 4 297 Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Remove ...

Page 417: ...ning Pickup Feed System Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet Procedure 2 Remove the wire from the machine and further open the Right Lower Cover Wire Right lower cover 3 Clean the Vertical Path Sensor with dry lint free paper Vertical Path Sensor F 4 299 F 4 300 4 Clean the Lightproof Sheet with dry lint free paper Lightproof Sheet F 4 301 ...

Page 418: ...e Assembly with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Fixing delivery guide 3 Clean the outside of Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Fixing delivery guide F 4 302 F 4 303 Cleaning the Post fixing Roller Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Delivery Guide 2 Clean the Post fixing Roller 1 with lint free ...

Page 419: ...the Fixing Delivery Roller 1 with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the gear Fixing delivery roller 3 Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 2 with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Fixing delivery roller F 4 306 F 4 307 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller Wheel Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower C...

Page 420: ...ght Upper Cover Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 2 Clean the Duplex Feed Lower Roller Wheel with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Duplex feed lower rollers Duplex feed lower wheels F 4 310 F 4 311 Cleaning the Second and Third Delivery Roller and Wheeis and the First Second and Third Delivery Rollers Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Proc...

Page 421: ... Preparations First delivery roller Second delivery roller Third delivery roller F 4 314 F 4 315 F 4 316 Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw 3 Remove the Front Right Cover 1 rubber cap 1 screw remove 1 screw loosen Loosen Front right cover Rubber c...

Page 422: ...Inner Delivery Cover 1 screw 2 hooks Reverse trail edge guide Hooks x2 Inner delivery cover Procedure 1 Remove the 2 connectors and 3 wire saddles x3 x2 Connectors Wire saddles F 4 319 F 4 320 2 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 1 and the Front Cover 3 Remove the Right Front Cover 1 2 Screws 2 Hooks x2 Hook Hook Front cover Right front cover 1 Toner replacement cover 4 Remove the Second and Third D...

Page 423: ...lag F 4 323 Removing the First Delivery Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Remove the Front Right Cover 4 Remove the Reverse Trail Edge Guide and the Inner Delivery Cover 5 Remove the Second and Third Delivery Unit Procedure 1 Remove the Right Upper Cover Latch 2 screws 2 Remove the Right Lower Cover Latch 2 screws x4 Right lower co...

Page 424: ...ve the First Delivery Unit 2 screws 1 stepped screw x3 First delivery unit CAUTION At installation align the First Delivery Sensor and the Sensor Flag and install it First delivery sensor First delivery sensor Sensor flag Sensor flag F 4 327 F 4 326 CAUTION After installing the First Delivery Unit make sure that the 2 Sensor Flags work normally First delivery sensor First delivery sensor Sensor fl...

Page 425: ... Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Front Cover of Right Unit 1 screw 1 claw Claw 2 Remove the connector and the grounding wire 2 connectors 1 screw 1 wire saddle Connectors Wire saddle Grounding wire x２ F 4 329 F 4 330 3 Hold the sides of Duplex Unit and remove it CAUTION When removing the Duplex Unit note that the Right Door Rotation Hinge and the spring are easily disassembled R...

Page 426: ...ons 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the Duplex Unit Procedure 1 Remove the Both Angle Guide 2 screws x2 2 Remove the gear 2 stop rings and the bushing Gear Stop rings Bushing F 4 333 F 4 334 3 Tilt the shaft pull the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller and remove it Shaft Multi purpose tray pickup roller CAUTION At installation be sure to fit the Split Pin into the Multi p...

Page 427: ...Feed Guide and the Middle Feed Guide 2 screws 3 claws NOTE To prevent the Soundproof Spacer from coming off be sure to remove the Front Feed Guide first when removing the Front Feed Guide and the Middle Feed Guide Lift the Front and Middle Feed Guides push them into the rear and pull them out toward front Claws x2 Middle feed guide Claws Front feed guide x3 F 4 337 2 Remove the Multi purpose Tray ...

Page 428: ...e are hooked onto the claw of Multi purpose Tray Pickup Frame Claws Middle feed guide Front feed guide x3 Rubber Rubber CAUTION Open the Multi purpose Tray Sub Cover and make sure that the bearing part of Multi purpose Tray Pickup Sensor Flag is surely installed Sensor flag Bearing part Bearing part Removing the Pickup Roller Procedure NOTE This procedure describes the removing step of cassette 1 ...

Page 429: ...ION Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller 1 Remove the cassette 1 and cassette 2 2 Remove the Cassette Feed Roller 1 tab F 4 340 Removing the Separation Roller Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure NOTE This procedure describes the removing procedure of cassette 1 Separation Roller Go through the same procedure for the Separation Ro...

Page 430: ...tte 1 Pickup Assembly Idler Gear Go through the same procedure for the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear of cassette 2 CAUTION Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller 1 Remove the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear 1 tab F 4 342 Removing the Right Lower Cover Preparations 1 Pull the Cassette1 and Cassette2 Procedure NOTE If the Cassette Pedestal is connected perform step 1 1 If the Ca...

Page 431: ...d the Right Front Cover 3 1 claw 1 screw 3 Claw Right lower sub cover 1 Right front cover 3 1 3 When the side paper deck is installed remove the side paper deck remove the Deck Connect Cover 1 screw F 4 344 F 4 345 2 Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover 3 If the Cassette Pedestal is connected Open the Cassette Right Lower Cover 4 Open the Right Upper Cover and the Right Lower Cover 5 Remove the Rig...

Page 432: ...ng Stop ring Arm 8 Remove the wire from the host machine and remove the Right Lower Cover Wire Right lower cover F 4 348 F 4 349 F 4 350 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit Preparations 1 Pull the Cassette1 and Cassette2 2 Remove the Right Lower Cover Procedure 1 Lift the lever and remove the Right Front Inner Cover 2 screws D x2 Right front inner cover Lever 2 Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 a...

Page 433: ...uide and remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 4 screws RS M4 1 screw RS M3 x5 Pickup guide Cassette 1 pickup unit F 4 353 F 4 354 Removing the Cassette Right Upper Cover NOTE If the Cassette Pedestal is connected perform step 1 1 If the Cassette Pedestal is not connected perform step 1 2 1 1 When the Cassette Pedestal is installed open the Cassette Right Lower Cover Cassette right lower cover 1 2 Whe...

Page 434: ...t and remove the Cassette Right Upper Cover D Cut Cassette right upper cover F 4 357 F 4 358 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit Preparations 1 Pull the Cassette1 and Cassette2 2 Remove the Right Lower Cover 3 Remove the Cassette Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and remove the Right Rear Inner Cover 2 screws x2 x2 Right rear inner cover Claws Right lower sub cover 2...

Page 435: ...n Unit Preparations 1 Remove the Cassette 2 When removing the Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit make sure to remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 3 When removing the Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit make sure to remove the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit Procedure NOTE This procedure describes the removing steps of Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit Go through the same procedure for Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit 1 Re...

Page 436: ...ADF Unit and the Reader Unit from the host machine remove the ADF Unit first and then remove the Reader Unit because the accuracy of scanner systems may be deteriorated 1 Open the ADF 2 Remove the Reader Cable Cover 2 screws x2 F 4 363 F 4 364 3 Remove the cable from the wire saddle Wire saddle NOTE There is no wire saddle in case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 4 Remove the inner plate 4 scr...

Page 437: ...tors x2 CAUTION After removing the cable close the edge saddle NOTE Remove the flat cable in case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 1 reuse band 1 edge saddle 1 harness retainer 3 connectors x3 x3 F 4 368 F 4 367 CAUTION In case of Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 record the position of scale of ADF mounting screw F 4 369 5 1 In case of Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 remove the 2 screws x2 F 4 370 ...

Page 438: ...cedure 5 2 In case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 remove the 4 screws x4 CAUTION Be sure not to get scratches on the White Sheet on the removed ADF F 4 372 F 4 371 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide when placing it F 4 373 CAUTION At installation install it in the recorded scale position of ADF mounting screw ...

Page 439: ...djustment roll Height adjustment roll 3 If not execute the height adjustment If you cannot check it visually check it by the following method F 4 374 a Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 1 Push the paper plain paper to the protrusion of the stream reading glass and set it in the position where the sheet of the stream reading glass is fully covered Protrusion Sheet Reading position...

Page 440: ...ing position Paper CAUTION Do not set it in the position where the original read position is covered by the paper 2 Close the DADF 3 Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance 4 If there is no resistance execute the height adjustment F 4 377 F 4 378 Adjustment procedure 1 Rotate the fixing screw on top of the left hinge to adjust it To remove the space on t...

Page 441: ... right angle accuracy of angle A on the printed paper If it is not right angle make an adjustment Image on test chart Printed image Feed direction F 4 380 3 Loosen the 2 knurled screws on front of right hinge unit 4 Open the rubber cover on the back of right hinge unit and loosen the screw and then make an adjustment by the hexagon socket bolt If A is less than 90 deg rotate it clockwise If A is m...

Page 442: ... 90 deg move the guide to right direction black arrow direction If A is more than 90 deg move the guide to left direction white arrow direction Adjusting screw Guide 6 After adjustment tighten the screw 7 Printout a test chart again and check that it is right angle F 4 382 F 4 383 Removing the Reader Unit Preparations NOTE When removing the ADF Unit and the Reader Unit from the host machine make s...

Page 443: ...over 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw Remove the Reader ADF Unit 6 Remove the Reader ADF Unit F 4 386 F 4 387 Procedure NOTE When removing the ADF Unit and the Reader Unit from the host machine remove the Reader Unit after removing the ADF Unit Otherwise the accuracy of the scanner may be degraded 1 Remove the Reader Left Cover 2 claws 2 screws binding M4x8 2 rubber caps x2 x2 Rea...

Page 444: ...e Control Panel in the direction of the arrow 5 Move the Control Panel Base Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 screw F 4 390 F 4 391 6 Remove the screw of Reader Front Cover 2 screws 1 screw flat head M4x6 for Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 only x3 flat head M4x6 7 Remove the Reader Front Cover 3 bosses 8 Remove the front side of Reader Unit with a stubby screwdriver 2 screws TP M4x8 x2 x2 P...

Page 445: ...r cover F 4 395 F 4 396 11 Close the Right Lower Cover 12 Remove the Fixing Hook C and the Reader Fixing Hook A 2 screws binding M4x8 x2 Fixing hook C Protrusion Protrusion Protrusion Reader fixing hook A 13 Remove the connector of reader communication cable 14 Remove the reader communication cable from the cut off of the host machine plate Cut off of the host machine plate Reader communication ca...

Page 446: ...tepped screw CAUTION Make sure to lift the Reader Unit with 2 people or more And also lift it flatly Make sure to place the Reader Unit on the flat surface with preventing the impact on it When placing the Reader Unit be careful not to get a finger and a cable get caught Front View Back View F 4 401 F 4 400 17 Remove the Reader Unit with 2 People or more 2 bosses Boss F 4 402 ...

Page 447: ...6 F 4 403 Part to be replaced Description Procedure When TPM is enabled ON Main Controller 2 SRAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 includes user data and MEAP related data If there are any files backed up from RUI by the user restore them after recovery Explain the user that the reinstallation of everything related to MEAP is necessary Hold down 2 and 8 to start the machine and then use SST to clear t...

Page 448: ...Remote UI Import Export Mail Box Memory RX Inbox Confidential Fax Inbox Remote UI Back Up Restore Settings Form for Superimpose Image Remote UI Back Up Restore Settings Auto Adjust Gradation Enforcement of Auto Adjust Gradation Key information to TPM to use for coding Settings Registration Administrator Management Settings TPM Settings Service mode MN CON Settings None T 4 37 T 4 38 Items which ne...

Page 449: ... be handled by SRAM with HDD Encryption Board The kind of data to handle Handling SRAM data of this machine 5 To collect device log 6 To clear the encryption key of HDD Encryption Board Upgrading using a USB memory device Using a USB memory device the following functions are available to upgrade the system 1 To download system software 2 To clear download file 3 To format HDD 4 To collect device l...

Page 450: ...5 5 Adjustment Adjustment Main Controller Image Formation System Pickup Feed System ...

Page 451: ...d 2 After turning OFF and ON the main power switch perform the following operations from Settings Registration mode In Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Page Totals be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created Set the following Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask In Management Settings User Man...

Page 452: ...ment reset register the data 4 When the user generates and adds the encryption key certificate and or CA certificate request the user to generate them again Prohibited Operation Do not transfer the following parts to another model which has a different serial number If you fail to do so the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail the restoration Main Controller PCB 2 with...

Page 453: ...llowing parts ITB Cleaning Unit ITB Primary Transfer Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller T 5 7 T 5 8 T 5 9 ITB How to Replace the Parts Refer to Removing the ITB Before Installation Check that the version of the machine is the following version or later MN CON Ver 34 05 D CON Ver 18 01 In case of prior version to the foregoing version upgrade the machine and change the value in the following se...

Page 454: ...to 16K Lv 2 COPIER OPTION CST CST K SW 1 4 Lv 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODELSZ2 0 5 Turn OFF and then ON the main power Method of Setting Special Paper Service mode COPIER OPTION CST CSTX UY Setting number X Cassette number Y Size category X 1 to 4 Y 1 to 4 Size category Size category Size U1 FLSC A FLS OFI E OFI A LTRR A LGL G LGL A OFI M OFI FA4 FB4 U2 K LGLR G LTRR U3 K LGL A LTR G LTR U4 B OFI S...

Page 455: ...6 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Initial Check Test Print Troubleshooting items Startup System Failure Diagnosis Controller Self Diagnosis Debug log Version upgrade ...

Page 456: ...l ventilated and the fl oor keeps the machine level 6 The machine s power plug remains connected to the power outlet Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type 8 The paper is not moist Try paper fresh out of package Checking the Placement of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specifi c level 10 If a transparency is used check ...

Page 457: ...Angle Straight Lines Color displacement 0 Normal copy print 1to3 For R D 4 16 gradations Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 5 Full half tone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 7to9 For R D 10 MCYBk horizontal stripes sub scanning direction Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 11 For R D 12 64 gradation Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 13 For R D 14 ...

Page 458: ...est print is for mainly checking the black line white line and uneven density MEMO 1 Select service mode COPIER TEST PG and specify developing color COLOR Y M C K to output the print by developing color 2 To change the density of test print select service mode TEST PG DENS Y M C K and set the density Check item Check method Assumed cause Transfer failure Check that the transfer failure does not ap...

Page 459: ...Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of ITB Unit Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Dirt on Laser Light Path T 6 5 MCYBk horizontal stripe TYPE 10 2 5 1 5mm 1 5mm 4 0 1 5 1 0mm F 6 4 This test print is for mainly checking the dark area density of each color each color balance and white line on development Check items Check method Assumed cause Uneven de...

Page 460: ...re of Drum Unit end of life Failure of Laser Scanner Unit White line Check that there is no white line on entire image Failure of Developing Assembly T 6 7 Full color 16 gradations TYPE 14 Light areas White White F 6 6 This test print is for mainly checking the gray balance gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density ...

Page 461: ...Inlet Guide 6 12 Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing Separation Guide 6 13 Operation failure Noise around the Fixing Film Unit 6 14 Process Unit cannot be closed 6 15 Productivity is reduced on paper stack delivery in thin paper mode 52g m2 to 63g m2 Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 6 16 T 6 9 Image Faults Image fogging due to the electrostatic charge failure Occurrence ...

Page 462: ...set to 2 The setting value is set to 4 If not improved Notes about remedy A drum life will be influenced if the 2nd service mode adjustment of electrostatic charge AC current is changed For this reason please do not set the setting value to 4 or more at the maximum 35 mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration Occurrence area Developing cylinder Cause In case that the image pattern which has extrem...

Page 463: ...ode setting value is set to 1 and turn OFF and then ON the main power If a defect is not improved check the images with lowering the setting value one step by one step F 6 9 Uneven Image Density at 94 mm of Paper Leading Edge About 95mm Occurrence area Fixing Unit Cause Usually the paper which passed the Fixing Unit is fed to the Inner Delivery Roller along with the separation guide However when t...

Page 464: ...is fed fixing capability may deteriorate Missing color due to the laser exposure failure Occurrence area Developing Assembly Cause If pushing the drum unit to the Developing Assembly in installation there is a possibility to catch the Mylar sheet of the Developing Assembly downward As a result since an optical path is shut when the laser for the applicable color is irradiated the image may become ...

Page 465: ...condary Transfer may be insufficient As a result the blank area caused by Secondary Transfer failure may occur Occurrence condition In case that the recycled paper having bad surface nature is used under the high temperature and high humidity environment This phenomenon will be more obvious when a blue solid image is copied Remedy Please perform the following steps 1 Check environmental classifica...

Page 466: ... H2 2 2TR H12 2TR H22 3 2TR H13 2TR H23 Heavy paper 2 164 209g 1 2TR SH1 2TR SH2 2 2TR SH12 2TR SH22 3 2TR SH13 2TR SH23 Heavy paper 3 210 256g 1 2TR UH1 2TR UH2 2 2TR UH12 2TR UH22 3 2TR UH13 2TR UH23 Postcard 1 2TR P1 2TR P2 2 2TR P12 2TR P22 3 2TR P13 2TR P23 Envelope 1 2TR E1 2TR E2 2 2TR E12 2TR E22 3 2TR E13 2TR E23 Transparency 1 2TR O1 2 2TR O12 3 2TR O13 Notes about remedy If the service ...

Page 467: ...ssembly oil of fused toner may attach to the leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide and it may accumulate At that time when making 2 sided solid print with 2 colors curled leading edge of paper on 2nd side may contact with the Delivery Flapper Thus movement of this paper changes and it may touch the leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide As a result oil attached to the leading edge of guide may ...

Page 468: ...Fixing Film deteriorates due to prolonged use sliding performance between the Fixing Film and the heater surface may be decreased As a result the Fixing Film contacts with the heater surface when it rotates and noise may be generated Field Remedy By pushing the Fixing Film area grease inside the film circulates and sliding performance will be improved Operation procedure is as below 1 Remove the F...

Page 469: ...closed and the Process Unit cannot be installed to the host machine Occurrence Condition If the main power switch is turned OFF just after the copy operation approx within 5 seconds or if the power plug is disconnected without turning OFF the main power switch Field Remedy Process Unit can be installed to the host machine by strongly pushing it However if the Unit is installed to the host machine ...

Page 470: ...e paper is fractioned in the Process Tray causing paper attraction As a result alignment failure may occur To avoid this the electro static is prevented from being generated by decelerating the feed speed in case of foregoing condition Occurrence condition This paper 52g m2 to 63g m2 is selected and the paper stack is delivered from the corresponding finisher Field Remedy Change the paper selectio...

Page 471: ... not to cause short circuit when accessing the PCB Useful Operations The items of detailed procedure explanation start with a description of the flow diagram The items and procedures checked in the flow diagram are described separately in a check item table The flow diagram contains numbers e g 1 corresponding to the check items so that the readers can grasp the relevant parts of the check item ta...

Page 472: ...er Supply 3 3V system Rotation noise of the motor at warm up rotation and activation of the Control Panel Backlight 12V system Not lit Solid black The logo is displayed Only the bar is displayed Power On Display of E code Countermeasures related to system software Reinstall the system Replace the HDD Refer to the error code correspondence table for countermeasures NG is displayed as a result in th...

Page 473: ...on failure Check the Control Panel All night Power Supply 3 3V All night Power Supply 3 3V Control Panel Warm up rotation failed Check the 12V Power Supply Check the Main Controllers Check whether the cable is trapped 12V power supply Flow B Control Panel 12V Check Flow Flow C Main Controller Analysis Flow Flow F Connector Disconnection Flow Flow G Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosi...

Page 474: ...he Main Power SW is turned ON the overcurrent protection may be active and stopping the supply of power Consult this flow when checking the 3 3V and 12V power supplies and identifying the location of the failure in Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure described below The Control Panel does not display Does the host machine start warm up rotation Flow D To All night Power Supply 3 3V Sy...

Page 475: ... Item Check item Location 1 Control Panel LED 2 Main Controller PCB1 LED8 LED8 LED8 You can check the activation of LED8 green through the fan of the Main Controller 1 3 RISER PCB C26 3 3V Main Controller PCB1 Main Controller PCB2 RISER PCB C26 Tester Item Check item Location 4a Main Controller PCB1 LED8 Main Controller PCB2 LED4 LED8 LED4 4b Check each of the pins 1 through 4 12V of J104 on the R...

Page 476: ...rd Key Is 12V supplied to C1005 of the Control Panel CPU PCB Start Assumed failure location 1 Control Panel CPU PCB 2 Main Controller PCB1 3 12V Connector of the Control Panel 4 Control Panel Unit Yes No 1 Yes No No No Yes Yes Check the following resistances of the cables connected to J1002 of the Control Panel CPU PCB Between pin 2 orange and pin 3 blue Between pin 2 and the chassis Assumed failu...

Page 477: ...e Control Panel Disconnect and then connect the 12V Connector of the Control Panel J1002 12V Connector from the Relay PCB 3 Control Panel CPU PCB Control Panel CPU PCB Note that an open circuit is likely to occur when the cable is being disconnected and then connected Item Check item Location 4 Control Panel Inverter PCB Control Panel Inverter PCB 5 Relay PCB J427 J427 6 Disconnect J427 of the Rel...

Page 478: ...12V Check Flow Item Check item Location 7 Relay PCB J427 J427 Control Panel CPU PCB J1002 J1002 Check the cables between J427 of the Relay PCB and J1002 of the Control Panel CPU PCB 1 Disconnect the connectors of J427 and J1002 2 Check if power is distributed between all pins of J427 connector and all the corresponding pins of J1002 connector Normal value 0 ohm T 6 12 ...

Page 479: ...PCB1 Main Controller PCB2 RISER PCB DIMM Flash PCB F 6 28 Yes No 3 Analysis complete Has the machine normally started up Is LED 4 ON Visually check the Main Controller 1 LED 8 Is LED 8 ON Visually check the Main Controller 1 LED 8 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 Replace the Main Controller PCB1 Restart the host machine Is LED 8 ON E60Is E602 displayed Wait about five minutes until it is displayed...

Page 480: ...item Location 1 Check the Main Controller 1 LED 8 activation LED8 LED8 You can check the activation of LED8 green through the fan of the Main Controller 1 Check the Main Controller 2 LED 4 activation LED4 LED4 You can check the activation of LED 4 orange through the hole of the connector for Main Controller 2 Item Check item Location 2 Remove the Main Controller 2 Main Controller PCB1 Main Control...

Page 481: ...PCB 3 3V J691 Relay PCB J413 DC 3 3V AC 100V F 6 30 Identify the cause in the following flow Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF Failure of the AC Driver Failure of the All night Power Supply The All night Power Supply 3 3V is not supplied to the Main Controllers 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch 2 Disconnect J413 of the Relay PCB 3 Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch Do the pink and...

Page 482: ...night Power Supply 3 3V System Flow Status Check Check item Item Check item Location 1 Relay PCB J413 J413 Item Check item Location 1 Check the pins 1 and 2 pink and pins 3 and 4 blue on the cable side respectively e g pin 1 yellow and pin 4 blue Lead Wire Pink Lead Wire Blue J413 is the connector to input 3 3V from the 3 3V All night Power Supply to the Relay PCB Normal value 3 3V ...

Page 483: ...low D All night Power Supply 3 3V System Flow Status Check Item Check item Location 2 AC driver PCB AC driver PCB AC driver PCB J1005 J1005 PCB side of J1005 Between pins 1 and pins 4 Normal value AC100V 1 4 J1005 is the connector to supply AC from the AC Driver PCB to the All night Power Supply Check whether the pin on the AC Driver PCB has output Normal value 100V T 6 14 ...

Page 484: ...lue Lead Wires of the 12V Power Supply Connector 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch 2 If the FU6 and FU7 of the Relay PCB are disconnected check whether the cables are trapped 3 If any of the cables are trapped between J421 of the Relay PCB and J104 of the Riser PCB correct them 4 If no cable is trapped replace all of the following Main Controller 1 Main Controller 2 Riser PCB and Relay PCB Y...

Page 485: ...d J104 2 Check if power is distributed between all pins of J421 connector and all the corresponding pins of J104 connector Normal value 0 ohm In case FU6 or FU7 on the Relay PCB is blown out 3 Check for any trapped cables and short circuit between pin 1 of J421 connector and all the pins of J104 connector except for the corresponding one as well as between pin 1 of J421 and the chassis Normal valu...

Page 486: ...roubles Troubleshooting Startup System Failure Diagnosis Flow E 12V Power Supply System Flow Flow for narrowing down troubles Item Check item Location 4 J401 J411 J431 J431 Check the fourth cable from the triangle mark J411 J401 Check whether the cables are trapped J401 pins 10 pin J411 pins 1 pins 3 pins 5 J431 4 pin T 6 16 ...

Page 487: ... If the problem remains unsolved even after checking the short circuit of the harnesses disconnect the following connector one by one and repeat the following procedure to check whether the symptoms change 1 a Open the front door Disable the operation of the host machine 1 b Check whether the 12V Power Supply starts by disconnecting the appropriate connectors of the Relay PCB J451 SO DCDC PCB If t...

Page 488: ...PCB Relay PCB Control Panel The power on signal which keeps the supply of 12V power is sent through the following route Main Controller 2 Main Controller 1 Riser PCB DC Controller Relay PCB 12V Power Supply The 12V Power Supply receives its power supply from the AC Driver PCB and the power on signal which keeps the supply of AC power is sent through the following route Main Controller PCB2 Main Co...

Page 489: ...ete properly with only the Control Panel bar displayed identify the location of the failure according to the flow Flow for narrowing down troubles Description The workflow of the Controller system failure diagnosis to be executed when only the Control Panel bar is displayed F 6 35 Check item Startup Method 1 Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys 2 and 4 simultaneousl...

Page 490: ...the system software Download by 2 8 startup Replace the Main Controller PCB1 Replace the HDD Replace the Main Controller PCB2 2 When the detected location is displayed on the screen where NG is displayed identify the location of the failure by referencing the controller system failure diagnosis and perform the remedy If the diagnosis does not proceed to a status where NG is displayed proceed to th...

Page 491: ... System Error Diagnosis Tool Main Controller PCB 1 side Main Controller PCB 1 SDRAM TPM PCB PCI Expansion PCB option Main Controller PCB 2 side Main Controller PCB 2 SDRAM M0 M1 SDRAM P Memory PCB Open I F PCB option Rizer PCB HDD SDRAM M0 is an option Overview The error diagnosis tools is installed in this machine and stored in the locations shown below Reader HDD DC Controller PCB Option All nig...

Page 492: ... Self Diagnosis Overview Layout Drawing Troubleshooting Controller Self Diagnosis Overview Layout Drawing Layout Drawing Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis F 6 39 Main Controller PCB 1 BAT1 J2032 J2031 DDR2 SDRAM 512 MB 512 MB F 6 40 ...

Page 493: ...1 GB J12 J13 J11 BAT1 F 6 41 Basic Flowchart Basic Check Items Check all of the items shown below Does the Pow er Supply LED on the Control Panel light up Yes No Execute basic check Is the Control Panel displayed No Execute Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool Yes No Yes Take an action appropriate for the error Does the main body boot correctly Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Turn ON th...

Page 494: ... cannot be installed and is discarded Therefore if the version of MN Cont of the main body is old older than Ver 30 30 update the version to Ver 30 30 or later using SST Service Support Tool or USB memory and enter the SST download mode again to install BCT Caution When upgrading of system software HDD format or BootDev format is performed BCT is simultaneously installed with other system software...

Page 495: ...remedy Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again and execute step 1 and 2 shown above If this tool still does not boot it means that BCT is deleted So install BCT If BCT is not installed correctly is displayed in Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BCT in the main body F 6 45 F 6 46 Diagnosis Time Diagnosis is completed in approx 3 minutes The result is displayed on the Control Panel When the di...

Page 496: ...n of SDRAM on the Main Controller PCB 1 2 Replace SDRAM inside of the Main Controller PCB 1 3 Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 F 6 49 Test Name Description Assumed Error Location Remedy Error Code SN 4 SM BUS IA Clock Gen Check an SM bus error in Clock Generator on the Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 1 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 SN 5 SM BUS SOC DIMM1 Check an SM bus error in th...

Page 497: ...oller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 2 SDRAM P Open I F PCB 1 Check the installation of SDRAM P on the Main Controller PCB 2 2 Replace SDRAM P on the Main Controller PCB 2 3 Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 E747 E748 Test Name Description Assumed Error Location Remedy Error Code SN 17 R SDRAM Check failure of Rchip SDRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 2 Open I F PCB 1 Replace the Mai...

Page 498: ...ons Controller System Error Diagnosis Regarding the diagnosis for the test names SN 1 2 7 15 21 24 if an error occurs in the diagnosis under the test names this diagnosis tool will not boot When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB 1 2 the following judgment results are displayed Standard PCB NG Optional PCB OK However no is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs ...

Page 499: ...tion to determine the cause Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow up When the error frequency is low When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical electrical failure Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduc...

Page 500: ...ter 1 2 3 Store log to an HDD SST The data is collected as a set of operation Starting the machine with the 2 and 8 keys and using a USB memory device The data is collected as a set of operation Collecting Debug Log USB memory device NOTE When the data is sent to the USB memory device USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using the SST Manual Saving by Holding D...

Page 501: ...th the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 0 to 3 0 Save PLOG at detection of Reboot Exception 1 Save PLOG at detection of Reboot Exception Encode 2 Save SUBLOG at detection of Reboot Exception Encode 3 Save SUBLOG in overwrite mode at detection of Reboot Exception Encode Default value 3 F 6 53 T 6 20 Uploading Data by SST The following shows a method to collect a ...

Page 502: ...n When there is no log in the machine it results in blank option items for data to upload When the file name is longer than the frame it displays that it is a log in the comment column just below It is displayed as log in the figure below Note The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button It is deleted from the main body F 6 55 4 Press the Save button F 6 56 F 6 57 ...

Page 503: ...oubleshooting Debug log Uploading Data by SST Preconditions 5 Check that the data storage is completed and click the OK button 6 Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC In the initial setting Windows C ServData iRC5051 EXR02627 Serial number F 6 58 F 6 59 ...

Page 504: ...ad the system software using SST installed in the PC 2 Download using the USB memory storage device Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device 3 Download via Contents Delivery System hereinafter CDS Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine System CD System Software CD...

Page 505: ...rted This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS When upgrading the system software via CDS the warning message is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to turn OFF the power switch When the system software is successfully written the machine is automatically restarted to activate the downloaded system software If any error occurs during the writing process the error code E...

Page 506: ...6 6 6 52 6 52 Troubleshooting Version upgrade Overview Writing System Software Troubleshooting Version upgrade Overview Writing System Software Log Error massage version up error massage F 6 62 ...

Page 507: ...ssing 1 and 7 keys However the procedure above automatically assigns a static IP address and enables the download same as before You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors NOTE When entering Download mode be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main menu have been displayed This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts...

Page 508: ...X Board AE1 Box Checker BCT Key Certificatefor Encrypted Communication iAXXXX KEY Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 Finisher Controller FIN_C1 FIN_CON Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 Saddle Controller SDL_CON Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 External 2 hole Puncher B1 Punch Controller EXP_B1 EXP_CON External 2 hole Puncher B1 Inner Finisher A1 Finisher Controller IFN_A1 FIN_CON In...

Page 509: ...LANGUAGE RUI and SDICT can be obtained but version information of other system software such as DCON and RCON cannot be obtained Therefore the following points to note are required when downloading in safe mode RCON The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or when Overwrite all of USB download menu is used DCON and others The following symptoms occur when SST S...

Page 510: ...em software components i e DCON RCON or options When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted Downloading System Software System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area and the flash ROM After the writing has been completed normally this machine automatically restar...

Page 511: ... memory capacity If the above is the case decompress the file before copying it to SST Preparation Requirements PC with SST Ver 4 41 or later installed The system CD for this machine Steps to copy the system software 1 Start the PC 2 Set the system CD in the PC 3 Start SST 4 Click Register Firmware button F 6 64 5 Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button 6 The system sof...

Page 512: ...the PC has the connection to the network the settings changed to the above mentioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses etc Ensure that the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine Preparation Requirements PC with SST Ver 4 41 or later installed and the system software for t...

Page 513: ...talled 2 Turn on the main power switch of this machine 3 Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD and press OK F 6 68 4 Check the IP address of the PC Go to Start menu to select Program Accessory Command Prompt Type IPCONFIG and press Return to see the network settings of the PC If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are...

Page 514: ...is stored in SST the new set is automatically selected NOTE If no upgrade is stored the existing system software set is unchanged At any rate any versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection F 6 70 NOTE If the PC in Assist mode is connected to the machine in Safe mode only the system software of SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI MEAPCONT and SDICT can acquire version information 4 Click...

Page 515: ...nload and overwrite the existing versions Confirm whether to download downgraded versions Overwrite all versions Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade all versions of the system software are downloaded without message By default Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions is selected 5 Click Next button 6 Disconnect the cross cable from the machine 7 Enter S...

Page 516: ...kip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message Skip download of the existing versions Confirm whether to download downgraded versions Confirm whether to download the existing versions downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions Con...

Page 517: ...em software can be deleted not written on HDD or Flash ROM 1 Click Clear button Clear button 2 Click Execute Clear button The system software which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD is deleted 3 Click OK button Return to the previous screen 6 Click Shutdown Restart button 7 Click Restart button The machine is restarted The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash ROM 8 Cl...

Page 518: ...y in Single mode After HDD is formatted the machine cannot be started before the system software is downloaded After Format ALL is executed the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting to HDD At this time the machine automatically starts in Download mode For BOOTDEV format the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting After formatting enter either Assist m...

Page 519: ...m software Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Writing process Writing process Start in the same version of the system software Automatically restart Start in Download mode of Normal mode restart the machine manually Since there is no system software to be downloaded the shutdown sequence is executed Wh...

Page 520: ... mode Assist mode recommended See the steps to download the system software for details CAUTION After HDD is formatted ensure to download the system software If the system software is not downloaded E602 error is triggered at power on CAUTION Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is downloaded to write the downloaded software Down time may be approx 5 minutes in...

Page 521: ...ing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad Connect to SST Confirm that the new HDD is successfully mounted Format HDD Format ALL Follow the steps as described in Format ALL section F 6 85 When the new HDD is mounted the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode When gaining connection to SST the message is shown to confirm if the n...

Page 522: ...up of Reader Controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Backup COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES Restore Backup of DC Controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Backup COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Restore Data is stored in HDD T 6 22 T 6 23 NOTE Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs back up the data from Service mode The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs ar...

Page 523: ...ckup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were uploaded This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon Service PC Main controller Main controller PCB1 iR MeapBack SramImg bin SST HDD Meapback bin System Upload Download iR ADVNCE C5051 Series Main controller PCB2 SRAM SramImg bin F 6 88 Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack 1 Enter Download mode 2 Connect t...

Page 524: ...N The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded Store Meapbackup bin and Settings Registration Data Management Initialize All Data Setings Restore it even if it cannot log in to SMS Restore Meapbackup bin which backed up after Initialize All Data Setings store it Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack 1 Enter Download mode 2 Connect the PC to t...

Page 525: ... storage device for version upgrade the system software should be copied to the USB memory storage device storage device By inserting the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine the system software can be upgraded The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB memory storage device storage device Downloading the system software System software SST HDD Flash ROM...

Page 526: ...g complete Upgrading complete Upgrading complete Download Mode iR2270i JPjaxxxx MN dsh iR2270iM JPjaxxxx 1F77 MN PRG iR2270iM ZZjaxxxx 49AD PRG iR2270iW JPjaxxxx 5C16 MN PRG iR2270iW ZZjaxxxx A825 PRG iR2270iF JPjaxxxx DE96 ICC PRG iR2270iW ZZjaxxxx A825 PRG iR2270iG JPjaxxxx EC30 ICC PRG Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete HDD System Software Temporary memory s...

Page 527: ...e Device Copying System Software 5 Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button 6 The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the screen Uncheck the box es of unnecessary folder s and or system software component s and click Copy button F 6 99 F 6 100 7 The message is shown when the system software is copied Click OK button F 6 101 ...

Page 528: ...nterface USB 1 1 or later USB 2 0 is recommended Memory capacity 1GB or more is recommended the total file size of the system software is approx 500MB Format FAT FAT 16 FAT32 NTFS and HFS are not supported The memory is formatted in a partition multiple partitions are not supported Unavailable USB memory memory that is protected by a password or the encryption technology Steps to copy the system s...

Page 529: ...tored in SST N Not stored in SST 7 Click Start button Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device F 6 104 F 6 105 NOTE When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software is to be downloaded uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories E753 0001 is triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded If this occu...

Page 530: ...g in Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD and then press OK In the case of safe mode This mode should not be used as general rule To be used only when normal startup fails such as a system error etc While pressing 2 8 keys at the same time turn ON the Main Power Switch Once this machine recognizes the USB memory storage device the following menu is displayed on the Control Panel download M...

Page 531: ...e 1 Upgrade Auto To download write the system software automatic 2 Upgrade w Confirmation To download the system software confirmation 3 Upgrade Overwrite all To download the system software overwriting 4 Format HDD To format the HDD BOOTDEV partition 5 Backup Collection of debug Log or Service Print Because You are for R D review do not use it other than the following 7 Clear downloaded files To ...

Page 532: ...ring downloading writing Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software otherwise this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON start the machine in safe mode pressing 2 8 keys When the machine can be started in safe mode be sure to download the system software once again If the machi...

Page 533: ... E753 is displayed When Download Mode Version to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the download mode is 00 36 For the Finisher that is not connected the system software is not to be downloaded G3CCB G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not installed E753 is displayed When Download Mode Version to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the download mod...

Page 534: ...d SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI MERAPCONT SDICT As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained the software for RCON is not downloaded but other software are downloaded For the system software of the option that is not connected it is handled as follows In the case of startup in normal mode Recommended When Download Mode Version to be displayed on the initial screen ...

Page 535: ... system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older than the system software in the HDD a message is displayed in each case to confirm whether to overwrite or not Press the key on the Control Panel 0 To overwrite Any key other than 0 Not to overwrite F 6 115 Once downloading is complete a message is displayed to encourage pressing the Reset key F 6 114 4 Press the Reset ...

Page 536: ... HDD 5 Backup 7 Clear downloaded files 8 download Menu 2 9 Other Menu 3 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys During downloading download status is displayed on the Control Panel F 6 117 CAUTION In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device all the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well Therefore be sure to keep the following in...

Page 537: ...einstall the system software HDD formatting is not required After formatting this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded When Format ALL is executed initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this machine is automatically restarted to automatically enter download mode In the case of formatting BOOTDEV the machine is not automatically restarted but the system...

Page 538: ... menu screen download Menu USB 1 Upgrade Auto 2 Upgrade w Confirmation 3 Upgrade Overwrite all 4 Format HDD 5 Backup 7 Clear downloaded files 8 download Menu 2 9 Other Menu 4 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys F 6 120 4 Press the key on the Control Panel 1 0 To execute formatting BOOTDEV Any key other than 0 To return to the menu screen 2 0 To execute formatting the entire HDD An...

Page 539: ...icePrint 5 Netcap C Return to Main Menu ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー Clearing Download File 7 Clear downloaded files This menu clears the system software stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the system software in menu 2 or 3 Operation procedure F 6 122 1 After downloading by menu 2 or 3 press the Reset key to...

Page 540: ...led and see if the software to download is for the correct target option and then execute downloading again Upgrading by SST Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the non connecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode In Single mode it is available to download the system software of the option that is not installed In the case of downloading the Fini...

Page 541: ...nked 1 Automatic download Automatic update Distribution setting Download Via Service mode Local UI Apply Update Via Service mode Local UI Distribution setting Download Via User mode Local UI Apply Update Via User mode Local UI Distribution setting Download Via User mode Remote UI Apply Update Via User mode Remote UI Download via SST Update via SST Firmware acquisition With connection to external n...

Page 542: ...on Options Button of User Mode LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes T 6 24 T 6 25 Setting Sales Company s HQ When using devices input in the markets listed below the default setting of Sales Company s HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS Unless the setting is changed properly the desire...

Page 543: ...ee User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network Before using UGW link or User mode see the sections below to prepare as required Enabling UGW Link Enabling Update Firmware Button of User Mode Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode NOTE External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet 2 Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Se...

Page 544: ...ngs button F 6 127 F 6 128 5 Ensure to enter https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif in the field beside the Delivery Server URL button If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field click Delivery Server URL button to show the virtual keypad Check the URL and enter the correct one 6 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set...

Page 545: ...n upgrade Version Upgrade via CDS Preparation 3 Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and or the file server 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button F 6 130 3 Press Software Management Settings button F 6 131 ...

Page 546: ...ormation for communication test from the distribution server to execute the communication test to the distribution server Using the download file information for communication test the contents for test are downloaded from the file server for the communication test to the file server F 6 132 F 6 133 6 Upon the communication test completed the communication test result screen is shown Press OK butt...

Page 547: ...GW WebPortal In Customer Management screen set Do not distribute firmware to Distribute firmware Sales Company s HQ Setting of Authorities on UGW WebPortal See Analysis Firmware Distribution Information to grant the appropriate authorities to each account NOTE See imageWARE Remote Operator s Manual e Maintenance Business Operation Manual for how to operate UGW WebPortal Distribute Firmware should ...

Page 548: ... update during non business hours Devices with Wait for EOJ Function Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the queue Print Scan Fax except I FAX this function is enabled for I FAX only during Print Scan operation See Chapter 1 Limitations and Cautions of this manual for more detailed information NOTE To contacts registered for E mail notification on UGW th...

Page 549: ... CDS b UGW linked Download Remote Distribution Update Troubleshooting Version upgrade Version Upgrade via CDS b UGW linked Download Remote Distribution Update 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 137 F 6 138 4 Press Apply Firmware button F 6 139 ...

Page 550: ... version corresponds to Controller Version Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update F 6 140 CAUTION Devices without Wait for EOJ end of job Function Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating It is recommended to perform firmware update during non business hours Devices with Wait for EOJ F...

Page 551: ...ow of Manual Download and Update STEP 2 Update using Updater STEP 1 Download using Updater STEP 1 Download using Updater The firmware can be downloaded from CDS to the device using Updater 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button F 6 141 F 6 142 3 Press Update Firmware button 4 Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways To update to the official edition pres...

Page 552: ... firmware version is shown Applicable Firmware Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list Additional Languages If there are any additional languages they are displayed More than 1 language can be selected and it is possible to add another language when upgrading the firmware Up to 8 languages can be added including Japanese and English The languages already registered in t...

Page 553: ... button On Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded Off The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded F 6 147 E mail E mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here Enter the E mail address of the service technician in charge Enter 1 byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters Comments Enter the comment in 1 byte alphanume...

Page 554: ...ion Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to Now and Auto respectively Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device The device is automatically restarted upon update completed Now STEP 1 is successfully completed F 6 148 F 6 149 When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to Now and Manual respectively Confirm the firmware and pre...

Page 555: ... Mode STEP 2 Update using Updater The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions When Timing to Apply is set to Auto in Distribution Setting in STEP 1 the firmware is updated automatically Only when Timing to Apply is set to Manual follow the steps below to update the firmware 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button F 6 152 3 Press Update Firmware butto...

Page 556: ... panel 2 Press Check Device Configuration button 3 Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to Controller Version Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update CAUTION Devices without Wait for EOJ end of job Function Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating It is recommended to per...

Page 557: ...ule This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 156 4 Press Delete Scheduled Delivery button 5 Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press Yes button 6 Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press OK button Now the firmware distribution sc...

Page 558: ...te the downloaded firmware 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 159 4 Press Apply Firmware button 5 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button 6 The firmware is applied to the device The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied 7 When the device is restarted confirm the version of the firmware 1 Press...

Page 559: ... Deleting Downloaded Firmware 3 Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to Controller Version Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method Deleting Downloaded Firmware This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 162 ...

Page 560: ...roubleshooting Version upgrade Version Upgrade via CDS Deleting Downloaded Firmware 4 Press Delete Firmware button 5 Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press Yes button 6 Confirm the result of deletion and press OK button Now the downloaded firmware is successfully deleted F 6 163 F 6 164 ...

Page 561: ...blackout and the like Action Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST 1 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time to start the device 1 Turn on the power and hold down 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 2 Download Mode is shown on Local UI If the operation above does not trigger the download mode BOOT Flash Memory service parts should be replaced takes up to 1 minute for rewriti...

Page 562: ...d Location of the device Date and Time that symptom occurred Steps taken for reproduction Firmware Application you tried to install Occurrence frequency Model dependency if the same symptom occurred in other models Dependency on firmware MEAP application system option Conditions of symptom occurrence Model Firmware version installed on the device List of MEAP applications installed on the device N...

Page 563: ... FNC SW CDS MEAP 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM 1 2 Log in the remote UI URL http device s IP address or host name using the system administrator right 3 From Display Logs Communication Test screen obtain System Logs log level 4 and Update Logs by copy paste Top page Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings License Others Register Update Software Display Logs Communication Test F 6 168...

Page 564: ...an error occurred with the file server Check the network At the time of file download Communication error to the delivery server occurred Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence If the network environment of the device is correct obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and c...

Page 565: ...t recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company again 10 Delivery Server Connect OK File Server Retrieve Failed Error Code xxxx Delivery Server Connect OK File Server Retrieve Failed Error Code XXXX Due to no return of data for the communication test time out in HTTP communic...

Page 566: ...rrect to solve the cause of the error occurrence If the network environment of the device is correct obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company No return of notifying version information Network cable was disconnected during notice of version information Re connect the network ca...

Page 567: ...r 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Immediate download error dialogue An internal error occurred at the time of requesting firmware delivery information Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company During t...

Page 568: ... power of device main body Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Manual update main screen Automatic update main screen Updated version was different from the ordered version Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version ...

Page 569: ... under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company 15 Applicable firmware is not registered On site error dialogue At the user site no latest firmware exists This means the current firmware is the latest so this error has no impact But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e g released new firmware information has been noti...

Page 570: ... The 6 8th digits Description code 000 See Error code list Error Code The error code list is shown below Remedy are error codes of and for all the error codes out of the list contact Field Suppot Group in the sales company Error Code hex number Description Remedy Cause of error The first digit Error field The second digit Operator The 3rd 4th digits Method category The 5th digit Category code The ...

Page 571: ...ype is other than the latest 0 0 6 The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and registration ID and individual Password are not set Operator did not enter registration ID and individual Password 0 0 7 The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and Operator is not Service person 0 0 8 As to the device serial number in the data entry items there is no applicable device code pro...

Page 572: ...ys were issued more than 101 times for the same device serial number 0 0 7 No device product exists applicable to the optional product 0 0 8 No product exists applicable to the device serial number 0 0 9 The product of the entered license access number cannot be used with this device because the settings of the sales company are incorrect 0 0 A No product linked to the license access number is reg...

Page 573: ... An internal error in IMI 3 x x An internal error in SMS 4 x x An internal error in NLM 5 x x An internal error in Property setting 4 SOAP communication 1 0 1 The processing thread stopped 1 0 2 Processing SOAP communication now 1 0 3 The function type is not matched 1 0 4 An invalid SOAP response error 2 0 1 An internal error about application information 2 0 2 config xml is NOT FOUND 2 0 3 type ...

Page 574: ...anging the settings to use the corresponding proxy anthentication 6 Socket communication 1 0 1 Failed to connect the eRDS 1 0 2 No response from eRDS 1 0 3 No notice of start from the eRDS 1 0 4 Error of socket reading 1 0 5 Socket communication time out 7 Other internal codes 0 0 2 One of installation start or authorization failed When installation or authorization failed it is regarded as an err...

Page 575: ...7 7 Error Code Error Code Overview Error Code Jam Code Alarm Code ...

Page 576: ...05 External 2 Hole Puncher B1 02 05 65 T 7 1 T 7 2 Pickup position code When jam occurs pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code Pickup position Pickup position code At Finisher jam At error avoidance jam At ADF jam without pickup operation at SEND Inbox etc 00 Cassette 1 01 Cassette 2 02 Cassette 3 Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 03 Cassette 4 Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 04 Mu...

Page 577: ...o Note When Clearing MN CON Execution of clearing MN COM deletes all data in Address Book Forwarding Settings Settings Registration Preferences Adjustment Maintenance Function Settings Set Destination Management Settings TPM Settings etc Before execution of this operation ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation When clearing MN CON while any login application other than De...

Page 578: ...fter performing the above remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E code Detail code Location Items Description E001 0003 05 Title High temperature error detected by hardware Description Hardware detects abnormal high temperature of the Thermistor Main Thermistor 1 264 deg C Main Thermistor 2 265 deg C Sub Thermistor 1 2 280 deg C for 400 msec consecutivel...

Page 579: ...owing to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E code Detail code Location Items Description E004 0000 05 Title Thermistor disconnection detection error Description Signal name FUSER_CNCTX detects disconnection for 500 msec or longer Remedy 1 Check if the Fixing Assembly is installed 2 Check connection of the connectors in Fixing Assembly 3 Check connection of DC Controller PCB UN1 Connector 4...

Page 580: ...PCB UN4 4 Manually turn the Rotor of the Drum Motor counterclockwise and check that the Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel rotates If the wheel does not rotate replace the Drum Drive Unit 5 Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor to clean the Sensor and the Wheel 6 Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor 7 Replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detail code Location Items Description E012 0301 05 Title Faulty signal wi...

Page 581: ...otation Sensor is faulty replace the harness if it s disconnected 5 Replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detail code Location Items Description E012 0303 05 Title Faulty signal with C Drum Rotation Sensor 2 Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more Remedy 1 Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 2 UN36 2 Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 2 to clean the Sensor 3 Replace Drum Rotat...

Page 582: ...UN4 E code Detail code Location Items Description E012 0106 05 Title Failure in rotation of Y Drum Motor Description The Y Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed is stopped Remedy 1 Check connection of the connector with the Drum Motor M1 2 Check connection of the connector with Drum Driver PCB UN4 3 Check the ITB to see if the ITB is displaced damaged Refer to E075 if the ITB is displa...

Page 583: ...012 3002 05 Title Failure in rotation of Drum Motor in all colors M1 M2 M3 M4 Description All of the Drum Motors are not rotating at the specified speed are stopped Remedy Check the connector on the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detail code Location Items Description E013 0001 05 Title Error in Recycle Toner Stirring Motor Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed Remedy 1 Check d...

Page 584: ...atch Sensor 4 Replace the Drum E code Detail code Location Items Description E020 0022 05 Title Error in M Developing Assembly Description Patch level is lower than the target lower limit although the patch level was maximized at the time of patch initialization Remedy Go through the following DISPLAY P LED DA perform cleaning first if P LED DA is 3F or more If the Patch Sensor UN47 UN48 UN49 valu...

Page 585: ...m 2 Clean the Patch Sensor UN47 UN48 UN49 Window 3 Check if the patch sensor is disconnected 4 Replace the Patch Sensor 5 Replace the Drum E code Detail code Location Items Description E020 0103 05 Title Error in C Developing Assembly Description The value is higher than the upper limit for the patch Remedy Go through the following DISPLAY P LED DA perform cleaning first If P LED DA is 3F or more ...

Page 586: ... in Bk Developing Assembly Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch Remedy Go through the following DISPLAY P LED DA perform cleaning first if P LED DA is 3F or more If the Patch Sensor UN47 UN48 UN49 value shows 1 digit perform remedy from 3 If the supply area of the Developing Assembly is badly soiled toner can be leaked 1 Check installation of the Developing Assembly an...

Page 587: ...sor TS6 Harness 2 Replace the Developing Assembly E code Detail code Location Items Description E020 0231 05 Title Error in M Developing Assembly Description The average of ATR reference value is less than the specified value at the time of ATR initialization Remedy 1 Check if the ATR Sensor TS6 Connector is properly connected 2 Check short circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness 3 Replace the Developin...

Page 588: ...ected 2 Check short circuit of the ATR Sensor TS7 Harness 3 Replace the Developing Assembly E code Detail code Location Items Description E020 0391 05 Title Error in C Developing Assembly Description Error in signal upper limit with ATR sampling detected value Remedy 1 Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit 2 Check toner level in the Toner Container 3 Replace the Developing Assembly 4 Check s...

Page 589: ...eveloping Assembly Description Error in lower limit with T D ratio at the time of print sequence Small amount of toner in the Developing Assembly Remedy 1 Output 10 sheets of white blank sheets to increase T D ratio 2 Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit 3 Check toner level in the Toner Container 4 Replace the Developing Assembly 5 Check short circuit of the harness of the Toner supply sens...

Page 590: ...oblem Replace the Toner Container Motor M9 Replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detail code Location Items Description E025 0110 05 Title Timeout error in detection of Y Toner Bottle Seal Release Sensor Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON OFF ON with the sensor when the cap of the Y Toner Container was sealed released Remedy 1 Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Mai...

Page 591: ... M Toner Container was sealed released Remedy 1 Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive Unit to check the operation 2 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate check the drive to see damage of the gear etc If it s results in NG replace the Main Drive Unit 3 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate while the Drive rotates turn the Set on Hopper Unit to check the rotating oper...

Page 592: ... C Toner Container was sealed released Remedy 1 Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive Unit to check the operation 2 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate check the drive to see damage of the gear etc If it s results in NG replace the Main Drive Unit 3 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate while the Drive rotates turn the Set on Hopper Unit to check the rotating oper...

Page 593: ... Bk Toner Container was sealed released Remedy 1 Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive Unit to check the operation 2 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate check the drive to see damage of the gear etc If it s results in NG replace the Main Drive Unit 3 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate while the Drive rotates turn the Set on Hopper Unit to check the rotating ope...

Page 594: ...Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detail code Location Items Description E025 01B0 05 Title Error in Y Toner Container Cam HP Sensor PS5 Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status OFF ON when closing the Toner Cap so that open and close ...

Page 595: ...east once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detail code Location Items Description E025 02A0 05 Title Error in M Toner Container Cam HP Sensor PS6 Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status ON OFF when opening the Toner Cap so that open and close status of the Toner ...

Page 596: ...install the removed Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detail code Location Items Description E025 02C0 05 Title Error in Cover Sensor PS14 in M Toner Container Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner Cover when removing the Toner Container Remedy Ident...

Page 597: ...Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detail code Location Items Description E025 03B0 05 Title Error in C Toner Container Cam HP Sensor PS7 Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status OFF ON when closing the Toner Cap so that open and close ...

Page 598: ...least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detail code Location Items Description E025 04A0 05 Title Error in Bk Toner Container Cam HP Sensor PS8 Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status ON OFF when opening the Toner Cap so that open and close status of the Tone...

Page 599: ...nstall the removed Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detail code Location Items Description E025 04C0 05 Title Error in Cover Sensor PS16 in Bk Toner Container Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner Cover when removing the Toner Container Remedy Ident...

Page 600: ... to check rotation If it s results in NG replace the Hopper Unit E code Detail code Location Items Description E027 0300 05 Title Error in supply with C Developing Assembly Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON OFF ON with the sensor which detects a full rotation of the supply screw within the specified period of time Remedy 1 Check the damage of the Developing Coupling If it s ...

Page 601: ...tail code Location Items Description E061 00F0 05 Title Abnormal current run to the Y Drum Description Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the Y Drum film thickness large current level Remedy 1 Check installation of the Drum Unit 2 Check if there is failure in grounding contact at the Drum Unit side such as loosened screw which secures the plate at the contact point 3 C...

Page 602: ...contact with the Drum at Process Unit side 4 Forced initialization in Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETM execution of the color causing the error 5 Replace the Drum Unit 6 Replace the Pre exposure LED PCB UN25 UN26 E code Detail code Location Items Description E061 0201 05 Title Abnormal current run to the C Drum Description Abnormal current run to the C Drum small current level or no drum ...

Page 603: ...e Detail code Location Items Description E061 03F0 05 Title Abnormal current run to the Bk Drum Description Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the Bk Drum film thickness large current level Remedy 1 Check installation of the Drum Unit 2 Check if there is failure in grounding contact at the Drum Unit side such as loosened screw which secures the plate at the contact poi...

Page 604: ...ccurs perform steps 2 and 3 E code Detail code Location Items Description E075 0004 05 Title Error in combination of ITB Displacement Sensors Description Failed to determine position due to combination of the ITB Displacement Sensors PS25 PS28 faulty sensor Remedy 1 Check if the ITB Connector is physically removed 2 Check if the cable of the ITB Unit is open circuit including the inside of the ITB...

Page 605: ...anner BD lock failed Description In the case of failure in detecting FG signal although the specified period of time has passed after the Scanner Motor of Laser Scanner Unit 1 YM laser was started Remedy 1 Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 1 2 Replace Laser Scanner Unit 1 E code Detail code Location Items Description E110 0300 05 Title Error in Polygon Motor of CBk side Scanner BD lock fai...

Page 606: ... 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check connection of harness on the target color side YM CK 3 Replace the DC Controller PCB UN1 4 Replace the Laser Scanner Unit 5 Replace the harness on the target color side YM CK E code Detail code Location Items Description E197 0081 05 Title Timeout error in EHOB reception waiting Description Communication failure between the DC Controller PCB UN1 and Laser ...

Page 607: ...the DC Controller PCB UN1 E197 0202 05 Title Error in communication of HOB single shot mode Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB UN1 E code Detail code Location Items Description E197 0203 05 Title Timeout error in HOB single shot mode Description Communication failure between CPU ...

Page 608: ...nner Home Position Sensor and Scanner Unit 4 Replace the Reader Controller PCB E code Detail Code Location Items Description E202 0102 04 Title Glass HP error This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 only Description Glass error when moving to the right side for HP check operation Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check the drive of Glass Shifting Motor Set the service mode F...

Page 609: ...on data Description When communication data error between the controller and DC Controller PCB is detected Remedy Check connection of the connector Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB UN1 Main Controller PCB E240 0001 05 Title 3 minutes has passed since the status remained to be waiting for pickup request Description No response ...

Page 610: ...s Description E270 0001 04 Title Scanner Unit Paper Front VSYNC signal error Description Due to the VSYNC error in the Scanner Unit PCB Paper Front which communicates with Reader Controller PCB VSYNC signal is not sent appropriately so the image error occurs or the operation stops abnormally Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check the connection between Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Un...

Page 611: ...he Stream Read Glass Paper Front scratches dust soil etc 5 Check if Scanner Unit Paper Front detects HP correctly If it does not detect correctly the Scanner Unit reaches to the end when DF is opened 6 Replace the Scanner Unit Paper Front 7 Replace the Reader Controller PCB E code Detail Code Location Items Description E302 0101 04 Title Error in paper back shading Description Error in shading RAM...

Page 612: ...Set the service mode FEEDER FUNCTION MTR CHK 9 Then set FEEDER FUNCTION MTR ON 4 Replace the DF Driver PCB E code Detail Code Location Items Description E401 0002 04 Title Pickup error Description Pickup Unit does not move from the home position Remedy 1 Check that Pickup Unit Lifter HP Sensor flag moves smoothly 2 Check the connection between DF Driver PCB and Pickup Unit Lifter HP Sensor and che...

Page 613: ...ontroller PCB E code Detail Code Location Items Description E490 0001 04 Title Different DF model Description Installed DF is not the supported DF Remedy 1 Using the service mode check if the installed DF model is the same model which was set in the service mode 2 Check the connection between Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB and check that the Cable is not open circuit 3 Replace the DF Driv...

Page 614: ...ear change motor M110 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detail Code Location Items Description E520 0001 05 Title Shift Motor fails to move from HP Description At initial rotation when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry Remedy 1 Check if the Motor M4 Connecto...

Page 615: ...ror if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry Remedy 1 Check if the Motor M1 Connector is physically removed 2 Check if the Motor failure occurs 3 Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor S10 Connector is physically removed 4 Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor S10 failure occurs E code Detail Code Location Items Description E532 0002 05 Title STP Move Motor fails to return to HP Descripti...

Page 616: ... Check if the Motor failure occurs 3 Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor S14 Connector is physically removed 4 Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor S14 failure occurs E code Detail Code Location Items Description E540 0002 05 Title Tray Lift Motor clock error Description At initial rotation when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and clock input is not detected within the specified period of time it is ...

Page 617: ...the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty 3 The tray up down mechanism is faulty 4 The tray 1 shift motor M107 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detail Code Location Items Description E542 0001 05 Title Additional Tray Lift Motor timeout error Description Unable to complete the operation even after the specified period of time during initial rotation When ...

Page 618: ...s faulty 3 The tray up down mechanism is faulty 4 The tray 2 shift motor M105 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detail Code Location Items Description E542 8007 05 Title The tray 2 shift motor error Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 2 shift motor is at a stop Remedy 1 The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty 2 The wiring between the fini...

Page 619: ...Connector is physically removed 2 Check if the Motor failure occurs 3 Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor S7 Connector is physically removed 4 Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor S7 failure occurs E code Detail Code Location Items Description E575 0002 05 Title Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to return to HP Description At initial rotation when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cann...

Page 620: ...is faulty 2 The punch controller PCB is faulty 3 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detail Code Location Items Description E592 8003 05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 1 error Description The voltage of the light received is 2 5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 1 LED1 PTR1 has been increased to 66 or more Remedy 1 The wiring between t...

Page 621: ...controller PCB and sensor is faulty 3 The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty 4 The horizontal registration motor M62 is faulty 5 The punch controller PCB is faulty 6 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detail Code Location Items Description E5F0 8001 05 Title Paper positioning plate home position error Description The paper positioning plate home positio sensor does not turn ON w...

Page 622: ...er controller PCB is faulty E code Detail Code Location Items Description E5F5 8002 05 Title Stitcher front home position error Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF when the stitch motor front has been driven backward for 0 5 sec Remedy 1 The stitcher home position sensor front SW7 is faulty 2 The stitcher front is faulty 3 The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty E...

Page 623: ... leading edge position sensor does not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0 5 sec Remedy 1 The paper pushing plate home position sensor PI14 paper pushing plate top position sensor PI15 and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor PI1 is faulty 2 The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty 3 The paper pushing plate motor M8 is faulty 4 The saddle stitcher controlle...

Page 624: ... ON the main switch 3 If no improvement is found despite the above measures it can be caused by failure with HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0006 00 Title Error in HDD Description There is no system for the sub CPU Remedy Reinstall the system software For details see Chapter 6 Upgrading For your reference the method using US...

Page 625: ... dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the above measures failed to recover the system enter the applicable CHK TYPE 1 in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0104 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the abov...

Page 626: ... solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0124 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the...

Page 627: ...install the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0212 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Sa...

Page 628: ...n be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0301 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system and the...

Page 629: ... Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0322 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the sy...

Page 630: ... dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the above measures failed to recover the system enter the applicable CHK TYPE 1 in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0404 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the abov...

Page 631: ... solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0424 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the...

Page 632: ...install the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0512 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Sa...

Page 633: ...rall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0601 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power conne...

Page 634: ... Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0622 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the sy...

Page 635: ... dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the above measures failed to recover the system enter the applicable CHK TYPE 2 in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0704 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the abov...

Page 636: ... solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0724 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the...

Page 637: ...install the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0812 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Sa...

Page 638: ...n be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0901 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system and the...

Page 639: ... Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 0922 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the sy...

Page 640: ...power 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem get in Download Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1004 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not sol...

Page 641: ... solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1024 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the...

Page 642: ...install the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1112 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Sa...

Page 643: ...he system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1201 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the probl...

Page 644: ...N the Main Power Switch Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1214 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to da...

Page 645: ...e problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1303 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort at startup Rem...

Page 646: ...ove measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1323 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system and then turn ...

Page 647: ...YPE 8 in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1410 00 Title Error in HDD Description System error or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or softwar...

Page 648: ...h Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If there still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1500 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If...

Page 649: ...tail code Location Items Description E602 1513 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort Remedy The document data such as BOX on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the applicable CHK TYPE 9 in the partition to perform HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozens of minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem enter the applicable CHK TYPE ...

Page 650: ...here still remains the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 1602 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in contact with HDD Remedy 1 Check the cable and power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB mem...

Page 651: ...rror or Packet data error Remedy It s due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E60...

Page 652: ...tted disk E602 0001 will occur 2 2 Format the HDD and reinstall the system using SST 3 After replacing the Encryption Board format the HDD and reinstall the system using SST 4 Replace the HDD E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 4000 00 Title Error in HDD Description OS was not found Remedy 1 Check the cable and the power connector 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem sta...

Page 653: ...T and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E code Detail code Location Items Description E602 FF11 00 Title Error in HDD Description Failure in HDD connection Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read Wr...

Page 654: ...l code Location Items Description E602 FF25 00 Title Error in HDD Description WriteAbort Remedy The document data such as BOX on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the applicable CHK TYPE 3 in the partition to perform HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozens of minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem enter the applicable CHK TYPE 3 i...

Page 655: ...no open circuit 3 Replace the Encryption Board E610 0302 00 Title Encryption key error Description Failure of the encryption key was detected Remedy CAUTION Due to this error contents in HDD are initialized 1 Turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Check the cable connection and check that there is no open circuit 3 Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 E code Detail code Location Items Description E610...

Page 656: ... up the data and get approval for this operation When clearing MN CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is error such as not displayed login screen occurred In this case access SMS once and switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status E code Detail code Location Items Description E613 0512 00 Title Faulty insufficient image memory M...

Page 657: ...troller PCB 1 for 2 3 4 line Fax Board E674 0030 07 Title Failure in communication of FAX board Description Error in checksum of USB FAX MAINROM Remedy Get in the download mode from the Service Mode when the power is turned ON and execute downloading of USBFAX MAINROM E674 0100 07 Title Failure in communication of FAX board Description Logging was failed after completion of fax communication Remed...

Page 658: ... completion of reception for specified times in a row Remedy Check the connector connected to the Finisher E713 0022 05 Title Error in UFDI communication Description Undefined error for specified times in a row at reception Remedy Check the connector connected to the Finisher Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E719 0001 00 Title Error in Coin Vendor Description Error in starting of the C...

Page 659: ...ion failed in the middle of the operation although communication with the serial New Card Reader was successful at start up Remedy Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E730 1001 00 Title Error in PDL software Description Initialization error Remedy 1 Execute the PDL reset process 2 Turn OFF and then ON the power E730 100A 00 ...

Page 660: ...e Dcon or the Main Controller PCB 2 E740 0002 00 Title Failure in Ethernet Board Description Incorrect MAC address Remedy 1 Replace the LAN card E740 0003 00 Title Failure in Ethernet Board Description Incorrect MAC address Remedy 1Replace the LAN card Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E743 0000 00 Title DDI communication error Description SCI error occurrence reception data NG receptio...

Page 661: ...te the firmware of the Option Board 2 Remove the Image Analysis Board and go to the following service mode COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST JBLK Lv2 Change the value of ST JBLK from 1 to 0 and turn OFF and then ON the main power Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E746 0023 00 Title Error in engine ID of SoftID Description No response from Image Analysis Board PCB used for PCAM Remedy 1 Check to ...

Page 662: ...s that Sub Board O failed to be installed Remedy Check contact of the Sub Board O and the cable or replace Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 E747 DF00 00 Title Undetected error of Image Process Chip S Description Undetected error of Image Process Chip S Remedy Check contact of ScanI F cable Replace Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 FF00 00 Title A ...

Page 663: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 031B 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 664: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 061A 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 665: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 0818 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 666: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 0B1A 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 667: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 0E0E 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 668: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 0F18 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 669: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 110E 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 670: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 1200 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 671: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 221B 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 672: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 3619 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 673: ...CB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 3A06 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at M...

Page 674: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 3F06 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 675: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 4218 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 676: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 5716 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 677: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 5C00 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 678: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 6000 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 679: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 6216 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 680: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 6B1D 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 681: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 741E 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 682: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 9118 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 683: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 A51D 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 684: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 C000 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 685: ...PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E747 D619 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at ...

Page 686: ...or in access of Main Controller PCB 2 Description Necessary H W on the Main Controller PCB 2 is not found Remedy 1 Remove and then insert the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 2 Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 Ecode Detail code Location Items Description E748 2023 00 Title Error in access of Main Controller PCB 2 Description Unable to initialize th...

Page 687: ... Detail code Location Items Description E806 0001 05 Title Error in Delivery fan 2 Description 1 After the power of the Host Machine has been turned ON rotation of the fan was detected before turning ON the fan 2 There is no rotation signal while the fan is rotating Remedy 1 Check the fan harness to see if the harness is caught disconnected or physically removed 2 Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PC...

Page 688: ...ntroller CPU cooling fan was detected Remedy Check if the connector is connected If the connection was found OK replace the Controller Fan 3 FM13 E880 0003 00 Title Error in Controller Fan Description Riser PCB Fan was detected to be locked Remedy Check if the connector is connected If the connection was found OK replace the Controller Fan 1 FM11 E880 0004 00 Title Error in Controller Fan Descript...

Page 689: ...creen display specification Due to one jam code being used for multiple options the illustration for the different option may be displayed on the jam screen In this case 1 2 or similar information is displayed on top left side of the screen and this area can be pushed This operation can be used to switch information on the screen F 7 1 ...

Page 690: ...PS33 00 0106 Delay jam Fixing inlet sensor PS34 00 0206 Stationary jam Fixing inlet sensor PS34 00 0A06 POWER ON Fixing inlet sensor PS34 00 FF06 Sequence jam 2 Fixing inlet sensor PS34 00 0107 Delay jam Inner delivery sensor PS37 00 0207 Stationary jam Inner delivery sensor PS37 00 0A07 POWER ON Inner delivery sensor PS37 00 FF07 Sequence jam 2 Inner delivery sensor PS37 00 010D Delay jam Duplex ...

Page 691: ... sensor PS8 00 FF03 Sequence jam 2 Cassette 3 pre registration sensor PS8 00 0104 Delay jam Cassette 4 pre registration sensor PS9 00 0204 Stationary jam Cassette 4 pre registration sensor PS9 00 0A04 POWER ON Cassette 4 pre registration sensor PS9 00 FF04 Sequence jam 2 Cassette 4 pre registration sensor PS9 00 0CA6 Sequence jam 2 Recovered by opening and closing the Door 00 0CF1 error 1 00 1F01 ...

Page 692: ...ad sensor 2 SR5 01 0050 Stationary Read sensor 2 2nd sheet SR5 01 0011 delay Delivery sensor PCB5 01 0051 delay Delivery sensor 2nd sheet PCB5 01 0012 Stationary Delivery sensor PCB5 01 0052 Stationary Delivery sensor 2nd sheet PCB5 01 0090 Door open 01 0091 Door open 01 0092 Door open Cover open closed sensor SR10 01 0093 Door open Cover open closed sensor SR10 01 0094 Power ON 01 0071 Sequence E...

Page 693: ...r 01 0073 Error Release motor HP sensor SR11 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door or turning OFF and then ON the power supply If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above the error code is displayed T 7 11 Staple Finisher C1 Booklet Finisher C1 PI101 PI107 PI117 PI103 PI115 PI110 PI116 PI104 PI106 PI111 PI109 PI108 PI123 PI105 PI102 PI120 PI112 PI113 PI114 F 7 6 ...

Page 694: ...17 PI18 PI19 PI20 PI22 02 1001 Delay jam Inlet sensor PI103 02 1101 Stationary jam Inlet sensor PI103 02 1301 POWER ON Inlet sensor PI103 02 1004 Delay jam Feed path sensor PI104 02 1104 Stationary jam Feed path sensor PI104 02 1304 POWER ON Feed path sensor PI104 02 1FA2 stationary jam Delivery sensor Vertical path sensor PI11 PI17 02 1F91 Delay jam No 1 paper sensor PI18 02 1FA1 Stationary jam N...

Page 695: ...e stopper HP sensor S5 02 1C40 Sensor error stack tray clock sensor S14 02 1C42 Sensor error Additional tray clock sensor S23 02 1001 Delay jam Entrance sensor S1 02 1101 Stationary jam Entrance sensor S1 02 1701 Early jam Entrance sensor S1 02 1102 Stationary jam Processing tray sensor S6 02 1300 POWER ON Entrance sensor Processing tray sensor S1 S6 02 1F00 Early jam Entrance sensor S1 02 1500 St...

Page 696: ...er Unit Exhaust Fan FM2 of the Reader is turned ON Check the connector connection Replace the Scanner Unit Exhaust Fan FM2 33 0011 Fixing exhaust fan alarm SET In case the fan abnormality occurred during a job RESET In case the fan operates normally during a job 33 0022 Read Motor Cooling Fan FM1 alarm The fan rotation signal cannot be detected after 3 seconds have passed since the Read Motor Cool...

Page 697: ...sor Punch dust detection level 1 Continue operation Punch dust detection level 2 Suspend printing in case punching operated 1000 times after the level 1 detection Recovery method Remove punch dust 70 0001 Memory overflow 70 0002 Font memory overflow 70 0003 Micromemory overflow 70 0004 Image memory overflow 70 0005 Pattern memory overflow 70 0006 A hard disk error 70 0007 Detect operation abnormal...

Page 698: ...75 9115 Video transfer error CLG O1 HsyncA VsyncA Overun error 75 9116 Video transfer error CLG O1 HsyncA VsyncA VsyncB error Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 75 9117 Video transfer error CLG O1 HsyncA VsyncA VsyncB Overun error 75 9118 Video transfer error CLG O1 HsyncA HsyncB error 75 9119 Video transfer error CLG O1 HsyncA HsyncB Overrun error 75 911A Video transfer error CLG ...

Page 699: ...ansfer error CLG O2 HsyncA VsyncA error Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 75 B115 Video transfer error CLG O2 HsyncA VsyncA Overun error 75 B116 Video transfer error CLG O2 HsyncA VsyncA VsyncB error 75 B117 Video transfer error CLG O2 HsyncA VsyncA VsyncB Overun error 75 B118 Video transfer error CLG O2 HsyncA HsyncB error 75 B119 Video transfer error CLG O2 HsyncA HsyncB Overrun...

Page 700: ... 81 0003 Imaging Overflow of work memory for translator 81 0004 Imaging Imaging initialization error 81 0005 Imaging Imaging processing error 82 0001 RIP H W Dart hangup by the DisplayList injustice 83 0001 CanonPDF PDF data error 83 0002 CanonPDF PDF compression analysis error 83 0003 CanonPDF PDF page compression error 83 0004 CanonPDF PDF data processing error 83 0005 CanonPDF PDF memory full 8...

Page 701: ...8 8 Service Mode Service Mode Overview COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD ...

Page 702: ... a setting value needs to be input on clearing RAM when replacing the PCB Clearly indicated in the use case The case when instructed by the service office due to reasons as having the large negative effects difficult settings etc The case of performing the individual measure due to the tender business etc Do not use in cases that are not mentioned above Service Mode Menu TOP Screen MODELIST A bran...

Page 703: ... S languages Service mode contents like system software can be upgraded by SST F 8 2 I O information enhancement On the COPIER I O the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used sensor motor fan etc makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part And the screen will also display the input output signal 1 Press the button Which button to press will depend on which electri...

Page 704: ...cument size detection dirt detection level Display switching display timing DSPLY SW UI User Interface display related Image related fixing IMG FIX Fixing related Image related transfer IMG TR Primary transfer secondary transfer ITB Image related developing IMG DEV Developer related Image related laser latent image IMG LSR Laser latent image related Image related reader ADF IMG RDR Reader ADF imag...

Page 705: ... Password for service engineer for transition to service mode Setting range To reinforce the security change the password from a default eight digit numeral default 11111111 After the above setting to enter Service Mode enter password screen will appear 1 Additional Functions System Settings System Manager Settings enter System Manager ID enter System Password Settings press OK button System Manag...

Page 706: ... the Service Mode can be switched by performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content SCMNT in HDD Service Mode Content SCMNT can be installed and upgraded on SST Settings Registration Prefernces Display Settings Language Keyboard Switch MEMO If the Service Mode Content SMCNT of the concerned language is not i...

Page 707: ...en in the service label When you replaced the DC controller PCB or executed the RAM clear function adjustment values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default Therefore when you made adjustments and changed values of the Service Mode in the field be sure to write down the changed values in the service label When there is no relevant field in the service label write down the values in a blank field Se...

Page 708: ... DISPLAY VERSION MN CONT Display of MNCON firmware version Lv 1 Details To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 RUI Display of remote UI version Lv 1 Details To display the version of remote UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 PUNCH Display of Puncher Unit version Lv 1 ...

Page 709: ...language file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG SV Display of Swedish language file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG TW Dspl of Chinese language file ...

Page 710: ...ersion Lv 1 Details To display the version of French voice dictionary is displayed when no file is found Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION TTS ES Dspl of Spanish voice dictionary version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary is displayed when no file is found Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj se...

Page 711: ...ion Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEDIA EL Dspl of Greek media information version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Greek media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA ES Dspl of Spanish media information ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Spanish media information U...

Page 712: ... the BIOS version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SYSTEM Dspl Linux kernel tool driver file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of Linux kernel tool driver file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 00 01 to 99 99 00 01 to 99 99 00 01 to 99 99 ROOT Display of ROOT version Lv 1 Details To displa...

Page 713: ...ersion Lv 1 Details To display the Spanish language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY ZH Dspl COPY appli Chinese file ver smpl Lv 2 Details To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to...

Page 714: ...isplay the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY CR Dspl of COPY appli Croatian file version Lv 2 Details To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY RM Dspl of COPY a...

Page 715: ...ails To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND FI Dspl of SEND appli Finnish file version Lv 2 Details To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND HU Dspl of ...

Page 716: ... adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO FR Dspl of usful func intro French file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of French language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO IT Dspl useful func intro Italian file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of Italian language file of Int...

Page 717: ...ussian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO SL Dspl usful func intro Slovenian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 I...

Page 718: ...n file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN CS Dspl of custom menu Czech file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 ...

Page 719: ...ay the version of Slovak language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN TK Dspl of custom menu Turkish file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN CA Dspl of custom...

Page 720: ...lay the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT NO Dspl of accessibility Norwegian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT PL Dspl of ...

Page 721: ...ation Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS ES Display of ERS Spanish file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ERS ZH Display of ERS Chinese file ver smpl Lv 2 Details To display the version of simplified Chine...

Page 722: ... Details To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS RM Display of ERS Romanian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ERS SK Display of ERS Slo...

Page 723: ...ls To display the version of Dutch language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION UAC NO Display of UAC Norwegian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 UAC PL Display of UAC Polish fil...

Page 724: ...ai language file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Thai language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG VN Display of Vietnamese language file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX FR Display of BOX appli French...

Page 725: ... the version of Portuguese language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX RU Dspl of BOX appli Russian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX SL Dspl of BOX appli ...

Page 726: ...99 99 RPTL CS Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 00 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION RPTL DA Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 00 to 99 99 RPTL EL Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To...

Page 727: ...M Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 00 to 99 99 RPTL SK Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 00 to 99 99 RPTL TK Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use...

Page 728: ... option Lv 1 Details To display the connecting state of Finisher related options Use case When checking the connection of Finisher related options Display adj set range Left column connecting state of Finisher related options 1 to 5 1 Without Saddle 2 With Saddle without Folding Unit 3 With Saddle and Inserter without Folding Unit 4 With Saddle and Folding Unit without Inserter 5 With Saddle Inser...

Page 729: ... Display adj set range Character string PCI1 Display of PCI1 connected PCB name Lv 1 Details To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1 Use case When checking the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1 Display adj set range No PCB connected Voice Board Voice PCB 3DES Board Encryption PCB 1Gbit Board Giga Ethernet PCB PCI2 Display of PCI2 connected PCB name Lv 1 Details To display ...

Page 730: ...cking the temperature of Fixing Film Display adj set range 0 to 300 Unit deg C FIX E Dspl of Fixing Heater center temperature Lv 1 Details To display the center temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Main Thermistor 1 Use case When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Heater Display adj set range 0 to 300 Unit deg C FIX E2 Dspl of Fixing Heater front edge temp Lv 1 Details To...

Page 731: ... of primary transfer current M Lv 2 Details To display the decuple value of the current flown to the Primary Transfer Roller M by the primary transfer ATVC control When the two values are out of the target value range 50 to 700 clear the log information for the appropriate control COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 1TR CLR If the two values are both small the Primary Transfer Roller may have reached the end of...

Page 732: ... 50 to 700 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 2TR CLR THCK Y Display of Y Drum abrasion level Lv 1 Details To display the Y Photosensitive Drum abrasion level calculated from the drum film thickness detection results The drum film thickness detection results are reflected to the controls of charging development and transfer Use case When checking the validity of the setting values for tran...

Page 733: ...Controller PCB When the value is out of the target value range image failure or E302 shading error may have occurred Identify the cause according to the value Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Display adj set range 0 to 143 Appropriate target value 0 to 143 COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN OG Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit G frt Lv 2 Details To display the Green g...

Page 734: ...nge 55 to 275 Appropriate target value 100 to 275 COPIER DISPLAY CCD LAMP2 CL Scan Lamp intensity adj VL color back Lv 2 Details To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit paper back in color scanning mode Use case When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode Display adj set range 55 to 275 Appropriate target value 100 to 275 OFST BW Img Sensor offset valu...

Page 735: ... Unit Reader Controller PCB Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Display adj set range 0 to 143 Appropriate target value 0 to 143 COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN2 OB Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit B bck Lv 2 Details To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit paper back Continuous display of upper limit is consi...

Page 736: ...ase When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer Display adj set range 0 to 3000 Unit V Appropriate target value 300 to 4000 COPIER DISPLAY DPOT CHG AC Y Display of primary charging AC bias Y Lv 2 Details To display the primary charging AC bias lastly applied to the Primary Charging Roller Y Use case When an image failure occurs due to charging failure Display adj set range 0 to 3000 U...

Page 737: ...t potntl C Lv 2 Details To display the target C patch contrast potential Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at image density failure Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined range Use case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure When analyzing the cause of a problem Display adj set ...

Page 738: ...GAIN C LPGAIN M Dspl of M color laser power gain value Lv 2 Details To display gain value of M laser power by D max control Use case When checking D max control results Display adj set range 100 to 100 Unit Appropriate target value 0 Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DPOT LPGAIN Y LPGAIN C LPGAIN C Dspl of C color laser power gain value Lv 2 Details To display gain value of C laser power by D ma...

Page 739: ...ervice mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL C COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS K Dspl Bk developer density change ratio Lv 1 Details To display difference between Bk color developer density and the target value in percentage Intolerable difference will trigger E020 This may be caused by deterioration of the developer failure disconnection of the ATR Sensor or error in toner supply system The value is updated upo...

Page 740: ...ower on Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Display adj set range 0 to 255 Appropriate target value 20 to 230 Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS M COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL C Display of C color developer density Lv 1 Details To display the measured value of C color developer density The density is measured with the ATR Sensor C for each job The value is updated upon print oper...

Page 741: ...image target density created by ATR control Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Display adj set range 340 to 640 Appropriate target value 340 to 640 COPIER DISPLAY DENS D CRNT P Dspl of ATR ctrl dark current P wave Lv 2 Details To display the dark current value P wave measured at ATR control Use case When checking the Patch Sensor Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value...

Page 742: ...tem This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor Use case When analyzing the cause of E020 Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 200 to 900 COPIER DISPLAY DENS DS S K H Dspl Bk clr patch image density history Lv 2 Details To display the latest 8 Bk patch image density log data It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence etc Sharp change in values may indicate the...

Page 743: ...sity Y Lv 2 Details To display the Y laser intensity in real time Use case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Display adj set range 00 to FF Appropriate target value 50 to FF LPOWER M Display of laser light intensity M Lv 2 Details To display the M laser intensity in real time Use case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Display adj set range 00 to FF Appropria...

Page 744: ...e Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700 COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT B M Dspl ARCDAT screen B M color target VL Lv 2 Details To display the M patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustm...

Page 745: ...et value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM A K Dspl ARCDAT screen A Bk clr ctrl differ Lv 2 Details To display Bk patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation ad...

Page 746: ...is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGNL A C Dspl ARCDAT screen A C patch current VL Lv 2 Details To display the current C patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or repl...

Page 747: ...ation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLTA A K Dspl ARCDAT screen A Bk density differ Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Bk patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and t...

Page 748: ...e 1023 to 1023 TGT A Y2 ARCDAT scrn A Y color target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the Y patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700 COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT A M2 ARCDAT scrn A M color target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the M patch target value of screen A ...

Page 749: ...RCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700 COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT B K2 ARCDAT scrn B Bk clr target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the Bk patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target...

Page 750: ...UM A K2 ARCDAT scrnA Bk clr ctrl differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display Bk patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set ran...

Page 751: ...ue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT A M2 ARCDAT scrn A M density differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the M patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Che...

Page 752: ...s not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT C K2 ARCDAT scrn C Bk density differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between Bk patch target value and the current value of screen C in...

Page 753: ... not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL C K2 ARCDAT scrnC Bk patch current VL 1 2SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Bk patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Se...

Page 754: ...developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM C M3 ARCDAT scrnC M clr ctrl differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display M patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Che...

Page 755: ...lue Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT B K3 ARCDAT scrn B Bk density differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Bk patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not ...

Page 756: ...n the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL B C3 ARCDAT scrnB C patch current VL 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current C patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or...

Page 757: ...aser shutter motor_I1 M28 I1 I0 00 0 40A 01 0 30A 10 0 22A 11 0 09A 4 M28 3 2 SL5 1 ON 1 SL6 1 ON 0 SL4 1 ON Address bit Name Mark Remarks P006 15 Third delivery flapper solenoid SL7 1 ON 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FM10 1 halfspeed 0 P007 15 Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 2 _half speed FM1 FM2 1 halfspeed 14 Fixing cooling fan front rear FM5 FM6 1 ON 13 Secondary transfer exhaust fan _ full speed...

Page 758: ... 0 DOOROPEN 4 PS37 1 paper 3 PS32 1 A4 K8 B4 B5 A4 R 0 LTR LGL EXE LTR R 2 PS31 1 HP 1 PS30 1 engage 0 PS19 0 DOOROPEN Address bit Name Mark Remarks P010 15 Delivery fan 2 _full speed FM9 1 fullspeed 14 Delivery fan 2 _half speed FM9 1 halfspeed 13 12 11 10 9 8 M26 1 ON 7 6 5 4 3 CL1 1 ON 2 1 Cassette 1 pickup motor_I1 M16 I1 I0 00 1 01A 01 0 79A 10 0 51A 11 0 09A 0 M16 P011 15 14 13 Cassette 2 pi...

Page 759: ...Name Mark Remarks P014 15 14 13 Process cartridge fan rear _half speed FM4 0 halfspeed 12 11 Fixing motor_CW M21 0 CW1 CCW 10 9 Fixing motor_ON M21 8 7 6 0 OFF 5 1 OFF 4 FM4 0 fullspeed 3 First Second delivery motor_I1 M23 I1 I0 00 1 16A 01 0 89A 10 0 66A 11 0 09A 2 M23 1 0 P015 15 Third delivery motor_I1 M25 I1 I0 00 0 93A 01 0 74A 10 0 44A 11 0 09A 14 Third delivery motor_I0 M25 13 12 11 Reverse...

Page 760: ...tch A_1 SW3 0 detect 0 Cassette 4 size switch A_0 SW3 0 detect P017 15 Cassette 3 paper sensor PS2 0 paper 14 Cassette 3 paper level sensor A PS4 0 paper 13 Cassette 3 paper level sensor B PS5 0 paper 12 Cassette 3 pre registration sensor PS8 1 paper 11 Cassette 4 paper sensor PS3 0 paper 10 Cassette 4 paper level sensor A PS6 0 paper 9 Cassette 4 paper level sensor B PS7 0 paper 8 Cassette 4 pre ...

Page 761: ...ect 1 Cassette 2 size switch B_1 SW9 0 detect 0 Cassette 2 size switch B_0 SW9 0 detect P021 15 Cassette 1 paper sensor PS49 0 paper 14 Cassette 1 paper level sensor A PS51 0 paper 13 Cassette 1 paper level sensor B PS52 0 paper 12 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor PS55 1 paper 11 Cassette 2 paper sensor PS50 0 paper 10 Cassette 2 paper level sensor A PS53 0 paper 9 Cassette 2 paper level sensor ...

Page 762: ...HP 5 Toner container cam HP sensor M PS6 1 HP 4 Toner container cam HP sensor Y PS5 1 HP 3 Piezo sensor Bk TS4 1 toner 2 Piezo sensor C TS3 1 toner 1 Piezo sensor M TS2 1 toner 0 Piezo sensor M TS1 1 toner P025 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P026 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Primary transfer separation motor_ I1 M15 I1 I0 00 1 06A 01 0 87A 10 0 69A 11 0 09A 6 Primar...

Page 763: ... 0 P029 15 14 13 12 Deck lifter lower limit sensing switch SW2D 1 lowerlimit 11 Deck lifter upper limit sensor PS3D 1 upperlimit 10 Deck lifter position sensor PS4D 1 ON 9 Deck feed sensor PS1D 1 paper 8 7 Deck open sensor PS9D 1 CLOSE 6 Deck open sensing switch SW1D 0 CLOSE 5 Deck paper level sensor PS7D 1 paper 4 Deck paper out sensor PS2D 0 nopaper 3 Deck pickup sensor PS6D 1 paper 2 Deck set s...

Page 764: ... P002 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Original size sensor 1 CF1 0 paper 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P003 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Scanner unit cooling fan lock FM2 1 error 3 Scanner unit exhaust fan lock FM1 1 error 2 DADF open closed sensor 2 SR3 0 OPEN1 CLOSE 1 DADF open closed sensor 1 SR1 0 OPEN1 CLOSE 0 Original size sensor 2 CF2 0 paper P004 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Scanner moto...

Page 765: ...9 P010 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P001 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Paper surface sensor SR6 1 upperlimit 6 Tray HP sensor SR13 1 HP lowerlimit 5 Tray open closed sensor SR9 0 OPEN 4 AB Inch identification sensor SR7 0 LGL LTRR A5R1 A4R A5 STMTR B6 3 LTR R LGL identification sensor SR8 0 A4Randsmaller 1 LargerthanA4R 2 Read motor cooling fan lock FM2 0 error 1 0 P002 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Scanner ...

Page 766: ...de PCB2 0 paper 6 Delay sensor SR4 0 paper 5 Glass shifting home position sensor SR11 0 HP 4 3 Registration sensor PCB3 0 paper 2 Read sensor 1 PCB4 0 paper 1 Read sensor 2 SR5 1 paper 0 Delivery sensor PCB5 0 paper Address bit Name Mark Remarks P005 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Disengagement motor 2 M7 1 enable 6 Disengagement motor 1 M6 1 enable 5 Tray lifter motor M8 1 enable 4 3 stamp solenoid 1 ON...

Page 767: ...le 2 1 Scanner unit cooling fan FM3 1 ON 0 Pickup roller unit lifter motor M10 1 enable P009 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Delivery sensor PCB5 1 paper Address bit Name Mark Remarks P010 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Read sensor 2 SR5 1 paper 6 Read sensor 1 PCB4 1 paper 5 Registration sensor PCB3 1 paper 4 Leading edge position sensor SR22 1 paper 3 Delay sensor SR4 1 paper 2 Post separation se...

Page 768: ... sensor SR9 1 paper 5 Timing sensor SR4 1 paper 4 3 2 1 0 P002 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Document width sensor2 SR13 1 paper 6 Document width sensor3 SR14 1 paper 5 Document width sensor4 SR15 1 paper 4 Delivery reversal sensor SR3 1 paper 3 Release motor HP sensor SR11 1 HP 2 1 Document length sensor 1 SR7 1 paper 0 Document length sensor 2 SR8 1 paper Address bit Name Mark Remarks P003 15 14 13 12...

Page 769: ... large 0 0 0 1 1 0 3 release motor_I1 M2 I0 I1 Ampere large 0 0 0 1 1 0 2 release motor M2 1 enable 1 Stamp solenoid SL2 1 ON 0 P006 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 ADF motor_I0 M1 I0 I1 Ampere large 0 0 0 1 1 0 4 ADF motor_I1 M1 I0 I1 Ampere large 0 0 0 1 1 0 3 ADF motor M1 1 enable 2 ADF motor_direction M1 0 separate 1 pickup 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P010 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Del...

Page 770: ...id SOL1 0 OFF1 ON 4 3 Shift motor M4 0 OFF1 ON 2 shift roller release motor M5 0 OFF1 ON 1 stopper motor M6 0 OFF1 ON 0 Gripper open close motor M7 0 OFF1 ON Address bit Name Mark Remarks P003 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Feed motor_CW M3 0 CW1 CCW 6 Feed motor_clock M3 1 output 5 4 STPmove motor_clock M1 1 output 3 STPmove motor_PWM M1 0 OFF1 ON 2 Feed motor_PWM M3 0 OFF1 ON 1 0 Gripper unit move moto...

Page 771: ... Entrance roller release stopper HP sensor S5 0 ON1 OFF 4 3 Shift roller release sensor S3 0 ON1 OFF 2 Shift roller HP sensor S2 0 ON1 OFF 1 0 P006 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Additional tray upper lower limit sensor S21 0 OFF1 ON 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P007 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Additional tray paper sensor S22 0 ON1 OFF P008 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ...

Page 772: ...1 stack tray middle sensor S16 1 mid lowlevel 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P011 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Processing tray sensor S6 0 nopaper1 paper 6 Stapler safety switch SW2 0 OFF1 ON 5 Fan2 M9 0 OFF1 ON 4 3 Fan1 M8 0 OFF1 ON 2 1 0 P012 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 paper surface sensor2 S12 0 OFF1 ON 4 paper surface sensor1 S11 0 OFF1 ON 3 stapler edging sensor S19 0 OFF1 ON 2 stapler sensor S2...

Page 773: ...5 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 stapler motor M10 0 ENABLE1 DISABLE 6 5 4 Tray lift motor M11 0 ENABLE1 DISABLE 3 2 1 0 T 8 17 Staple Finisher C1 Booklet Finisher C1 SORTER P001 P007 to P031 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P001 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Tray 2 paper surface sensor 2 PI120 0 paper1 nopaper 6 5 4 3 Front cover sensor PI102 0 CLOSE1 OPEN 2 1 0 P007 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Tray 1 shift mot...

Page 774: ...s P008 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Inlet sensor PI103 0 paper1 nopaper 3 Swing guide home position sensor PI105 1 HP 2 1 0 P009 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Tray 1 paper surface sensor PI111 0 paper1 nopaper 6 5 4 3 2 1 Tray 2 shift motor_lock M108 0 OFF1 lock 0 Tray 1 paper sensor PI112 0 paper1 nopaper Address bit Name Mark Remarks P010 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P011 15 14 13 12 11 10 9...

Page 775: ...tor M108 0 OFF1 ON 6 Tray 2 shift motor_CW M108 0 CW1 CCW 5 Inlet roller separation solenoid SL101 0 OFF1 ON 4 3 2 1 Entrance feed motor_I1 M101 P013 1 P013 0 0 0 Low 0 1 MID 1 0 High 1 1 M ax 0 Entrance feed motor_I0 M101 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P014 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Tray 1 shift motor_enable M107 0 standby1 enable 6 Tray 1 shift motor_CW M107 0 CW1 CCW 5 Tray 1 shift motor M107 0 OF...

Page 776: ...1 nopaper 5 Shutter home position sensor PI113 0 HP 4 Stapler shift home position sensor PI110 0 HP 3 Stapler alignment interference sensor PI116 0 Interference 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P018 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Stapler shift motor_CW M105 0 CCW1 CW 6 Buffer roller separation solenoid SL102 0 OFF1 ON 5 Shutter clutch CL101 0 OFF1 ON 4 Stack ejection lower roller clutch CL102 0 OFF1 O...

Page 777: ...0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Alignment plate home position sensor PI5 1 HP 6 5 4 3 2 Vertical pat paper sensor PI17 0 nopaper1 paper 1 0 P021 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Paper pushing plate top position sensor PI15 0 edge 0 Paper pushing plate home position sensor PI14 1 HP Address bit Name Mark Remarks P022 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Feed motor_CW M1 0 CCW1 CW P023 15 14 13 12 11 ...

Page 778: ...solenoid SL5 0 OFF1 ON 2 Paper folding home position sensor PI21 0 OFF1 ON 1 0 P025 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Feed motor M1 0 ON1 OFF 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P026 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Stitcher motor rear _CW M6 0 ON1 OFF 2 1 Staple sensor rear SW4 0 OFF1 ON 0 P027 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Feed plate contact solenoid SL4 0 OFF1 ON 5 Paper folding motor_RV M2 0 OFF1 ON ...

Page 779: ...M8 0 OFF1 ON 4 Paper folding motor_FWD M2 0 OFF1 ON 3 2 1 0 P029 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Stitcher motor rear _CCW M6 0 ON1 OFF 6 5 4 Stitcher motor front _CW M7 0 ON1 OFF 3 Stitcher motor front _CCW M7 0 ON1 OFF 2 Staple sensor front SW6 1 enable 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P030 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P031 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Saddle inlet sensor PI22 0 nopaper1 paper 6 Gui...

Page 780: ... 8 7 6 5 4 Punch feed motor_enable M63 0 standby1 enable 3 Punch feed motor_I1 M63 P013 3 P013 2 0 0 Low 0 1 MID 1 0 High 1 1 Max 2 Punch feed motor_I0 M63 1 0 P032 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Punch HP sensor PI63 0 HP 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P033 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P034 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Punch motor_CW M61 0 ON 6 Punch motor_CCW M61 0 ON 5 LED PCB Rear edg...

Page 781: ...ve1 keep 4 3 2 1 0 P036 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Side registration motor_B M62 1 ON 1 Side registration motor_A M62 1 ON 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P037 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Side registration sensor1 PCB2 0 paper 6 Scrap full detector PCB PCB4 0 paper 5 Upper door switch MSW61 0 OPEN1 CLOSE 4 Front door switch MSW62 0 OPEN1 CLOSE 3 Side registration sensor2 PCB2 0 paper 2 Side reg...

Page 782: ... changed value in the service label Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S Adjustment of shading position Lv 1 Details To adjust the shading position When replacing the Reader Controller PCB enter the backup value As the value is incremented by 1 the position moves by 0 1mm Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB Adj set operate method Enter the...

Page 783: ...20 CCD COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X White level data X entry of white plate Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Copyboard Glass Adj set operate metho...

Page 784: ...e Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR R Shading target value R Front side Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit paper front execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RA...

Page 785: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 80 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M6 MTF value 6 setting horz scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate me...

Page 786: ...of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 80 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 S7 MTF value 7 setting vert scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF ...

Page 787: ...Display adj set range 1 to 2550 Default value 2000 COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B10 Complex chart No 10 data B Front side Lv 1 Details To derive the front back side linearity set the Blue data for paper front of No 10 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting va...

Page 788: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 80 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M6 MTF value 6 setting horz scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate meth...

Page 789: ...ue of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 80 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S7 MTF value 7 setting vert scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF...

Page 790: ... chart No 2 data G Back side Lv 1 Details To derive the front back side linearity set the Green data for paper back of No 2 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 1 to...

Page 791: ...ss OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 85 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M11 MTF value 11 setting horz scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operat...

Page 792: ...witch Display adj set range 0 to 2550 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R2 DFCH R10 DFCH B2 DFCH B10 DFCH G2 DFCH G10 DFCH K2 COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR BW Shading target value B W Front side Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit paper front execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL3 D...

Page 793: ... 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 700 to 1400 Default value 1126 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL3 DF WLVL4 T 8 21 IMG REG COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG H Y Adj Y color write start pstn horz scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the write start position of Y color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of ...

Page 794: ...tive positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit line Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG V K Adj Bk color write start pstn vert scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the write start position of Bk color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use case When Bk color displacement in the vertical scanning ...

Page 795: ... the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit Default value 0 MAG V Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio vert scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the standard magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction by changing the speed of Photosensitive Drum ITB and Registration Roller Use case When adjusting the ...

Page 796: ...IER ADJUST DENS REF M M toner dens target VL entry Lv 1 Details To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor M of ATR control after RAM clear Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re entering it after RAM clear Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range...

Page 797: ...control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change Adjust the offset of the Y color density target value of D max control The offset is reset when D max control full adjustment is executed Use case When an image failure occurs due to environment change Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power swit...

Page 798: ... to increase the density If you adjust the offset of the target value fogging might get worse Display adj set range 4 to 4 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST DENS P TG C Adj of ATR control C color target value Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for C When the target value determined upon initialization is changed the TD ratio is also changed Fogging and density increase are...

Page 799: ...D max control Use case When a failure occurs due to limiter of D max control Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 300 to 300 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT LY COPIER ADJUST DENS...

Page 800: ...arge DC voltage lower limit Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for Bk in D max control Use case When a failure occurs due to limiter of D max control Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj ...

Page 801: ... 1 Details To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel 0 0423 mm Use case When reducing the margin upon user s request When enlarging the margin for transfer separation fixing separation Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1000 Unit pixel...

Page 802: ...rrectly Display adj set range 20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT Y VCONT M VCONT C COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT C Adj of C color contrast potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for C As the value is incremented by 1 the contrast potential changes by 10V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds aro...

Page 803: ...rrectly Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK Y VBACK C VBACK K COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK C Adj C color fogging removal potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Color Cast to the foggi...

Page 804: ...0 Unit V Default value The value differs according to the environment Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT PT VCT Y PT VCT C PT VCT K COPIER ADJUST V CONT PT VCT C Adj of C color target contrast potntl Lv 2 Details To adjust the C patch target contrast potential for D max PASCAL control As the value is incremented by 1 the target contrast potential changes by 1V Potential is increased Potenti...

Page 805: ...e changed value in the service label Display adj set range 128 to 128 Default value According to the setting at shipment OFST P C C density adj at test print reading Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of C color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment full adjustment When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label As the value is larger the...

Page 806: ...t to alleviate the variation of the density between machines Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 8 to 8 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ K Bk color balance adjustment Lv 1 Details To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk when the density of Bk varies between...

Page 807: ...tive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 32 to 32 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST K Adj Bk bright area dens color balance Lv 1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk As the value is larger the image gets darker Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark and ...

Page 808: ... OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display adj set range 8 to 8 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD OFS M Color balance adj of M mid dens area Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M As the value is larger the image gets darker This setting is linked with Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Corre...

Page 809: ... set range 8 to 8 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS K Color balance adj of Bk high dens area Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk As the value is larger the image gets darker This setting is linked with Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Density Correct Shading Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode Use case Do not use this when the ma...

Page 810: ...urn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display adj set range 8 to 8 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS K Clr blnce adj of Bk mid dens area PDL Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating corr...

Page 811: ...s when the machine is operating correctly Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI IOFSTAC Y DIS TGM Discharge crrnt ctrl M tgt crrnt 1 1SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon discharging current control for plain paper at 1 1 speed Use case When an image failure sand like image occurs Adj set operate method 1 ...

Page 812: ...IS TGC2 Dischg crrnt ctrl C tgt crrnt 1 2 1 3SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharging current control for plain paper at 1 2 and 1 3 speed Use case When an image failure sand like image occurs Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this when th...

Page 813: ...lue is too large the life of the Photosensitive Drum becomes shorter Display adj set range 20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGC COPIER ADJUST HV PRI OFSTAC K Adj Bk charge AC voltage 1 1 speed Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Bk As the value is incremented by 1 the voltage value is increased by 20 Vpp Decrease the value whe...

Page 814: ...when image failure sand like image occurs Use case When image smear occurs When an image failure sand like image occurs Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Use OFSTACC2 only when image failure is not alleviated by making adjustment with DIS TGC2 In this case be sure to return...

Page 815: ...VC Bk target current 1 clr Lv 2 Details To adjust the target current for the Bk color primary transfer current Increase the value when low voltage mottled image occurs with Bk color Decrease the value when Bk color fogging occurs especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs in black mode Adj set operate method 1 Enter t...

Page 816: ...ethod Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H2 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V hvy1 2nd L hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 1 in secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in t...

Page 817: ...rate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H22 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V hvy1 2nd N hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 1 in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the ...

Page 818: ...e method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V pln1 2nd H hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of plain paper 1 in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value...

Page 819: ...t V crd 2nd H hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of postcard in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in the 30 to 30 900 to 900V range in increments of 10 30V When white dots occur on an image the image failure can be alleviated by adjusting the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300V range in in...

Page 820: ... operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGY 1TR TGM 1TR TGC COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR T1 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V thin 1st L hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of thin paper in s...

Page 821: ...the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Increase decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N22 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR T13 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V thin 1st H hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of thin paper ...

Page 822: ...r in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in the 30 to 30 900 to 900V range in increments of 10 30V When white dots occur on an image the image failure can be alleviated by adjusting the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300V range in increments of 10 30V However if the value is too small transfer failure occurs Use case When adj...

Page 823: ... 2 in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in the 30 to 30 900 to 900V range in increments of 10 30V When white dots occur on an image the image failure can be alleviated by adjusting the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300V range in increments of 10 30V However if the value is too small transfer failure occurs Use case When ad...

Page 824: ...ive positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H1 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR SH2 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V hvy2 2nd L hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 2 in secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the val...

Page 825: ...n be alleviated by adjusting the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300V range in increments of 10 30V However if the value is too small transfer failure occurs Use case When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to conditions Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 Related service...

Page 826: ...key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR P23 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR SH23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V hvy2 2nd H hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 2 in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in the 30 ...

Page 827: ...setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGY3 Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt 1 3 speed Lv 2 Details To adjust the target current for the Y color primary transfer current at 1 3 speed Increase the value when low voltage mottled image occurs with Y color Decrease th...

Page 828: ...ally in the 95 mm portion of the image leading edge Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default value 0 T 8 29 FEED ADJ COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST Adj of registration start timing Plain Lv 1 Det...

Page 829: ...s OK key Caution If the paper width is larger than 320 mm execute mechanical adjustment Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C4 Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4 Paper width is 320 mm or smaller As the value is increme...

Page 830: ... the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 55 to 55 Unit mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE Write start pstn in horz scan Cst2 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the...

Page 831: ...stn in horz scan MP Tr 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Multi purpose Tray As the value is incremented by 1 the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacin...

Page 832: ...eeding plain paper from the cassette Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ LP MULT1 MP Tray pre rgst arch amount Plain Lv 1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the Multi purpose Tray As the value is incremented by 1 ...

Page 833: ...isplay adj set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 T 8 31 MISC COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG ADJ Set criteria for text photo front side Lv 1 Details To set the judgment level of text photo original in Text Photo Map mode As the value is larger the original is more likely judged as a photo document and as the value is smaller the original is more likely judged as a text document Use case When copy image area i...

Page 834: ... patterns with 3 dots and 10 spaces which are the same as the PG above in 1200 dpi and confirm that the result is the same as the specified area Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 4 Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG ADJ3 Set criteria for text photo back side L...

Page 835: ...irst side of a document to be read in the 1 path duplex stream reading mode As the value is larger the image gets sharper If the value is too large moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1 path duplex stream reading mode decrease the value when moire on the first side is stronger than the second side and increase ...

Page 836: ...s at the normal service Display adj set range 0 to 3 4 to 15 Not used Unit uA Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK M PR EXP C Setting of C Pre exposure LED current Lv 2 Details To set the current of the Pre exposure LED C Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost Decrease the value when potential is not applied well Use case When drum ghost is significant d...

Page 837: ...rvice mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STIR Y STIR M STIR C STIR 4 STIR 4 Stirring of all color developer Lv 1 Details To stir developer in the Developing Assemblies of 4 colors Y M C Bk Use case At installation of the machine When an image failure occurs Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Requi...

Page 838: ... termination OK At abnormal termination NG Required time 155 sec Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y INISET M INISET K INISET 4 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M Exe of M Dev Ass y initial install mode Lv 1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the M Developing Assembly 1 Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 2 Initialization of the To...

Page 839: ...rt number of Sales Co s server Lv 1 Details To set the port number of the sales company s server to be used for Embedded RDS Use case When using Embedded RDS Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG and RGW ADR as a set Display adj set range 1 to 65535 Default value 443 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E...

Page 840: ...method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 1 to 168 1 week Unit hour Default value 24 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET 4 All color Dev Ass y initial instal mode Lv 1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Assemblies of all colors 1 Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 2 ...

Page 841: ... TEST The setting is enabled after reboot Whether the service browser is ON or OFF can be checked in COPIER DISPLAY USER BRWS STS 1 ON 2 OFF Use case When using the service browser At operation check Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After execution turn OFF ON the main power switch After reboot be sure to check the usage sta...

Page 842: ...0 DFCH2B10 DFCH2K10 COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Deriving of MTF filter coefficient Lv 1 Details To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value of the DADF complex chart Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the value of the reader s service label under COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF MXX SXX MTR2 MXX SXX 2 Select th...

Page 843: ...ice mode again even if OK is displayed Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required time 10 sec LD ADJ C Return C Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn Lv 2 Details When C color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation the Image Skew Correction Motor C is locked and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color displacement ...

Page 844: ...it for checking Display adj set range None Required time 2 min Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRM RSET DRMRSETY DRMRSETC DRMRSETK COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETC Forcible exe of C Drum replacement mode Lv 1 Details To execute the same operation as warm up rotation forcibly At this time laser power values etc that were corrected according to C drum counter total charging time target Vd value...

Page 845: ...ed after automatic adjustment Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4 T 8 38 CLEANING COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING DEVL CLN Cleaning of Developing Assembly Lv 1 Details To clean the Developing Assembly by forcibly consuming deteriorated toner Administrator executes the operation Use case When low density etc occurs after operating in a low duty and high humidity environment for a long time Ad...

Page 846: ...Use case When replacing the fixing related parts Fixing Roller Pressure Roller When a fixing failure occurs Adj set operate method 1 Set A4 LTR plain paper 75 to 90g m2 on the Multi purpose tray 2 Select the Multi purpose tray and then press OK key Printing is started and a sheet is automatically stopped at the fixing nip 10 seconds and then is automatically delivered 3 Measure the nip width Displ...

Page 847: ...he coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel Use case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Press the nine keys in sequence Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK T 8 41 PART CHK COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL Specification of operation Clutch Lv 1 Details To specify the Clutch to oper...

Page 848: ...ion Motor M M32 3 Image Skew Correction Motor C M33 4 Image Skew Correction Motor Bk M34 5 Developing Motor Y M5 6 Developing Motor M M6 7 Developing Motor C M7 8 Developing Motor Bk M8 9 Toner Container Motor Y M9 5 10 Toner Container Motor M M10 5 11 Toner Container Motor C M11 5 12 Toner Container Motor Bk M12 5 13 Drum Motors of all colors M1 to M4 ITB Motor M13 4 14 ITB Displacement Control M...

Page 849: ... set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK DC CON RAM clear of DC Controller PCB Lv 1 Details To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Use case When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Tu...

Page 850: ...OPIER FUNCTION CLEAR MMI Clear of user mode setting value Lv 1 Details To clear the user mode setting values excluding values for Control Panel common settings and FAX Common Settings Timer Settings Adjustment Cleaning Report Output System Settings Copy Settings Communications Settings Printer Settings Use case When clearing various setting values of user mode Adj set operate method 1 Select the i...

Page 851: ...M LOG Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution The method of using the SRAM in E RDS differs depending on the Bootable version Therefore unless the SRAM data is cleared at the time of version upgrade data inconsistency occurs Display adj set range At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS RGW PORT RGW ADR COM ...

Page 852: ...e Secondary Transfer Roller When the environment temperature and humidity changes drastically When any image failure occurs due to secondary transfer Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range None Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS 2ATVC COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 1TR CLR JV CACHE Cache clear of JAVA application Lv 1 Details To clear the cache informatio...

Page 853: ...d service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC R 1PSCLB A COPIER FUNCTION MISC R 1PCLBSET DADF 2 faces color differ crrct ref side Lv 1 Details To set which side of the front or back side should be the reference side when correcting a color difference at the time of duplex stream reading The correction result is reflected after executing the following operation specify the reference side execute a series of ...

Page 854: ...Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1to 12 MTF2 S1 to 12 COPIER FUNCTION MISC R CLM DF1 Sampling of clr front stream read MTF VL Lv 1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation storage If the machine is installed without correcting the value it may cause an image failure such as moire Therefo...

Page 855: ...Details To return the MTF value for color copyboard reading to the factory setting value Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB the MTF value obtained by sampling of the MTF chart becomes disabled When CLM PLTN is executed the value is automatically set to 1 When the value is set to 0 the value adjusted with CLM PLTN becomes disabled and returned ...

Page 856: ... installation Required time Approx 1 minute Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC R BWM DF1 BWM TGT COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1 to 12 MTF2 S1 to 12 COPIER FUNCTION MISC R CLDF2 EN Clr back stream read MTF VL initial set Lv 1 Details To return the MTF value for color back side stream reading to the factory setting value Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Co...

Page 857: ...value to make the image foggy upon user s request moire incorrect judgment Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 55 1 50 The image becomes foggy Default value 0 Required time Approx 2 minutes Supplement memo The MTF value is set to 65 at the time of shipment SCANLMP2 Light up check of LED Lamp Unit back Lv 1 Details To light up the LED ...

Page 858: ... FUNCTION MISC P ENV PRT Temp hmdy surface temp of Fix Roll Lv 1 Details To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log Use case When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine fixing temperature information at problem analysis Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR si...

Page 859: ...ECK Use case When executing HD CLEAR HD CHECK Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 65535 0 Entire HDD 1 Image accumulation area 2 Universal file storage area temporary file 3 PDL file storage area 4 Program file storage area 5 MEAP application 6 Address book transfer setting 7 MEAP storage data 8 System log storage area 9 Advanced Box area 10 Deli...

Page 860: ...tting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of problem occurrence Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution During operation the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored it is overw...

Page 861: ...cting ON reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger Use case When matching the scanning area with the paper size Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF calculated from the detected original size 1 ON calculated from the specified paper size Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW DH ...

Page 862: ...n press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Default value According to the setting at shipment COPIER OPTION FNC SW ORG LGL Special paper size set in DADF mode LGL Lv 2 Details To set the size of special paper LGL configuration that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode Use case Upon user s request When picking up special p...

Page 863: ...ur Display adj set range 50 to 1000 Unit sheet Default value 1000 INTROT T Not used COPIER OPTION FNC SW BK 4CSW ON OFF simple full color mode photo mode Lv 2 Details When outputting solid black image with black mode in text photo printout mode 3 5 mm uneven pitch may occur It may occur because the ITB slips due to peripheral speed difference between the ITB and Photosensitive Drum At this time to...

Page 864: ...r the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Switch from the Base model to the MEAP Full model is not available Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF Base model 1 ON Full model Default value Depending on the setting of option bit MeapModelBIT CKT LANG Not used COPIER OPTION FNC SW KSIZE SW Set of Chinese paper K size support Lv 2 Details To set to detect displ...

Page 865: ...case When setting the number of cards departments Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 1 to 1000 Default value 1000 COPIER OPTION FNC SW COMP PRT Img proc memory allocate at job conflict Lv 2 Details When making 2 or more composition prints page number number of copies stamp date booklet watermark memory fo...

Page 866: ...ase When supporting print job that exceeds 400 binders Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Automatic setting When the print server is not connected not supported When the print server is connected supported 1 Not supported Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW MIBCOUNT Scope range set of Charge Cou...

Page 867: ... speed 1 1 speed 1 2 speed or 1 3 speed PASCAL control and D half control are executed at auto gradation adjustment When 2 is set it is executed only for the lastly used speed only The time required for auto gradation adjustment is short but switching to another speed takes time This is suitable for the users who frequently use a specific paper type When 3 is set it is executed for all speeds The ...

Page 868: ...et range 0 to1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW Set to allow firmware update from UGW Lv 1 Details To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server When 1 Enabled is set Updater accepts the operation from the UGW server in cooperation with CDS Use case When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server Adj set operate method 1 Enter the set...

Page 869: ...log when obtaining it with USB memory it can be also obtained from SST Use case When investigation is not possible with only sub log at the time of problem occurrence Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that third party other than Canon cannot recover the original documen...

Page 870: ...F ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 3 0 Compatible in a conventional manner 1 RFC compatible 2 to 3 Not used Default value 0 MIB EXT Not used COPIER OPTION FNC SW SVC RUI Enabling of RUI function for servicing Lv 1 Details To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing not provided to end users When 0 is set the RUI function is disabled When setting the value other than ...

Page 871: ...e errors may occur Display adj set range 0 to 40 Unit Default value EUR 5 Other 10 Related service mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV CL COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV CL Set Y M C toner level displaying alarm Lv 2 Details To set the Y M C toner level to display absence of toner message Use case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status Adj set operate method Enter ...

Page 872: ...ault value 1 UI BOX Display hide of Inbox screen Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Inbox function Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 No Inbox function Storing is not available even with PDL to Inbox 1 Inbox function is active 2 Inbox function is activ...

Page 873: ...r Cntner rplce user mode Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Toner Container replacement screen in user mode Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW FXMSG SW ON OFF of Fixing Ass y rplce message Lv 2 Details To set whether to display the m...

Page 874: ...OLD Not used COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW TNR WARN ON OFF of toner warning display Lv 1 Details ON OFF of toner warning display The display timig is defined by the setting value of COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW T LW LVL Use case To display the toner warning Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 1 Hide 0 Display De...

Page 875: ...tails To set an upper limit on the number of shortcut buttons that appear at the top of the Control Panel screen The settings for shortcut buttons are made in Setting of Buttons at the Top of the Screen which is displayed by pressing the advanced menu button on the Main Menu screen Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the...

Page 876: ...s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 65535 Default value 25 COPIER OPTION NETWORK SMTPRXPN Setting of SMTP reception port number Lv 2 Details To set SMTP reception port number Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the...

Page 877: ...MTPauth noencry Lv 2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN LOGIN authentication which is plaintext authentication at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 SMTP server depende...

Page 878: ...erate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 1 to 65535 Default value 20000 Related service mode COPIER OPTION NETWORK CMD PORT COPIER OPTION NETWORK MEAP SSL HTTPS port setting of MEAP Lv 2 Details To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP of MEAP Use case When setting HTTPS port for MEAP Adj set op...

Page 879: ...lue 1 COPIER OPTION NETWORK IFX CHIG Set operation by IFAX recv e mail text Lv 1 Details To set the number of characters for the IFAX received e mail text so that the e mail is not printed forwarded when the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e mail text consisting of linefeed codes only In such case ...

Page 880: ...ut clearing SRAM Use case At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION NETWORK NCONF SW ON OFF of Network Configurator function Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of Network Configurator function If the user does not...

Page 881: ...o 48 hours Default value 1 COPIER OPTION NETWORK IPTBROAD Set to allow broad multicast TX Lv 1 Details To set whether to send broadcast packets and multicast packets Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted without specifying an exception address It is permitted within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the IPv4 v6 transmission filter Set 1 Disa...

Page 882: ...ailable Display adj set range 1 to 10 1 600 bytes 2 700 bytes 3 800 bytes 4 900 bytes 5 1000 bytes 6 1100 bytes 7 1200 bytes 8 1300 bytes 9 1400 bytes 10 1500 bytes Unit byte Default value 10 DDNSINTV Set of DDNS periodical update interval Lv 1 Details DNS registration is executed only once at start up with the current iR so the registered contents are deleted in an environment where the DNS serve...

Page 883: ...To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Film As the value is incremented by 1 the cycle is increased by 1 minute Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT Use case At problem analysis Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main p...

Page 884: ... Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING TBLT CLN COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITBB TMG Set of drum ITB cleaning band interval Lv 1 Details To set the intervals at which a band of ATR patches is formed at last rotation as a measure to prevent flipping of the Drum Cleaner If flipping is concerned reduce the interval In addition use this mode when Bk vertical lines occur in a high temperature and hi...

Page 885: ...elivery tray Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Output from the tray from which the last job was output 1 Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among the delivery trays Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FEED SW USZ FEED ON OFF Job set ppr source ppr size chck Lv 1 Details To set...

Page 886: ...Tray When 0 is set the Lifting Plate applies pressure to the envelope once When 1 is set pressure is applied twice and the feeding power is increased Use case At installation When jams frequently occur Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When applying pressure twice jam may occur frequently with Yougata type envelope Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Pressure ...

Page 887: ...e 0 COPIER OPTION IMG SPD ARC INT1 Set of ARCDAT interruption interval Lv 2 Details To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT control is executed When the number of sheets reaches the specified value ARCDAT control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job Decrease the value when the density varies dramatically and increase the value to reduce downtime due to the control If the...

Page 888: ...ase the value when black lines appear As the value is larger the small dust is more likely detected Use case When black line occurs due to dust Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When the value is too small black lines may appear on the image Display adj set range 0 to 255 0 OFF 1 to 84 Weakest 85 t...

Page 889: ... no use of auto gradation adj data Lv 1 Details To set to use not to use the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation adjustment full quick adjustment control Selection is available as to whether to use gamma LUT at the time of image formation Use case When PASCAL related failure occurs when identifying the cause of PASCAL related failure Adj set operate method 1 Ent...

Page 890: ...d then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 Text 1 Halftone photo image 2 Printed photos Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG MCON TMIC BK ON OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct Lv 2 Details To set ON OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL and for copy which are used by TMIC When the...

Page 891: ... the photo area might be different from that of 0 3 Equivalent to scanned photo mode Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color Screen processed image Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG MCON IFXEML Z Set img proc at clr iFAX mail recv print Lv 1 Details To set the image processing which is performed when printing color iFAX or received e mail Use case When there is a request for image improvem...

Page 892: ...er switch Display adj set range 0 to 99 Default value 1 COPIER OPTION IMG MCON VP TXT Set of character vectorization process Lv 2 Details To set vectorization processing for text on scalable PDF In the vectorization processing a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as text and is converted into vector data In regular vectorization function approximation is not used fo...

Page 893: ...lay adj set range 0 to 7 Default value 0 SCR SW Set of low screen ruling dither Lv 1 Details To set the dithering method for low screen ruling When changing the value confirm the change by setting 1 Low screen ruling in COPIER TEST PG TXPH Use case Upon user s request Dot dithering is used Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Execute full adjustment of auto grad...

Page 894: ...e color reduction processing mode Use case Upon user s request improvement of image quality Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG MCON PSCL TBL Set auto gradation adjustment parameters Lv 1 Details To set the parameters of auto gradation adjustment full adj...

Page 895: ...Caution After the value is changed execute the toner ejection sequence Display adj set range 3 to 3 Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DVTGT Y Adj of ATR Sensor Y gain value offset Lv 2 Details To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of ATR Sensor Y When the value is increased TD ratio is increased uneven density at the screw interval is alleviated but fogging m...

Page 896: ...e Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 5 0 0 sheets 1 100 sheets 2 200 sheets 5 500 sheets Unit sheet Default value 2 Related service mode To set the intervals at which a band of ATR patches is formed at last rotation COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITBB TMG COPIER OPTION IMG DEV PCHINT V Adj ATR patch VD count...

Page 897: ...IMG DEV PAP W EN Solid image uneven dens prevention mode Lv 1 Details If the developer is supplied unevenly to the Developing Cylinder uneven density occurs on the solid image In order to make the developer even time for the Toner Feed Screw to rotate is secured by widening the interval between images As the value is larger the interval between images interval between sheets becomes wider Increase...

Page 898: ...lor image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high Use case When density of solid area on an image is not appropriate even performing auto gradation adjustment Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main po...

Page 899: ...1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL3 Fixing control temperature Heavy paper 2 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 2 164 to 209 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing o...

Page 900: ... value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP4 ITOP control temperature Heavy paper 3 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 3 210 to 256 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the ...

Page 901: ...ils To set ON OFF of flying start temperature control When 1 is set flying start temperature control is not performed Selecting 1 has an advantage over selecting 0 in terms of the life of the Fixing Assembly Use case When preferring to extend the life of the Fixing Assembly However selecting 1 does not always extend the life Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 ...

Page 902: ...et operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP8 ITOP control temperature Transparency Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for transparency As the value is in...

Page 903: ...ue 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TM11 ITOP control temperature Recycled ppr Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for recycled paper 52 to 105 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper and decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 94mm Us...

Page 904: ... Arch control at the point where arch is small 1 Arch control to make the arch large with tracing paper Default value 0 T 8 59 CUSTOM COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TEMP TBL Fixing control temperature Plain paper 1 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 64 to 81 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Increase the value wh...

Page 905: ...hod 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display adj set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 00000000 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DEV SP6 Device special settings 6 Lv 2 Details To execute the device special setting Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Tur...

Page 906: ...ain power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display adj set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 0 RDEV SP5 RCON device special settings 5 Lv 2 Details To execute the device special setting Use case For customization etc Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when...

Page 907: ...2 on the Counter Check screen Use case Upon user dealer s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 999 0 No registration Default value The value differs according to the location COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER3 Setting of software counter 3 Lv 1 Details To set counter type for software counter 3 on the...

Page 908: ... OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Small size 1 Large size Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION CUSTOM SC L CNT COPIER OPTION USER TRY STP Set of suspension at full Finisher Tray Lv 2 Details To set whether to suspend or continue output when the full Finisher Tray is detected Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setti...

Page 909: ...ent of fixed values 3rd time random data Default value 1 COPIER OPTION USER JOB INVL Job intvl setting at interruption copy Lv 2 Details To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous output of the next job Paper interval becomes longer when starting pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the prev...

Page 910: ...When 1 ON is set the button is displayed in Management Settings Charge Management Charge Log Screen Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER PCL COPY Set of PCL COPIES command control method Lv 2 Details To set the binder control ...

Page 911: ... operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 Based on Auto ACS Printer Driver settings 1 Color mode 2 Black mode Default value EUR 2 Other 0 COPIER OPTION USER DFLT BOX Set of color mode for inbox print Lv 1 Details To set the default color mode for inbox print operation Use case Upon user s request Adj set opera...

Page 912: ...ils To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that does not go through the server With the setting to restrict the data size it is to be 830 error in the case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value In the case that the data goes through the server the size of transmission data is always restricted Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the s...

Page 913: ... print job be subject to card management by the Card Reader With the setting to enable this mode PDL print is available only when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches the department ID Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 PDL print is available wi...

Page 914: ...or counter Default value JAPAN 0 Other 1 COPIER OPTION USER JA FUNC ON OFF of job archive function Lv 2 Details To set ON OFF of job archive function Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Changing this mode is not available in service mode but reference is available in service mode This mode is available only with the MEA...

Page 915: ... Guidance from Speaker Supplement memo Voice Mode Setting in user mode is displayed only when the Voice Guidance Kit is installed COPIER OPTION USER FILE OF File send prohibition to entered address Lv 1 Details To set to prohibit the file transmission to entered address File transmission is not available by entering the address because of no File display on the transmission screen The addresses al...

Page 916: ...n user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 3 0 No conversion 1 100 x 100 dpi 2 200 x 200 dpi 3 300 x 300 dpi Default value 3 COPIER OPTION USER JA COMPR Dspl job archive record compress ratio Lv 2 Details To display the compression ratio of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than...

Page 917: ...ain power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER SNMP COA Inside comty name SNMPaccess limit admin Lv 2 Details To restrict SNMP access by the community name administrator right that is kept internally This machine internally retains the community name administrator right other than the SNMP community name that is specified in user mode Canon made u...

Page 918: ...button Lv 1 Details Not used for expansion To set whether to display or hide the Service Call button on the Control Panel Use case When the sales company supports service initiated by the Service Call button Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER SCAL...

Page 919: ...erver set Lv 1 Details When 1 Display is set the Rights Management Server function screen is displayed While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature it is possible to hide if not necessary Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default v...

Page 920: ...merged Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display adj set range 0 to1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value 0 JA JDF Setting of JDF SAM Lv 2 Details To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set JDF can be used Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display adj set range 0 to1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value 0 COP...

Page 921: ... 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER DMN MTCH ON OFF of secure print domain judgment Lv 1 Details To set whether to display only the job which matches the domain in the My Job Status screen of...

Page 922: ... OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 21 to 25 21 ISO C5 22 COM10 23 MONARCH 24 DL 25 ISO B5 Default value 23 COPIER OPTION CST ENV2 Setting of Envelope Cassette ENV2 size Lv 1 Details To set the size for Envelope Cassette ENV2 Use case When specifying the size for Envelope Cassette Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the...

Page 923: ...t used Default value 0 COPIER OPTION CST CST1 U3 Set Cst1 overseas special ppr category 3 Lv 1 Details To set the overseas special paper category 3 used in Cassette 1 Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 31 0 B4 B5 LTR 16K 1 to 21 Not used 22 K LGL 23 to 28 Not used 29 A LTR 30 Not used 31 G LTR Defaul...

Page 924: ...erseas special ppr category 4 Lv 1 Details To set the overseas special paper category 4 used in Cassette 3 Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 28 0 LGL 1 to 27 Not used 28 B OFI Default value 0 COPIER OPTION CST CST4 U1 Set Cst4 overseas special ppr category 1 Lv 1 Details To set the overseas special ...

Page 925: ...harge with DA only in Japan 4 Charge with this machine itself 5 New SC mode 6 External charge mode 6 7 External charge mode 7 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL COPIER OPTION NETWORK DA CNCT COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI BOX UI SEND UI FAX COPIER OPTION ACC PDL THR COPIER OPTION ACC DK P Setting of Paper Deck paper size Lv 1 Details To set the paper size used in the Paper ...

Page 926: ...print operation might be done without charging This is to set the number of sheets that can be picked up after the machine receives Ack single from DA When the value is decreased the number of prints to be made without charging is decreased but the productivity may decrease When the value is increased the productivity does not decrease but the number of prints to be made without charging is increa...

Page 927: ... priority on speed output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets With priority on the upper limit number of sheets processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 No support 1 Priority on speed 2 Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default value 0 CC EXT Set of information output at CCV control Lv 1...

Page 928: ... case When checking whether SEND function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST SEND 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR SEND Display adj set range When operation finished normally OK Default value 1 TR SEND Trns license key dspl of SEND function Lv 2 Details To display transfer license key to use SEND functi...

Page 929: ...y is displayed under TR EXPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan Display adj set range 24 digits OF EXPDF Not used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PDFDR Install state dspl of direct print PDF Lv 2 Details To display installation state of direct print PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether direct print PDF function ...

Page 930: ...C 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR VNC Display adj set range 24 digits OF VNC Not used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST WEB Install state dspl Web Access Software Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether Web Access Software is installed Adj set operate met...

Page 931: ...ot used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST TSPDF Install state dspl of time stamp PDF JP Lv 2 Details To display installation state of time stamp PDF transmission function JP only when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether time stamp PDF transmission function JP only is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST TSPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation ...

Page 932: ...te method 1 Select ST SCPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR SCPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed Display adj set range 24 digits OF SCPDF Not used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST AMS Instal state dspl of Access Mngm System Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Access Management System when disabling the function with lic...

Page 933: ...then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PCL Display adj set range 24 digits OF PCL Not used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PSLI5 Installation state display of PS UFR II Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PS UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether PS UFR II is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST PSLI5 2 ...

Page 934: ...1 Select ST PSPCL 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PSPCL Display adj set range 24 digits OF PSPCL Not used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PCLUF Install state dspl PCL UFR II function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PCL UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether PCL UFR II function is install...

Page 935: ... ST LXUFR 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR LXUFR Display adj set range 24 digits OF LXUFR Not used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST HDCR2 Install state dis HDD Init All Data Set Lv 2 Details To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data Settings when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data ...

Page 936: ...n press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR AFAX Display adj set range 24 digits OF AFAX Not used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST REPDF Install state dis reader extensions PDF Lv 2 Details To display installation state of reader extensions PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether reader extensions PDF function is installed Adj set ope...

Page 937: ...2600 Display adj set range 24 digits OF 2600 Not used COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST NCAPT Install state display of NetCap func Lv 2 Details To display installation state of network packet capture function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether network packet capture function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST NCAPT 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key W...

Page 938: ...age gets darker Use case At test print TYPE 5 Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 255 DENS M Adj of M color density at test print Lv 1 Details To adjust M color density when performing test print TYPE 5 As the value is larger the image gets darker Use case At test print TYPE 5 Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press ...

Page 939: ...e method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 1 to 8 1 Cassette 1 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 4 Cassette 4 5 Paper Deck 6 Multi purpose Tray 7 to 8 Not used 2 SIDE Setting of PG 2 sided mode Lv 1 Details To set 1 sided 2 sided print for PG output Use case At problem analysis Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to...

Page 940: ...orting BMlinks Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Ordinary System Monitor screen 1 Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed Default value 0 COPIER TEST NETWORK IPV6 ADR Setting of PING send address IPv6 Lv 1 Details To set the IPv6 address to send PING When PING is sent to this address by COPIER TEST NETWORK PING IP...

Page 941: ...r is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at FAX reception Large size 1 small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 BOX PRT Inbox print counter Lv 1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print Large size 1 small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Display adj set range ...

Page 942: ...Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets MF Multi purpose Tray pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets DK Deck pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets 2 SIDE 2 sided pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets T 8 69 FEEDER COPIER COUNTER FEEDER FEED DADF origina...

Page 943: ...r toner supply blocks Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw Use case When checking the usage status of toner Unit Number of blocks Default value 0 T SPLY M M toner supply counter Lv 1 Details Number of M color toner supply blocks Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw Use case When checking the usage status of toner Unit Number of blocks Default value 0 T SPLY C C ...

Page 944: ...se SUC L K For R D use T 8 72 JOB COPIER COUNTER JOB DVPAPLEN Average paper length of job Lv 1 Details Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine starts printing operation to when it stops the operation Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed continuously as a large job the average paper length affects calculation of the life Display adj set range 0 to ...

Page 945: ...unter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PT DRM Bk Photosensitive Drum parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and th...

Page 946: ...hen press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 M SP RL Multi purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr Lv 1 Details Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj ...

Page 947: ... Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PT DR Y Y Photosensitive Drum parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estima...

Page 948: ...ent Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 Supplement memo Regardless of the read mode 1 sided 2 sided the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed DF SP PD Pickup Separation Pad parts cntr Reader Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the...

Page 949: ...after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 Supplement memo Regardless of the read mode 1 sided 2 sided the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 STAMP Stamp parts counter All Reader Lv 1 Details To display the parts counter and the estimated life of DADF Stamp 1st line Number of sheets fed after the previous replacement...

Page 950: ...then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 C4 SP RL Cassette4 Separation Roller prts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the...

Page 951: ...ect the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 BACK ROL Return Roller parts counter Fin A1 Lv 1 Details Paper Return Roller Front Rear 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts ...

Page 952: ...the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 T 8 75 T CNTR COPIER COUNTER T CNTR YELLOW Y Toner Container counter Lv 1 Details To count u...

Page 953: ...r Lv 1 Details To display distribution of black video count Small size 1 Large size 1 Use case When checking distribution of video count T 8 77 V2 CNTR COPIER COUNTER V2 CNTR TOTAL Video count total counter Lv 1 Details To display distribution of total video count for each color Small size 1 Large size 2 Use case When checking distribution of video count YELLOW Video count Y counter Lv 1 Details T...

Page 954: ...of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display adj set range 0 to 999 Unit C DRM LF Display of Drum Unit C life Lv 1 Details To display how much the Drum Unit C is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display adj set range 0 to 999 Unit K ...

Page 955: ... emission voltage Lv 1 Details To display the light emitting voltage value for the Lead Sensor Use case When jams frequently occur Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 255 Appropriate target value Approx 113 RDSN RCV Display of Lead Sensor reception voltage Lv 1 Details To display the light receiving voltage value for the Lead Sensor Use case When jams frequently occu...

Page 956: ... the leading edge of the sheet Use case When installing DADF When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 FEEDER ADJUST LA SPD2 Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn back Lv 1 Details To adjust the image magnification ratio in vertical...

Page 957: ...CB3 Lead Sensor 1 PCB4 Lead Sensor 2 SR5 Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key MTR CHK Specification of DADF Operation Motor Lv 1 Details To specify the DADF Motor to operate The motor is activated by MTR ON Use case At operation check Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 9 0 Pickup Motor M1 1 Feed Motor M2 2 Registration Mo...

Page 958: ...e case At operation check Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Motor Driver Cooling Fan FM1 1 Read Motor Cooling Fan FM2 Related service mode FEEDER FUNCTION FAN ON FEEDER FUNCTION FAN ON Operation check of DADF Fan Lv 1 Details To start operation check of the Fan specified by FAN CHK Use case At operation check Adj set operate method 1 Select...

Page 959: ...lers for cleaning Clean the roller with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while it is rotating Use case At roller cleaning Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Clean the rotating rollers with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 3 Press OK key The rollers stop Display adj set range None FEED ON Operation check of DADF individual feed Lv 1 Details To start operati...

Page 960: ...egative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 6 to 6 Unit mm Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST STP R2 Adj LTR rear stpl pstn 45 deg Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the one rear staple position on the LTR size paper As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves to the rear side by 0 49mm Use case When the LTR paper rear staple position is displaced Adj set operate method Ent...

Page 961: ...d Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 6 to 6 Unit mm Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST STP R3 Adj A4R rear stpl pstn 45 deg Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4R size paper As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves to the rear side by 0 49mm Use case When misalignment occurs at the rear staple p...

Page 962: ...hen press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST OFST STC Set poor offset stack prev mode Fin C1 Lv 1 Details Set 1 when paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset mode When 1 is set buffer operation is not performed in the small size offset mode Use case When paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset mode Adj set operate met...

Page 963: ...t of paper is not appropriate Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST SFT AMT2 Adj Shift Roller rear shft amnt Fin A1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the rear shift amount of the Shift Roller As the value is incremented by 1 the Shift Roller moves to the push on direction by 0 1mm Us...

Page 964: ...fault value 0 DSTP F1 Adjust frt stpl pstn in 2 stapling mode Lv 1 Details Adjust the front staple position in the middle 2 stapling mode Incrementing the value by 1 shifts the front stapling position to the paper edge side by 0 1 mm Use case When the middle 2 staple position is displaced between the front and rear stapling positions Adj set operate method After inputting value press the OK key Di...

Page 965: ...ey 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 600 mm s 1 700 mm s Default value 1 SORTER OPTION STCR DWN Set occasional misalign prev mode Fin Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of occasional misalignment prevention mode When misalignment in feed direction occurs at approx every 30 sheets for thin plain paper 105g m2 and less set 1 Use case When misalignment in feed direction occur...

Page 966: ...y stationary jam may occur When 1 is set thin paper which width direction is 139 6 mm and smaller is forcibly delivered to the tray of the host machine Use case When delivery stationary jam occurs at the time of delivering narrow width thin paper to the First Second Delivery Tray Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Destination specifi...

Page 967: ...est Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 0 MENU 4 Hide dis of printer setting menu level 4 Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the level 4 of printer setting menu Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK ...

Page 968: ...nstallation How to Check this Installation Procedure Things to do Before Installation Points to Note Before Installation Combination Table of Accessory Installation Checking the Contents Unpacking Installation Procedure ...

Page 969: ...dicated 10 for exclusive use by the machine 2 Environment of the installation site must be within the range indicated below Avoid any area near the faucet the water heater the humidifier or the refrigerator Operation image assured range temperature 15 0 to 30 0 deg C humidity 5 to 80 3 Keep the installation site away from the source of fire a dusty place or a place generating ammonia gas In the ca...

Page 970: ...om F 9 4 F 9 5 Points to Note Before Installation Take note of the following points when installing this equipment 1 Moving this equipment from a low temperature place to a warm plate can generate condensation resulting in image fault Thus when unpacking this equipment leave it for 2 hours or more so that the equipment becomes comfortable with the room temperature Condensation formation of liquid ...

Page 971: ... in the table refer to the table below and check the combination before the setup When installing the USB Device Port B1 install it before installing the following options Utility Tray Voice Guidance Kit Voice Operation Kit Card Reader Utility Tray no no yes Voice Guidance Kit no no yes Voice Operation Kit no no yes Card Reader yes yes yes yes Available no Unavailable T 9 1 Checking the Contents N...

Page 972: ...iner X 1 2 10 Service Book Case X 1 13 Environment Heater Cover X 1 1 12 Power Cable X 1 3 4 1 Use only in the case that the cassette pedestal is not installed 2 Two pieces of it are contained in the package for Europe 3 The connector has a different shape depending on locations Other than USA Use the correct power code to mach the location area of installation Make sure not to leave unused power ...

Page 973: ...ware CD 1 Only when Merchandise Code is 3614B005AB 3615B005AB 3614B005AD and 3615B005AD Maintenance Guide 1 1 1 1 1 How to Use the Manuals 1 5 UK FRA SPA ITA GER 1 1 1 1 AMS Kit 1 Register Update Software Administrator Guide 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Main Unit Warranty 1 Service Log BOOK 1 Chinese Warranty Sheet 1 Guarantee Card 1 iW MC CD 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 PANTONE Manual CD 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 Blue Angel Notice 2 1 1 ...

Page 974: ... 2 Hold the 4 grips on the left or right to lift the host machine up and then put down the machine from the skid CAUTION The host machine weighs maximum 175kg It is recommended to lift it with 4 people or more However if there is a standard to handle a heavy load in each sales company follow it for operation Also make sure to lift the machine with keeping it level at operation Because the gravity ...

Page 975: ...er steps F 9 8 NOTE When setting up for the copier model refer to the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 installation procedure When setting up for the printer model refer to the Printer Cover C1 stated in this procedure 4 Pull out the Cassettes 1 and 2 and remove the tapes from them 5 Open the Front Cover and the Right Lower Cover F 9 9 ...

Page 976: ...protrusion in 1 place While pushing down A claw insert the claw in 2 places and install the Right Front Cover 2 F 9 11 8 Insert the protrusion in 1 place While pushing down A claw insert the claw in 3 places and install the Right Rear Cover 3 x3 A F 9 12 9 Install the 2 Left Handle Covers 1 protrusion each 1 claw each x2 F 9 13 ...

Page 977: ...ews to loosen screw F 9 14 2 Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is positioned in the direction of the arrow and if not turn it and adjust the position ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever direction of the arrow F 9 15 3 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow and then fit the projection to the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure ITB ITB Pressure Releas...

Page 978: ...s x2 F 9 17 5 Hold the Developing Assembly with one hand With the other hand lift the dummy Drum up vertically and slowly to remove it If the dummy Drum is removed the seal can be removed simultaneously CAUTION If diagonally pulled out the seal might be damaged Be sure to pull it out flatly in upper direction and carefully Likely remove the Drum of each color Dummy Drum F 9 18 ...

Page 979: ... direction of the arrow At that time be careful not to leave the torn seal in the Developing Assembly Seal Seal Front Side Rear Side F 9 19 F 9 20 6 Hold down the top surface of each Developing Assembly after removing Dummy Drums CAUTION Be sure to hold the upper side of each Developing Assembly when removing the seal Otherwise the cover will be off from its position F 9 21 CAUTION Be sure to pay ...

Page 980: ... Box removing the Drum Cover and installing to the main body The Scoop up Sheet may be flipped causing toner scattering Be sure not to reinstall the removed Drum Cover otherwise the Scoop up Sheet may be flipped causing toner scattering Drum Cover F 9 22 F 9 23 7 Unpack the Drum Unit and remove the cover from the Drum Unit Claws 2pc CAUTION The cover might be stiff so proceed with extra care when ...

Page 981: ...stalling the Drum Unit CAUTION Only drum for Bk blue color is specified the color Drums for the 3 colors green ones are not specified the color Y M C Drum for Bk Blue Position of Drum for Bk Drum for Color Green Position of Drum for Color F 9 25 NOTE Hold the handles at right and left of the Drum Unit Grip F 9 26 ...

Page 982: ...dure Installing the Drum Unit CAUTION If pushing it in the angle the shutter may breaks Thus make sure to install it from just above F 9 27 8 Fit the guide of the Process Unit to the guide of the Drum Unit to install the Drum Unit Drum Unit Guide Process Unit Guide Process Unit Guide Drum Unit Guide F 9 28 ...

Page 983: ...alling the Drum Unit 9 Check that the 8 LED light receiving areas of the Drum Unit are not off from the base F 9 29 10 Put the Process Unit back to the host machine and secure with the 2 screws CAUTION Check that there is no gap between the host machine and the Process Unit and then secure with the screw A A F 9 30 ...

Page 984: ...elow If the Drum Unit is not secured it may cause the color displacement F 9 31 11 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow and then fit the projection to the triangle mark on the plate to apply pressure CAUTION When pressuring the ITB Pressure Release Lever be sure that the Right Lower Cover is opened first before pressuring F 9 32 12 Install the ITB Cover and tighten the...

Page 985: ...r Lock Lever F 9 33 14 Set the Waste Toner Container and then put the Lever back F 9 34 15 Close the Right Lower Cover the Right Upper Cover and the Front Cover Fixing the Machine in Place In the case that the pedestal is installed 1 Move the host machine to installing position turn the 4 adjusters of the pedestal with screwdriver and secure this host machine F 9 35 ...

Page 986: ...ent are high image smear is likely to occur This is the case that the value of the absolute water volume outside of the machine is about 12g or more Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG ABS HUM In case the Environment Heater Switch Cover is included in the package turn the Environment Heater Switch ON and then install the Environment Heater Switch Cover 1 Remove the Environment Heater Switch Cover C...

Page 987: ...xecuted in a row Even turning OFF the main power during drum initialization developing assembly initialization and toner refill they will be re executed when turning ON the power again 4 After activation follow the instruction in the Control Panel and press the shut down key in the Control Panel 5 Turn ON the main power switch 6 Enter the following Service Mode make sure that the setting value is ...

Page 988: ...r F 9 38 10 Add check marks to each color displayed on the operation screen and press Remove Toner Cartridges to open the Toner Replacement Cover F 9 39 NOTE Step 11 to 13 is to install the Toner Container of each color 11 Hold the Toner Container as the figure below and shake it approximately 10 times F 9 40 12 Remove the Protection Cap of the Toner Container while rotating it to the direction of...

Page 989: ...n developing assembly initialization and toner refill are completed Turning OFF the Main Power Switch 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Setting for K Paper China only Make the following settings for the use of K paper 1 Enter the service mode level 2 2 Change from 0 to...

Page 990: ...ide Plate by referring the size index label of the sheet size to be set and fit it to the slot 3 Hold the Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever and adjust it to the predefined size At that time move the Trail Edge Guide Plate by referring the size index label of the sheet size be set and fit it to the slot Side Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate Rear Edge Guide Plate Rear Edge Guide Plate Lever F 9 44 4 Se...

Page 991: ...ze being set Lump the Size Plates not in use together and store them at the rear F 9 47 8 Close the cover from which the Size Plate is pushed in and install the cassette 9 Set the other cassette in the same way 10 If the cassette pedestal is installed do the same for the cassette of the cassette pedestal as well NOTE Paper size settings are automatically recognized ...

Page 992: ...cassette for the test print and press OK 5 Then follow the direction displayed on UI Checking after the Installation 1 In Service Mode check the result of Drum Unit initialization Make sure that the value of the installed color is 0 to 2 Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS THCK Y Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS THCK M Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS THCK C NOTE If an error code E061 xxxx is d...

Page 993: ...t Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Heavy1 Heavy2 Full Adjust 4 Select the cassette for the test print and press OK 5 Then follow the direction displayed on UI When Heavy3 paper is used 1 Set the heavy paper on the Multi purpose Tray 2 Select Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Heavy3 Full Adj...

Page 994: ...e formation order With this equipment the second side in the image formation order at the time of 2 sided copy print is equivalent to the first side of the original Margin Adjustment 1st side Mechanical Adjsutment 1 Make copies using the Cassette 1 and 2 and check that the left edge margin is 2 5 1 5mm Feeding direction of paper L1 image F 9 48 In Case of Nonstandard NOTE Adjsutment method is same...

Page 995: ... 1st side Mechanical Adjsutment 5 Move the adjusting plates back and forth by referring the scale checked in the step 3 As moving the adjusting plate toward the rear by 1 scale the left edge margin becomes 1mm smaller NOTE When moving the scale be sure that the amount of the value to be moved are the same for the 2 points F 9 51 6 Tighten the fixing screw 7 Return the cassette to its original posi...

Page 996: ...tallation Installation Procedure Adjusting Image Position Margin Adjustment 1st side Mechanical Adjsutment NOTE When the cassette positions are uneven due to the mechanical adjustment adjust them by loosening the screw at left side F 9 52 8 Make copies using the Cassette 1 and 2 and check that the left edge margin is 2 5 1 5mm ...

Page 997: ...in cassette 1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE 4 To make the setting value effective turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine 5 Make 2 sided copy from cassette 2 and check that the left margin is 2 5 2 0mm 6 If the margin is out of the specification change the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side in cassette 2 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE 1 increment of the value reduces th...

Page 998: ...tment 5 Loosen the fixing screw for the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover Screw F 9 56 6 Move the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover back and forth according to the value confirmed in step 2 Moving the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover to the rear of this equipment increases the left margin F 9 57 7 Tighten the fixing screw for the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover 8 Place paper on the Multi Purpose Tray 9 Mak...

Page 999: ...left margin by 0 1mm 3 To make the setting value effective turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine 4 Write down the new adjustment value on the service label ADJ MFRE Lead edge Margin Adjustment 1st side 1 Make copy from cassettte 1 and check that the lead edge margin is L1 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm If the lead edge margin is out of the specification go through the following steps to make adjustment F...

Page 1000: ...n the 2nd side is L1 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm If the lead edge margin is out of the specification go through the following steps to make adjustment Feeding direction of paper image L1 F 9 59 2 Select the following in Service Mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG DUP1 3 Change the setting value to make adjustment 1 increment of the setting value reduces the lead edge margin by 0 1mm 4 To make the setting value eff...

Page 1001: ... Pedestal Bottom Plate F 9 60 CAUTION Do not attach the Service Book Case to the following location Inside the machine inner side of the front cover Anywhere that blocks the louver area Anywhere that blocks the grip area NOTE In the case of machine confifuration without the cassette pedestal attach the Service Book Case to the Left Cover of this main unit Right Lower Sub Cover 1 1 Install the Righ...

Page 1002: ...n the case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 1 Open the ADF 2 Pull the lever at upper area of the ADF and open the cover of the ADF reading area F 9 62 3 Open the Stamp Cover F 9 63 4 Using tweezers install the Stamp Cartridge with its stamp side faces up F 9 64 5 Close the Stamp Cover 6 Close the cover of the ADF reading area 7 Close the ADF ...

Page 1003: ...der Unit B1 1 Open the Feed Cover and the Separation Guide of the DADF Feed Cover Separation Guide F 9 65 2 Using tweezers install the Stamp Cartridge with its stamp side faces up F 9 66 3 Close the Feed Cover and the Separation Guide of the DADF Reversal Trail edge Guide Install the Reversal Trail edge Guide to the delivery assembly 2 claws Reversal Trail edge Guide x2 F 9 67 ...

Page 1004: ...setting Settings Registration Preferences Network Confirm Network Connection Set Changes Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 4 Turn OFF the main power switch 5 Turn ON the main power switch Ping Operation Procedure CAUTION Ping command cannot be executed to Windows Vista PC from the Host Machine To execute Ping command to Windows Vista PC disable the Fi...

Page 1005: ...rmation will be displayed Checking Network Setting of the Host Machine Check if the IP address specified on the host machine is correct Select the following Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings and note the IP address in the IP Address field Select the following Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING Comma...

Page 1006: ...nter Cover C1 C2 Checking the Contents Printer Cover C1 1 Printer Cover x 1 2 Top Front Cover x 1 3 Top Right Cover x 1 4 Top Left Cover x 1 5 Reader Fixing Hook A x 1 6 Reader Fixing Hook B x 2 7 Fixing Hook C x 1 8 Rubber Cap x 4 9 Screw Stepped Screw M4 x 1 10 Screw Flat Head Screw M4x6 x 2 11 Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 x 2 12 Screw Blinding M4x8 x 8 F 9 68 ...

Page 1007: ...odel Front Cover X 1 Use 8 of them 1 Printer Cover x 1 3 Top Front Cover x 1 4 Top Right Cover x 1 5 Top Left Cover x 1 6 Reader Fixing Hook A x 1 7 Reader Fixing Hook B x 2 8 Fixing Hook C x 1 9 Rubber Cap x 8 10 Screw Stepped Screw M4 x 1 11 Screw Flat Head Screw M4x6 x 2 12 Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 x 2 13 Screw Blinding M4x8 x 15 14 Edge Saddle X 2 15 Reader Joint Left X 1 F 9 69 ...

Page 1008: ...n Printer Cover C1 C2 Turning OFF the Main Power Switch 16 DP Cable Guide X 1 17 Reader Joint Right X 2 18 Reader Damper X 2 19 Screw TP Round End M3x6 X 5 20 Wire Saddle X 6 Turning OFF the Main Power Switch Refer to Turning OFF the Main Power Switch in Main Unit Installation Procedure F 9 70 ...

Page 1009: ...ation Procedure Installation Procedure 1 Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow F 9 71 2 Move the Control Panel Mount Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 screw F 9 72 3 Check the installing position of the 2 Joints Right Install them on the L marking side if they are on the H marking side F 9 73 ...

Page 1010: ...4 CAUTION Align the screw in left side to the emboss and tighten first Ensure not to pinch the USB cable If tighten a screw after removing USB cable ensure to re install the USB cable Stepped Screw x3 Embosses USB Cable F 9 75 6 Install the Reader Fixing Hook B 2 screws Flat Head M4x6 7 Install the Reader Fixing Hooks A and C after adjusting it to the emboss 2 screws Binding M4x8 Reader Fixing Hoo...

Page 1011: ...M3x8 5 9 Install the Left Top Cover and Right Top Cover 4 screws Binding M4x8 4 rubber caps Top Front Cover x6 Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 F 9 77 Procedure only for Printer Cover C2 10 Install the Rubber Caps to the Top Cover and the Top Rear Cover F 9 78 11 Return the Control Panel Mount Cover 12 Return the Control Panel ...

Page 1012: ...are the following parts because each part of the Reader Heater Unit is assigned as service part 1 Reader Heater X 1 2 Flat Screw M4X4 X 4 3 Heater Sheet X 1sheet 3 sheets are used in this Installation procedure NO Parts Number Q ty 1 FK2 7164 000 1 pc 2 XA9 1956 000 4 pc 3 FC8 6060 000 1 sheet Turning OFF the power of the Host Machine Be sure to refer to How to Disconnect the Main Power in the Hos...

Page 1013: ... the ADF or Copyboard Cover F 9 80 2 Remove the Reader Right Retainer Cover 2 Screws x2 F 9 81 3 Remove the Reader Cable Cover 2 Screws x2 F 9 82 4 Remove the Copyboard Glass F 9 83 CAUTION When removing the Copyboard Glass be sure not to touch your finger to the white plate in the surface and the backside of the glass If it is dirty clean it with lint free paper F 9 84 ...

Page 1014: ...on Reader Heater Unit EUR onry Installation Procedure 5 Align 3 sheets of heater sheet to the marking line and adhere them Marking Line Heater Sheet F 9 85 6 Install the Reader Heater 4 Flat Screws M4 CAUTION Do not scratch the surface of the Guide Shaft x4 Reader Heater Guide Shaft F 9 86 ...

Page 1015: ... Unit EUR onry Installation Procedure Installation Reader Heater Unit EUR onry Installation Procedure 7 Pass the connector under the rail as shown F 9 87 CAUTION Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail Wire Scanner Rail F 9 88 ...

Page 1016: ...nry Installation Procedure 8 Loosen the screw shift the Harness Guide in the direction of the arrow pass the harness and make space A A Screw F 9 89 9 Pass the harnesses to the claw of the FFC Guide in 4 places NOTE Make sure that the harnesses are securely fixed x4 Claw of the FFC Guide Claw of the FFC Guide F 9 90 ...

Page 1017: ...r Edge Saddle Edge Saddle x2 x2 F 9 91 11 Tighten the screw loosened in step 8 after adjusting it to the boss NOTE Make sure that the sheet is placed on the plate F 9 92 12 Install the removed covers Copyboard Glass Reader Cable Cover Reader Right Retainer Cover 13 Close the ADF or the Copyboard Cover 14 Insert the power plug of main unit into a socket 15 Open the Switch Cover and turn the main po...

Page 1018: ...hen removing a cover do not insert a screwdriver in the slot 1 Remove the Environment Heater Switch cover F 9 93 2 Check that the Environment Heater Switch is ON 3 Turn ON if it was OFF F 9 94 4 Install the Environment Heater Switch cover 5 Check that the breaker switch in the back of the main unit is ON 5 6 Turn ON if it was OFF F 9 95 7 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power out...

Page 1019: ...it x 1 5 Screw P Tight M3x8 x 1 2 Heater Connector Cover x 1 3 Wire Saddle x 1 4 Screw Ｗ Sems Round End M3X6 x 1 Not used with this procedure Checking the Parts to be Installed EUR only Cassette Heater Unit Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater Unit is assigned as service part 1 Cassette Heater Unit x 1 2 Screw Ｗ Sems Round End M3X6 x 1 NO Parts name Parts Number Q t...

Page 1020: ... The installation procedure of this product is not changed either in the host machine t or the cassette pedestal 1 Press the Cassette Release Button to remove the Cassette Host Machine Cassettes 1 and 2 Cassette pedestal Cassette 3 and 4 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Cassette Release Button Cassette Release Button F 9 98 2 Remove the Heater Connector Cover with a flat blade screwdriv...

Page 1021: ...3 claws Caution Be sure that the claws are fit into the holes of the Base Plate properly Cassette Heater Unit Base Plate Cassette Heater Unit Base Plate F 9 100 4 Tighten the removed screw W sems round end M3X6 with the stubby driver to connect the connector The figure below shows an example of the Cassette Pedestal Follow the same step as for the host machine Connector F 9 101 5 Install the heate...

Page 1022: ...cover be sure not to insert a screwdriver in the elongate hole 1 Remove the Environment Heater Switch Cover F 9 102 2 Check that the Environment Heater Switch is ON 3 Turn ON if it was OFF F 9 103 4 nstall the Environment Heater Switch Cover 5 Check that the breaker switch in the back of the main unit is ON 6 Turn ON if it was OFF F 9 104 7 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power o...

Page 1023: ... 1 5 1 Heater unit 1pc 2 AC input connector 1pc 3 Relay harness unit 1pc 4 AC cable 1pc 5 Screw w washer 2pcs 6 Cable protection bush 1pc 7 Power supply label 1pc 8 RS tight screw M4x8 2pcs 9 Wire saddle 3pcs Only 2 pcs are used for this unit 10 Plug cover 1pc 11 Binding screw M4x4 1pc Not used for this unit Turning OFF the Main Power Switch Refer to Turning OFF the Main Power Switch in Main Unit ...

Page 1024: ...e must have been removed from the outlet b Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck c Use correct screws lengths and diameters at correct positions Installation Procedure 1 Remove reusable band and then disconnect the paper deck connector from the host machine F 9 106 2 Release the paper deck from the host machine and then press down the latch plate of the paper deck hou...

Page 1025: ...ews and then detach the right cover of the paper deck in the direction of the arrow shown x3 F 9 108 4 Remove four screws and two other screw and then detach the rear cover of the paper deck x6 F 9 109 5 Remove three screws and one connector and then detach the front upper cover x3 x1 F 9 110 6 Remove two screws and then detach the top cover x2 F 9 111 ...

Page 1026: ...under the top panel of the paper deck and then take the connector out of the hole on the top plate 9 Insert the two hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck and then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck using a screw with toothed washer x1 F 9 113 10 Attach the heater connector to the panel mount F 9 114 11 Remove one screw to remove the blind...

Page 1027: ...per deck using the two screws M4X8 and then connect the connector x2 F 9 117 14 Wind the relay harness one and half turns around the cable guides on the power cord mount and then connect the connector F 9 118 15 Reattach the exterior covers of the paper deck in the following sequence 1 Top cover Take care not to have cables caught M4X8 2 pcs 2 Front upper cover Insert the connector M4X8 3 pcs 3 Re...

Page 1028: ...tte Heater Unit 32 Installation Procedure 17 Attach reusable band and then connect the connector of the paper deck to the back of the host machine F 9 119 18 Stick the power supply label to the rear panel of the paper deck F 9 120 19 Remove 1 screw bind head M4x4 to detach the plate x1 F 9 121 ...

Page 1029: ...he AC cable as shown and then connect the other connector plug to the receptacle on the rear panel of the host machine F 9 122 21 Fix the supplied plug cover at rear side of the host machine with 1 screw bind head M4x4 removed at the step 19 x1 F 9 123 To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening shoul...

Page 1030: ...ation when installing this equipment before operation Table of Options Combination Voice Guidance Kit Voice Operation Kit Card Reader Utility Tray no no yes yes Available no Unavailable Checking the Contents 6 Screw TP M4x8 Black X 10 5 Keyboard Table Plate X 1 1 Utility Tray Unit X 1 2 Wire Saddle X 5 4 Screw TP M4x10 X 2 3 Screw TP M4x14 X 4 Use when installing the USB Keyboard T 9 5 F 9 125 ...

Page 1031: ...llation Utility Tray A2 Installation Procedure Installation Outline Drawing F 9 126 Installation Procedure 1 Remove packing tapes 2 Loosen the 2 screws and move the Utility Tray Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow until it stops Utility Tray Mounting Plate F 9 127 ...

Page 1032: ... pull the A part of the Utility Tray too much A F 9 128 4 Remove the 4 face seals from the Reader Right Cover Removed Face Seal will not be used Face Seals F 9 129 5 Install the Utility Tray Mounting Plate 4 screws TP M4 x 14 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation If the holes are marked as shown below align the holes marked with D G J and P with the holes in the host machine A Q R S B C D E F G H...

Page 1033: ...ray A2 When installing the Keyboard 6 Install the Utility Tray 2 screws TP M4 x 10 2 screws Tighten the screws loosened in step 2 x2 F 9 132 When installing the Keyboard 1 Remove the 2 cap covers and install the 5 wire saddles The removed Cap Covers will not be used Cap Cover Wire Saddle F 9 133 ...

Page 1034: ... Key Switch Unit A2 Turning OFF the power of the Host Machine Key Switch Unit A2 Checking the Content 1 Key Switch Unit x 1 2 Control Key x 1 3 Screw Binding M4 6 x 1 Turning OFF the power of the Host Machine Be sure to refer to How to Disconnect the Main Power in the Host Machine installation F 9 134 ...

Page 1035: ...stallation Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open also the Right Upper Cover in the same time F 9 135 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS Tightening M4 2 Screws TP M3 Claw in 1 place Claw x3 F 9 136 4 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber caps 2 Screw Claw in 5 places x2 Claw x5 F 9 137 ...

Page 1036: ...n Procedure 5 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber caps 2 Screws Claw in 1 place Claw x2 F 9 138 6 Remove the Connector Cover 1 Screw F 9 139 7 Remove the connector of the Cassette Pedestal If the Pedestal is not installed this procedure is not needed Harness Guide in 6 places 5 Connectors x5 Connector x6 Guide F 9 140 ...

Page 1037: ...ey Switch Unit A2 Installation Procedure 8 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 Rubber caps 2 Screws Claw in 2 places Hook in 2 places x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook F 9 141 9 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Claw in 3 places Claw x3 Claw F 9 142 10 Remove the Right Rear Cover 2 2 Screws x2 F 9 143 ...

Page 1038: ...ocedure 11 Remove the Key Switch Bracket 2 Screws x2 F 9 144 12 Install the Key Switch Unit to the Key Switch Bracket 1 Screw Binding M4x6 F 9 145 13 Install the Key Switch Bracket assembled in the previous procedure 2 Screws use the screw removed in step 11 x2 F 9 146 14 Open the Feed Driver PCB 2 Screws x2 F 9 147 ...

Page 1039: ...ch Unit F 9 148 16 Put the Feed Driver PCB back in the original position 17 Cut the A part of the removed Right Rear Cover 2 in step 10 with nipper etc A F 9 149 18 Reinstall the removed covers and the connectors Right Rear Cover 2 Right Rear Cover 3 Rear Lower Cover Cconnector of the Cassette Pedestal Connector Cover Rear Cover Left Rear Cover Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover Right Upper Cove...

Page 1040: ...ect the power plug of the host machine into the outlet 2 Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch 3 Set the following service mode value to 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL KEY 4 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 5 Make sure that Set the control key is displayed 6 Insert the Control key into the Key Switch Unit and make sure that the machine is ready for copy ...

Page 1041: ...Contents 1 Speaker Unit X 1 2 Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1 3 DVI Cable X 1 4 Ring Core X 2 8 Screw Binding M4x20 X 2 9 Screw Binding M3x20 X 1 10 Screw Binding M4x6 X 1 7 Wire Saddle X 3 5 Ring Core X 1 6 Cord Guide X 7 13 Cable Face Seal X 1 14 Card Spacer X 1 15 Screw Binding M4x14 X 1 12 Support Plate X 1 11 Screw TP M3x6 X 2 Use 1 of them Use 2 of them F 9 150 ...

Page 1042: ...uide Voice Operation Quick Reference Guide Voice Guidance Guide CD Voice Operation Kit Manual CD FCC IC Instruction Sheet Points to note when Installing CAUTION The Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment When installing the equipment see the Combination Table of Accessory Installation Turning OFF the Host Machine Be sure to refer to the Host Machine Installation How to disconnec...

Page 1043: ...same time F 9 151 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS Tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 Claw in 1 place Claw x3 F 9 152 4 If Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 1 Wire Saddle 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 153 5 Remove the USB cable and Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communicat...

Page 1044: ...crews open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 155 7 Hold the grip in 2 places remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness F 9 156 8 Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller Roller PCB 1 Do not use the removed Support Voice Operation Board 2 Screws removed screw will be used in step 9 x2 F 9 157 ...

Page 1045: ...2 Screws that removed in step 8 2 Screws TP M3x6 NOTE Make sure that the connector is properly installed x4 Connector F 9 158 10 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is ins...

Page 1046: ...lled install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 160 13 Remove the Small Cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw Claw in 2 places 爪 x2 F 9 161 14 Cut the A part of the Right Rear Cover 1 with nipp...

Page 1047: ...6 Close the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 17 Remove the Rubber Cap screw the Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover Do not use the removed Rubber Cap screw and Cover Seal Rubber Cap Cover Seal F 9 163 18 Remove the Speaker Unit Lower from the Speaker Unit 2 screws removed screw will be used in step 20 x2 Speaker Unit Lower F 9 164 19 Install the Speaker Unit Lower 2 Screws Binding M4x20 ...

Page 1048: ...t C2 Installation Procedure 20 Install the Speaker Unit Upper 2 screws screws that removed in step 18 x2 F 9 166 21 Remove the Cord Guide Cover F 9 167 22 Peel off the paper liner and affix the Cord Guide 23 Peel off the Cover Seal and install the 2 Wire Saddles Cover Seal Cord Guide Wire Saddles F 9 168 ...

Page 1049: ...ing Core to both sides of the DVI Cable and remove the cap Cap DVI Cable Ring Core F 9 169 25 Connect both sides of the DVI Cable respectively F 9 170 26 Pass the DVI Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1 and close the cover F 9 171 27 Pass DVI Cable to the Cord Guide and install the cover 28 Fix the DVI Cable to the Wire Saddle F 9 172 ...

Page 1050: ...e that Tune Microphone is displayed Operation Check When using 1 Press Reset Key and Voice Recognition Button for 3 secs or more 2 In the operation screen Voice Navigation select one of the following Manual Vocal Mode Vocal Mode Manual Mode and press OK 3 The display in Panel Screen if the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame Voice Guidance Kit is available NOTE If Manual Mode is select...

Page 1051: ...ents Voice Guidance Kit F1 Checking the Contents 1 2 2 1 Speaker Unit Upper X 1 2 Speaker Unit Lower X 1 3 Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1 4 Speaker Cable X 1 5 Cord Guide X 7 6 Ring Core X 2 11 Screw TP M3X6 X 2 10 Screw Binding M4X6 X 1 7 Screw Binding M4X20 X 2 8 Screw Binding M4X16 X 2 9 Screw Binding M3X16 X 1 3 F 9 173 ...

Page 1052: ... procedure 3 2 screws are used in this Installation Procedure CD GUIDES Voice Guidance kit Users Guide Voice Guidance Guide CD Sheet FCC IC Points to note when Installing CAUTION The Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment When installing the equipment see the Combination Table of Accessory Installation Turning OFF the Host Machine Be sure to refer to Host Machine Installation Ho...

Page 1053: ...ame time F 9 174 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS Tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 Claw in 1 place Claw x3 F 9 175 4 If reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 wire Saddle 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 176 5 Remove the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communicati...

Page 1054: ...screws and open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 178 7 Hold the grip in 2 places remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness F 9 179 8 Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1 Do not use the removed Support Voice Operation Board 2 Screws removed screw will be used in step 9 x2 F 9 180 ...

Page 1055: ...ews that removed in step 8 2 Screws TP M3 6 NOTE Make sure that the connector is installed properly x4 Connector F 9 181 10 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 in the Host Machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installe...

Page 1056: ...alled install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 183 13 Remove the small cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw Claw in 2 places 爪 x2 F 9 184 14 Cut the A part of Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper ...

Page 1057: ...not close the Right Rear Cover 1 16 Close the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 17 Remove the Rubber Cap screw and Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover Do not use the removed Rubber Cap screw and Cover Seal Rubber Cap Cover Seal F 9 186 18 Install the Speaker Unit lower 2 Screws Bind M4x20 x2 F 9 187 19 Install the Speaker Unit Upper 1 Screw Bind M4x6 F 9 188 ...

Page 1058: ...aker Cable 50mm F 9 189 21 Remove the cover of the 3 Cord Guides F 9 190 22 Peel off the paper liner and affix them in 3 places in the Cord Guide as shown in the figure NOTE If this is used together with the Card Reader C1 Use the wire saddle enclosed with the Card Reader Installation Kit B1 to the A area A F 9 191 23 Connect both sides of the Speaker Cable respectively F 9 192 ...

Page 1059: ...llation Procedure Installation Voice Guidance Kit F1 Installation Procedure 24 Pass the Speaker Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1 and close the cover F 9 193 25 Pass the Speaker Cable to Cord Guide and install the 3 Cord Guide covers F 9 194 ...

Page 1060: ...ice Navigation is ON 4 Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings and make sure that Voice Guide from Speakers is displayed Operation Check During use 1 Press reset key 3 secs or more 2 Press Main Menu in Control Panel 3 If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame Voice Guidance Kit is available If Voice Guidance Kit doesn t properly operate check the belo...

Page 1061: ...ote at Installation NOTE Although model with the Card Reader C1 is used for illustration in this procedure the same procedure is applied to model with the Copy Card Reader F1 CAUTION To install the Card Reader C1 the Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 is required To install the Copy Card Reader F1 the Card Reader Mounting Kit B2 is required Checking the Contents Card Reader C1 Copy Card Reader F1 1 Card ...

Page 1062: ...F1 Checking the Contents Card Reader Attachment B1 Card Reader Attachment B1 1 Card Reader Mounting Plate front Unit x 1 2 Card Reader Mounting Plate rear Unit x 1 3 Card Reader Relay Unit x 1 4 Connector Cover x 1 5 Card Reader External Relay Harness x 1 10 Screw TP M3X6 x 4 6 Cord Guide x 2 7 PCB Spacer x 1 9 Screw TP M4X12 x 2 8 Wire Saddle x 1 F 9 196 ...

Page 1063: ...chment B2 Card Reader Attachment B2 12 Screw Bind M4x6 X 4 11 Screw TP M4x12 X 2 6 Card Reader External Relay Harness X 1 7 Cord Guide X 2 8 PCB Spacer X 1 9 Wire Saddle X 1 10 Screw TP M3x6 X 5 1 Card Reader Mounting Plate front Unit X 1 2 Card Reader Mounting Plate rear Unit X 1 3 Card Reader Mounting Plate lower Unit X 1 4 Card Reader Relay Unit X 1 5 Connector Cover X 1 Use 4 of them F 9 197 ...

Page 1064: ...is equipment refer to Option Installation Combination List and install it After installing the Card Reader C1 Copy Card Reader F1 input the card number to be used in service mode on this equipment COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD otherwise the card cannot be recognized even though it is inserted 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Right Upper Cover will open simultaneously F 9 198 2 Open the Right Rear Cover...

Page 1065: ...re 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 200 5 Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 201 6 Remove the 2 screws and open the 2 grips x2 Grips F 9 202 ...

Page 1066: ...old the 2 grips and remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness F 9 203 8 Remove the 2 screws and the upper screw of Blanking Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1 Removed screw is used in the procedure 10 x3 Blanking Cover F 9 204 9 Remove the screw and remove the PCB Spacer Removed screw is used in the procedure 12 PCB Spacer F 9 205 ...

Page 1067: ... 10 Install the Card Reader Relay Unit 3 Screws screws removed in step 8 1 Connector x3 F 9 206 11 Install the connector of Card Reader External Relay Harness F 9 207 12 Install the Connector Cover 1 screw screw removed in step 9 CAUTION Install it in the position where the tie wrap of Card Reader External Relay Harness is inside the Connector Cover F 9 208 ...

Page 1068: ...nd install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 209 14 Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable 15 When the Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power...

Page 1069: ...arness through the Right Rear Cover 1 and install it 1 Screws RS tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw 1 Wire Saddle x3 Wire Saddle F 9 211 17 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover 18 Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit and change the position of the cable Copy Card Reader F1 only 1 Screws 19 Install the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit Lower Cover F 9 212...

Page 1070: ...Card Reader Unit Removed Jumper will not be used F 9 213 21 Install the Card Reader Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate front Unit 1 Toothed Washer 1 Screw RS tight M4X10 1 Wire saddle Toothed Washer Wire Saddle F 9 214 22 Remove the 2 Blanking Seal from the Reader Right Cover Blanking Seal F 9 215 23 Install the Card Reader Installation Plate rear to the host machine 2 Screws TP M4X12 x2 F 9 2...

Page 1071: ...rocedure 24 Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the connector of Card Reader Unit 1 Connector 1 Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Connector F 9 217 25 Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate front Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate rear 4 Screws TP M3X6 CAUTION Do not pinch the harness x4 F 9 218 26 Remove the 2 covers of Cord Guide 6 F 9 219 ...

Page 1072: ...ut it in the 2 places indicated in the figure 28 Remove the face seal and install the wire saddle Cord Guide Wire saddle F 9 220 29 Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the 2 places of Cord Guide and install the cover 30 Fix the Card Reader External Relay Harness with the Wire Saddle F 9 221 31 Connect the Power Plug into the outlet 32 Open the switch cover and turn ON the Main Power...

Page 1073: ...ue turn OFF ON the main power switch After that go through the procedure from step 2 2 Enter the following Service Mode 3 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD and enter the card number to be used 1 to 2001 Input the minimum card number to be used by a user 1000 cards from the inputted number can be used 4 To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the main power switch 5 Insert the card with the regis...

Page 1074: ...J1 Turning OFF the host machine Installation Copy Tray J1 Turning OFF the host machine Copy Tray J1 Checking the contents 1 Copy Tray x 1 Turning OFF the host machine Refer to the host machine installation Turning OFF the main power F 9 222 ...

Page 1075: ...Tray J1 Installation procedure Installation procedure 1 Remove the Right Delivery Frame Cover with flat blade screwdriver 2 Claws x2 claw F 9 223 2 Install the Copy Tray 2 Claws F 9 224 3 Connect the Power Plug into the outlet 4 Open the switch cover and turn ON the Main Power Switch ...

Page 1076: ...t COPIER OPTION ACC OUT TRAY and register 1 3 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 4 Select Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings and check that Delivery Tray Settings menu is added 5 Select either tray B or C to copy and perform test copy 6 Check that the paper is output in the Copy Tray 7 Reset the tray in accordance with the user s request ...

Page 1077: ...ff the Main Power Switch Inner 2 way Tray F1 Checking the Contents 1 Inner 2way Tray X1 2 Insert pin X1 3 Screw TP M3X6 X1 4 Second Delivery Full Detection Lever X 1 Not used in this Installation procedure Turning Off the Main Power Switch Refer to Turning OFF the Main Power Switch in Main Unit Installation Procedure F 9 225 ...

Page 1078: ...machine 2 Turn over the Inner 2way Tray Support and install to the host machine 1 Screw TP M3x6 F 9 226 3 Insert the Inner 2way Tray to 2 slots of the Delivery Assembly and hook it to the slot of the Inner 2way Tray Support NOTE Insert the Inner 2way Tray to the slot of the Delivery Assembly and hook it to the Second Tray Support so that boss is inserted to the Inner Rear Cover 1 CAUTION Check tha...

Page 1079: ...nect the Power Plug into the outlet 6 Open the switch cover and turn ON the Main Power Switch Setting after installation 1 Service Mode 2 COPIER OPTION ACC IN TRAY and set 1 3 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 4 Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings and check that menu is added 5 Select copy to the Tray B and perform test copy 6 Check that a copy...

Page 1080: ... TypeB 512MB Turning OFF the Host Machine Additional Memory TypeB 512MB Checking the contents 1 Expansion RAM x 1 Pre Check 1 Check the memory capacity Service Mode COPIER DISAPLAY ACC STS RAM 2 Exit the service mode Turning OFF the Host Machine Refer to the host machine installation Turning OFF the main power F 9 229 ...

Page 1081: ...edure Installation Procedure 1 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 Claws Rubber Caps Rubber Caps F 9 230 2 If the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 231 3 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 232 4 If FAX is installed disconnect the FAX cable F 9 233 ...

Page 1082: ...dditional Memory TypeB 512MB Installation Procedure Installation Additional Memory TypeB 512MB Installation Procedure 5 Hold the grip and remove the Main Controller PCB 2 2 Screws x2 Grip F 9 234 6 Install the Expansion RAM F 9 235 ...

Page 1083: ... and install it with 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 2 is installed properly x2 Grip F 9 236 8 Install the removed cover and the cable Connect the FAX cable If the FAX is installed Install the Left Rear Sub Cover Install the Reader Communication Cable if the Reader is installed Install the Left Reader Cover 9 Connect the Po...

Page 1084: ...king after installation Installation Additional Memory TypeB 512MB Checking after installation Checking after installation 1 After adding the Expansion RAM check that the memory capacity is increased Service mode COPIER DISAPLAY ACC STS RAM 2 Exit the service mode ...

Page 1085: ...1 B2 When using with Serial Interface Kit K1 or Copy Control Interface Kit A1 install Serial Interface Kit K1 or Copy Control Interface Kit A1 beforehand The following Removing Main Controller PCB 1 there are 3 procedures based on the installation combination Expansion Bus F1 F2 IPSec Security Board B2 Wireless LAN Board B1 B2 Reference for installation Be sure to refer to To install Expansion Bus...

Page 1086: ... Checking the contents IPSec Board B Checking the contents Expansion Bus F1 F2 1 PCI Bus Expansion PCB X 1 5 PCI Riser Support Plate X 1 3 PCB Spacer X 3 Included with F2 only 2 Riser Support Plate 1 1 4 Screw TP M3 6 5 2 1 This is used when connecting the IPSec Board B2 2 2 out of 5 screws are used IPSec Board B2 3 Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate 1 2 Screw TP M3 6 2 1 IPSec PCB 1 CD Guides FCC IC In...

Page 1087: ...e contents Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Board B1 B2 1 Wireless LAN Board x 1 2 Bulk Head Unit x 1 7 Antenna for MFP x 1 12 Wireless LAN Board Support Plate x 1 11 Screws TP M3x6 x 5 8 Antenna Attachment Tape x 1 sheet 4 Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate x 1 5 Wireless LAN Support Plate x 1 3 PCI Expansion Support Plate x 1 9 Wireless LAN display Label x 1 10 Cord Guide L90 x 3 6 Wireless LAN Antenna Suppo...

Page 1088: ...F2 IPSec Board B2 Wireless LAN Board B1 B2 Installation Procedure Turning the Host Machine OFF Be sure to keep the remaining of the 3 sheets of tape as it might be needed for later use CD Guides Users Manual Wireless LAN User Manual CD Sheet FCC IC UAS only Turning the Host Machine OFF Be sure to refer to How to Disconnect the Main Power in the Host Machine installation ...

Page 1089: ...ain Controller PCB 1 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open also the Right Delivery Unit in the same time F 9 240 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS Tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 Claw in 1 place Claw x3 F 9 241 4 If Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 1 Wire Saddle 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 2...

Page 1090: ...n Procedure Removing the Installation Expansion Bus F1 F2 IPSec Board B2 Wireless LAN Board B1 B2 Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Removing the 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 244 7 Hold the grip in 2 places remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness F 9 245 ...

Page 1091: ...1 Install the PCI Bus Expansion PCB in Riser Support Plate 2 Screws TP M3x6 in the Expansion Bus F1 contents x2 F 9 246 2 Remove the 3 screws of the Main Controller PCB 1 and install the 3 PCB Spacers 3 Screws removed screw will be used in step 3 x3 F 9 247 3 Install the PCI Bus Expansion PCB by inserting it to the connector of the Main Controller PCB 1 3 Screws screws removed in step 2 x3 F 9 248...

Page 1092: ...t stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grip x2 F 9 250 6 Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 7 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Re...

Page 1093: ...1 B2 Installation Procedure Installation Procedure To install the Expansion To install the Expansion Bus F1 F2 Cordless Wireless LAN Board B1 B2 and IPSec Board in the same time CAUTION Points to note at installation Be sure not to install incorrect Wireless LAN Support Plate F 9 252 CAUTION Points to note at installation For the Bulk Head Unit be sure to install the flat surface of the terminal a...

Page 1094: ...e PCI Bus Expansion PCB in the Expansion Bus F1 contents in the PCI Expansion Support Plate 2 Screws TP M3x6 in the Expansion Bus F1 contents CAUTION Note when installing Be sure to install the PCI Bus Expansion PCB to come under A part of PCI Expansion Support Plate x2 PCI Bus Expansion PCB PCI Expansion Support Plate A F 9 255 3 Insert the Wireless LAN Board to the connector of the PCI Bus Expan...

Page 1095: ...e Installation Procedure To install the Expansion 5 Remove the 3 screws of the Main Controller PCB 1 and install the 3 PCB Spacers in the PCI Bus Expansion Kit Content 3 Screws the removed screws will be used in step 6 x3 F 9 258 6 Install the PCI Expansion Support Plate assembled at step 3 in the Main Controller PCB 1 3 Screws use the screws removed in step 5 CAUTION Do not tuck the Fan Cable whe...

Page 1096: ...ss LAN Support Plate assembled in step 1 in the Main Controller PCB 1 2 Screws use the screws removed in step 4 2 Screws TP M3x6 in the Wireless LAN Board B1 Contents CAUTION Do not tuck the Fan Cable when tightening the screw of Wireless LAN Support Plate x4 F 9 260 8 Insert the terminal of Bulk Head Unit into the indicated position NOTE Make sure that the terminal is securely settled F 9 261 NOT...

Page 1097: ...f the IPSec Security PCB Removed plate is not used anymore 2 Screws Removed screws will be used in step 10 x2 F 9 262 10 Turn the IPSec Security PCB in the IPSec Board B2 contents upside down and install the Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate in the Wireless LAN Board content 2 Screws use the screws removed in step 9 IPSec Security PCB Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate x2 F 9 263 11 Install the IPSec Securit...

Page 1098: ... until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grip x2 F 9 265 13 Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 14 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part B...

Page 1099: ...nna Tape in MFP Antenna and affix it in the Reader CAUTION Points to note at installation To prevent the MFP Antenna from being caught by ADF put it within 60mm from the back side Make sure that A part overlaps with B line 60mm MFP Antenna Antenna Tape A B F 9 267 19 Remove the cover of the 3 Cord Guide F 9 268 CAUTION Points to note at installation Be sure to affix the Cord Guide 25 mm from the R...

Page 1100: ...tion Procedure To install the Expansion 21 Pass the MFP Antenna Cable to the Cord Guide and install the Cord Guide Cover F 9 271 22 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 insert the connector of MFP Antenna to the terminal of the Main Controller PCB 1 1 Wire Saddle Right Rear Cover 1 Wire saddle Connector F 9 272 NOTE Be sure that the slack of the MFP Antenna Cable is in the backside lower part of the Host M...

Page 1101: ...ady been installed 1 Insert the Power Plug in the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Settings Reristration Preference Network Confirm Network Connection Set Changes turn it ON 4 Settings Reristration Preference Network and select TCP IP Settings 5 Be sure that IPSec Settings is displayed When Wireless LAN Board has been already installed 1 Insert the Power Plug in the outlet 2 Turn ON the ma...

Page 1102: ...ng the 4 adjusters on it with a screwdriver 4 When moving the machine be sure to push the position indicated in the figure CAUTION Be sure not to push the upper side of the machine strongly from the front side otherwise it can fall over Especially in the case of the carpet floor Front Front F 9 275 5 Remove the rubber cap and screw 6 Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw that has...

Page 1103: ...r CASE 8 described in HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C Series Installation Procedure included in HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 C7 C1 CASE 1 C7 CASE 8 TYPE 5 2 Option HDDs 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit p 9 208 to p 9 231 TYPE 6 Standard HDD HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit p 9 232 to p 9 251 TYPE 7 Option HDD 250GB HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit p 9 252 ...

Page 1104: ...cking the Contents TYPE 1 Option HDD 250GB Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list will not be used 1 HDD Support Pate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Vibration prevention Dumper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 5 Screw W sems M3x14 x 4 CD GUIDS Notice for FCC IC China RoHS Notice 3 F 9 277 ...

Page 1105: ...s 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication s...

Page 1106: ...ence only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure 1 Procedure to make a backup...

Page 1107: ...cation to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With regard to the license there is a ne...

Page 1108: ... as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of Use...

Page 1109: ... not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog ...

Page 1110: ...HDD HDD Support Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 278 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Make sure that A part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector A Connector Label F 9 279 2 Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below CAUTION Be sure to place the gaske...

Page 1111: ... 4 Open the HDD Lid behind the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw F 9 282 5 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 283 6 Put the Signal Cable and the Power Cable aside so that thay are not pinched between the Controller Box and the HDD Unit F 9 284 7 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 screws x2 F 9 285 ...

Page 1112: ...D Unit Removed HDD 80GB will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 9 x2 F 9 286 9 Install the Option HDD 250GB 2 screws The screw removed in step 8 x2 F 9 287 10 Install the HDD Unit to the host machine 11 Install the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the Option HDD 12 Close the HDD Lid 13 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 14 Close the Right Lower Cover 15 Close the Right Upper Cove...

Page 1113: ...ad mode safe mode 3 Selecting the System Software 1 Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set and click search 5 Click REGISTER 6 Click OK 4 Downloading the System Software 1 Click CONNECT 2 From the list of machine series select the appropriate mod...

Page 1114: ... will not be used 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper x 2 2 HDD Handle x 2 3 HDD Connector Plate x 2 8 HDD Lock Plate Shaft x 2 4 HDD Cover x 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate x 1 6 HDD Door Guide x 1 7 HDD Lock Plate x 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer x 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label x 1 11 Connector Fixing Block x 2 12 Conversion Connector x 2 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red x 1 FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig 14 IV Cable x 1 FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 ...

Page 1115: ...el x 1 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet Installation Procedure Removing the HDD Unit Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Rig...

Page 1116: ... Supply 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 292 5 Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 293 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 294 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the...

Page 1117: ...D Kit Installation Procedure Removing the HDD Unit Signal Cable and Power Supply 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 296 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 297 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 298 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 299 ...

Page 1118: ...en the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 300 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 301 13 Remove the Controller Cover 11 screws loosen F 9 302 14 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retaine...

Page 1119: ...screw will not be used F 9 304 16 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable 2 dege saddles 5 wire saddles 2 connectors NOTE Removed Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used Connectors Edge Saddl Signal Cable Power Cable Edge Saddle Wire Saddle Wire Saddles x2 x7 F 9 305 17 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 screws Removed screw will not be used x2 F 9 306 18 Re...

Page 1120: ...ew are the ones removed in step 1 4 screws x4 HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate F 9 309 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD Screw hole Screw h...

Page 1121: ...nversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 312 5 Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order Otherwise the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly x2 Hole Boss F 9 313 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to...

Page 1122: ... end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw F 9 315 7 Install the HDD Handle 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 316 8 Affix the HDD No 1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 9 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for rec...

Page 1123: ...vable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD 10 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 claws Claws x2 F 9 318 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 319 11 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 320 ...

Page 1124: ...screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Holes Bosses F 9 321 13 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 18 x2 F 9 322 14 Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up remove the lower Drawer Cable Slot 2 2 screws 2 sprin...

Page 1125: ...Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD 15 Remove the Drawer Cable 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 16 x2 F 9 324 16 Install the IV Cable FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 2 screws screw removed in step 15 x2 F 9 325 17 Install the IV Cable FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 of HDD Drawer Unit 2 screws 2 springs 2 washers Use the parts removed in step 14 Washer Spring Screw IV Cable ...

Page 1126: ...tion Procedure Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD 18 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 screws screw removed in step 13 x2 F 9 327 19 Fix the cable of the Drawer Unit 3 wire saddles NOTE Close the A part of unused wire saddle and edge saddle Short Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used Fix the unused Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the wire saddle A A Wire saddles x3 F 9 328 ...

Page 1127: ...1 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 2 connectors 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Connectors x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable F 9 329 21 Install the Controller Cover CAUTION Be sure that the gaskets on left right side of the Controller Cover are not protruded 22 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 left side 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw...

Page 1128: ...propriate language on the Right Rear Cover 1 F 9 332 27 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover Left Rear Sub Cover Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 28 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install th...

Page 1129: ...f Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 334 30 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 31 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 32 Insert the power plug into ...

Page 1130: ...cking the Contents Option HDD 250GB TYPE 3 Option HDD 250GB Removable HDD Kit Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list will not be used Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Pate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Vibration prevention Dumper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 5 Screw W sems M3x14 x 4 CD GUIDS Notice for FCC IC China RoHS Notice 3 F 9 335 ...

Page 1131: ...ft Stopper x 2 2 HDD Handle x 2 3 HDD Connector Plate x 2 8 HDD Lock Plate Shaft x 2 4 HDD Cover x 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate x 1 6 HDD Door Guide x 1 7 HDD Lock Plate x 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer x 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label x 1 11 Connector Fixing Block x 2 12 Conversion Connector x 2 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red x 1 FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig 14 IV Cable x 1 FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 15 Power Cable 650...

Page 1132: ...vable HDD Kit Checking the Contents Removable HDD Kit Installation TYPE 3 Option HDD 250GB Removable HDD Kit Checking the Contents Removable HDD Kit 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 x 9 18 Screw P Tight M3x8 x 4 19 R HDD Label x 1 F 9 337 ...

Page 1133: ...e Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user...

Page 1134: ...p of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure 1 Procedu...

Page 1135: ...ndow specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With regard to the li...

Page 1136: ...assword registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file and click Sa...

Page 1137: ...he backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password...

Page 1138: ...Cable and Power Supply Cable 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 338 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 339 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 340 ...

Page 1139: ... Kit Installation Procedure Removing the HDD Unit Signal Cable and Power S 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 342 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 343 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 344 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 345 ...

Page 1140: ...cedure Removing the HDD Unit Signal Cable and Power S 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 346 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 347 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 348 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Ha...

Page 1141: ...emove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 351 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 scrwe Removed screw will not be used F 9 352 16 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 2 connectors NOTE Removed Signal Cable and...

Page 1142: ...HDD Unit Signal Cable and Power S Installation TYPE 3 Option HDD 250GB Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Removing the HDD Unit Signal Cable and Power S 17 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below Removed HDD unit will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will not be used x2 F 9 354 ...

Page 1143: ...t Installation Procedure Installing the Removable HDD Kit Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 claws Claws x2 F 9 355 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 356 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 357 ...

Page 1144: ...TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Holes Bosses F 9 358 4 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 9 x2 F 9 359 5 Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up remove the lower Drawer Cable Slot 2 2 screws 2 springs 2 wash...

Page 1145: ...it 6 Remove the Drawer Cable 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 7 x2 F 9 361 7 Install the IV Cable FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 2 screws screw removed in step 6 x2 F 9 362 8 Install the IV Cable FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 of HDD Drawer Unit 2 screws 2 springs 2 washers Use the parts removed in step 5 Washer Spring Screw IV Cable x2 F 9 363 9 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 scre...

Page 1146: ...nused wire saddle and edge saddle Short Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used Fix the unused Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the wire saddle A A Wire saddles x3 F 9 365 c 11 Install the IV Cable FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 2 connectors 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Connectors x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable F 9 366 12 Insta...

Page 1147: ...washer M3x14 enclosed with option HDD x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 367 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate opposite direction compared...

Page 1148: ...ise the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly x2 Hole Boss F 9 371 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 372 5 Install the HDD Cover 1 claw 1 screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to u...

Page 1149: ... serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX F 9 375 9 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 left side 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 376 10 Install the HDD to Slot 2 right side F 9 377 11 Close the...

Page 1150: ...in Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 379 16 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector...

Page 1151: ... machine in download mode safe mode 3 Selecting the System Software 1 Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set and click search 5 Click REGISTER 6 Click OK 4 Downloading the System Software 1 Click CONNECT 2 From the list of machine series select t...

Page 1152: ...been Installed A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list will no...

Page 1153: ... Blue x 1 FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 5 Power Cable 80mm x 2 FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 7 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow 14 Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 1 LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin x 1 FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 2 STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0842 or A STS Sig 8 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 9 Signal...

Page 1154: ... Saddle x 1 20 Screw TP M3x6 x 10 19 HDD Connection Plate x 1 16 LED Board Large x 1 FK2 8324 or A LED 17 LED Label Small x 1 18 LED Label Large x 1 24 Wire saddle Middle x 1 25 Ring Core x 1 22 Wire saddle Small x 5 CD Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation Notice for FCC IC China RoHS Notice 3 CD Guides of HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring ...

Page 1155: ... stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local...

Page 1156: ...l MEAP T 9 13 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Inst...

Page 1157: ... the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this fun...

Page 1158: ...gin with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location t...

Page 1159: ... settings of the machine the backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system adm...

Page 1160: ... prevention Dumpers 4 spacers 4 screws binding with flat washer M3x14 x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 384 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Make sure that A part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector A Connector Label F 9 385 2 Affix the ...

Page 1161: ...HDD Unit 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 387 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 388 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 389 5 Remove the USB Cab...

Page 1162: ...DD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 391 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 392 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 393 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 394 ...

Page 1163: ...DD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 395 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 396 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 397 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 ...

Page 1164: ...al Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 400 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 scrwe Removed screw will not be used F 9 401 16 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable Removed cables will not be used 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 2 connectors NOTE Remove...

Page 1165: ...t or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure 17 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 screws x2 F 9 403 18 Install the assembled Option HDD to the removed HDD Unit 2 screws TP M3x6 x2 F 9 404 19 Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit 4 screws TP M3x6 enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit x4 F 9 405 20 Install the HDD Unit to the hos...

Page 1166: ... the edge saddle Edge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 407 3 Install the LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle 1 cable guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area of the...

Page 1167: ... slot 4 screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Be sure that the direction of installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board is opposite to the case when the Removable HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board CHB CHA Direction of the HDD Slot x4 F 9 409 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430...

Page 1168: ...the cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected pr...

Page 1169: ...d or Encryption Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Power Cable F 9 413 7 Install the Signal Cable 80mm Red FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to CHA on the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x2 Signal Ccable Power Ca...

Page 1170: ...ryption Board x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 416 10 Install the Signal Cable 80mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to the second HDD Slot 2 CAUTION Install the cables to correct positions x2 Signal Cable Ppower Cable F 9 417 11 Fix the cables with the wire saddle Wire Saddle F 9 418 CAUTION Be sure to place the tags on the Power Supply Cable in the pos...

Page 1171: ...Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 15 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 420 16 If Reader is installed ins...

Page 1172: ...rd HDD Option HDD 80GB HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure 18 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label F 9 422 19 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 20 Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine ...

Page 1173: ...ART 4 Execute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in s...

Page 1174: ...procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work Only when installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the...

Page 1175: ... Installed A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list will not be...

Page 1176: ... Blue x 1 FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 5 Power Cable 80mm x 2 FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 7 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow 14 Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 1 LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin x 1 FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 2 STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0842 or A STS Sig 8 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 9 Signal...

Page 1177: ... Saddle x 1 20 Screw TP M3x6 x 10 19 HDD Connection Plate x 1 16 LED Board Large x 1 FK2 8324 or A LED 17 LED Label Small x 1 18 LED Label Large x 1 24 Wire saddle Middle x 1 25 Ring Core x 1 22 Wire saddle Small x 5 CD Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation Notice for FCC IC China RoHS Notice 3 CD Guides of HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring ...

Page 1178: ...ata stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Lo...

Page 1179: ...ual MEAP T 9 15 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the In...

Page 1180: ...ing the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this ...

Page 1181: ...Login with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location...

Page 1182: ...the settings of the machine the backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system ...

Page 1183: ...ers 4 screws binding with flat washer M3x14 x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 426 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Make sure that A part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector A Connector Label F 9 427 2 Affix the gasket to the place shown ...

Page 1184: ...HDD Unit 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 429 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 430 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 431 5 Remove the USB Cab...

Page 1185: ...ing Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 433 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 434 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 435 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 436 ...

Page 1186: ...ncryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 437 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 438 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 439 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 ...

Page 1187: ... Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 442 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 scrwe Removed screw will not be used F 9 443 16 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 2 connectors NOTE Removed Signal Cable a...

Page 1188: ...lation Procedure Removing 17 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 screws x2 F 9 445 18 Remove the HDD 80GB installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit Removed HDD 80GB will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 19 x2 F 9 446 19 Install the Option HDD 250GB 2 screws The screw removed in step 18 x2 F 9 447 20 Install the other Option HDD 250GB 2 scre...

Page 1189: ...on Procedure Removing Installation TYPE 5 2 Option HDDs 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing 21 Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit 4 screws TP M3x6 enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit x4 F 9 449 22 Install the HDD Unit to the host machine ...

Page 1190: ...s and the edge saddle Edge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 451 3 Install the LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle 1 cable guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area o...

Page 1191: ...e HDD slot 4 screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Be sure that the direction of installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board is opposite to the case when the Removable HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board CHB CHA Direction of the HDD Slot x4 F 9 453 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cabl...

Page 1192: ...tall the cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connect...

Page 1193: ... Board or Encryption Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Power Cable F 9 457 7 Install the Signal Cable 80mm Red FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to CHA on the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x2 Signal Ccable Pow...

Page 1194: ...r Encryption Board x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 460 10 Install the Signal Cable 80mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to the second HDD Slot 2 CAUTION Install the cables to correct positions x2 Signal Cable Ppower Cable F 9 461 11 Fix the cables with the wire saddle Wire Saddle F 9 462 CAUTION Be sure to place the tags on the Power Supply Cable in th...

Page 1195: ...lled Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 15 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 464 16 If Reader is installe...

Page 1196: ...ure Installing th Installation TYPE 5 2 Option HDDs 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Installing th 18 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label F 9 466 19 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover ...

Page 1197: ... 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mode Checking the...

Page 1198: ...the host machine The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work Only when installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit When you have completed all installation work report to the system adminis...

Page 1199: ...not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list will not be used HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 6 Signal Cable 450mm Red x 1 FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig 3 Signal Cable 80mm Red x 1 FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 Signal Cable 80mm Blue x 1 FK2 8438 or A HDD Si...

Page 1200: ...nection Plate x 1 16 LED Board Large x 1 FK2 8324 or A LED 17 LED Label Small x 1 18 LED Label Large x 1 24 Wire saddle Middle x 1 25 Ring Core x 1 22 Wire saddle Small x 5 14 Encryption Board x 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 11 Power Cable 320mm x 1 FK2 8467 or A HDD Pow1 12 LED Cable 290mm 7 pin x 1 FM4 0840 or A LED Sig 15 LED Board Small x 1 FK2 7400 or A LED C...

Page 1201: ... Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authent...

Page 1202: ...king a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedu...

Page 1203: ...ns on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With rega...

Page 1204: ...r name and password registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file ...

Page 1205: ...he machine the backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID ...

Page 1206: ...able and Power Supply Cable 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 469 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 470 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 471 5...

Page 1207: ...on Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing the Signal Cable and Power S 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 473 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 474 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 475 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 476 ...

Page 1208: ...allation Procedure Removing the Signal Cable and Power S 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 477 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 478 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 479 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3...

Page 1209: ...4 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 482 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 screw Removed screw will not be used F 9 483 16 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 2 connectors NOTE Removed Signal Cable ...

Page 1210: ...addles F 9 486 3 Install the LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle 1 cable guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area of the LED cable from being slacked off w...

Page 1211: ...ws TP M3x6 CAUTION Be sure that the direction of installing the Encryption Board is opposite to the case when the Removable HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board CHB CHA Direction of the HDD Slot x4 F 9 488 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow STS C...

Page 1212: ...nstall the cables to the Encryption Board Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly Power...

Page 1213: ...wn below Keep Slot 2 in the condition where no HDD is installed and only connect the cables Connect Slot 1 to CHA Connect Slot 2 to CHB Slot 2 Blank Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Power Cable F 9 492 7 Install the Signal Cable 80mm Red FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to CHA on the Encryption Board x2 Signal Ccable Power...

Page 1214: ...e Encryption Board x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 495 10 Place the Signal Cable 80mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to the empty space of the second HDD Slot 2 Signal Cable Ppower Cable F 9 496 11 Fix the cables with the wire saddle Wire Saddle F 9 497 CAUTION Be sure to place the tags on the Power Supply Cable in the position where it is beyond the ...

Page 1215: ...t Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 15 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 499 16 If Reader is installed instal...

Page 1216: ... Encryption Board Installation TYPE 6 Standard HDD HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installing the LED Board Installing the Encryption Board 18 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label F 9 501 19 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover ...

Page 1217: ...he power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mode Checking the Security Version 1 Press ...

Page 1218: ...ly detect the problem and request servicing work when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Maintenance of the Security Functions Ask the system administrator to check the...

Page 1219: ... is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list will not be used Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD ...

Page 1220: ...e x 1 FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 5 Power Cable 80mm x 2 FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 7 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow 14 Encryption Board x 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 1 LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin x 1 FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 2 STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0842 or A STS Sig 8 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red x 1 FK...

Page 1221: ...ntents HDD Data Encryption Mirroring 23 Wire saddle Large x 1 21 Edge Saddle x 1 20 Screw TP M3x6 x 10 19 HDD Connection Plate x 1 16 LED Board Large x 1 FK2 8324 or A LED 17 LED Label Small x 1 18 LED Label Large x 1 24 Wire saddle Middle x 1 25 Ring Core x 1 22 Wire saddle Small x 5 CD Guide HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit User Documentation HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice Installation Procedur...

Page 1222: ...Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Aut...

Page 1223: ...9 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Pro...

Page 1224: ...ctions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With ...

Page 1225: ... user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the f...

Page 1226: ...of the machine the backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator...

Page 1227: ...Pate 4 Dust prevention Dumpers 4 spacers 4 screws binding with flat washer M3x14 x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 505 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Make sure that A part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector A Connector Label F 9 506 2...

Page 1228: ... HDD Unit 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 508 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 509 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 510 5 Remove the USB Ca...

Page 1229: ...yption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing and Installing the HDD U 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 512 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 513 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 514 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 515 ...

Page 1230: ...Installation Procedure Removing and Installing the HDD U 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 516 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 517 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 518 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3...

Page 1231: ...4 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 521 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 screw Removed screw will not be used F 9 522 16 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 2 connectors NOTE Removed Signal Cable ...

Page 1232: ...ation Procedure Removing and Installing the HDD U 17 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 screws x2 F 9 524 18 Remove the HDD 80GB installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit Removed HDD 80GB will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 19 x2 F 9 525 19 Install the Option HDD 250GB 2 screws The screw removed in step 18 x2 F 9 526 20 Install the HDD U...

Page 1233: ...re Saddles F 9 528 3 Install the LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle 1 cable guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area of the LED cable from being slacked o...

Page 1234: ...screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Be sure that the direction of installing the Encryption Board is opposite to the case when the Removable HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board CHB CHA Direction of the HDD Slot x4 F 9 530 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow S...

Page 1235: ... 5 Install the cables to the Encryption Board Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly P...

Page 1236: ... shown below Keep Slot 2 in the condition where no HDD is installed and only connect the cables Connect Slot 1 to CHA Connect Slot 2 to CHB Slot 2 Blank Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Power Cable F 9 534 7 Install the Signal Cable 80mm Red FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to CHA on the Encryption Board x2 Signal Ccable P...

Page 1237: ...n the Encryption Board x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 537 10 Place the Signal Cable 80mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to the empty space of the second HDD Slot 2 Signal Cable Ppower Cable F 9 538 11 Fix the cables with the wire saddle Wire Saddle F 9 539 CAUTION Be sure to place the tags on the Power Supply Cable in the position where it is beyond ...

Page 1238: ... Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 15 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 541 16 If Reader is installed in...

Page 1239: ... Encryption Board Installation TYPE 7 Option HDD 250GB HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installing the LED Board Installing the Encryption Board 18 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label F 9 543 19 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover ...

Page 1240: ...en the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mode Checking the Security Version 1 Pr...

Page 1241: ...iately detect the problem and request servicing work when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Maintenance of the Security Functions Ask the system administrator to check...

Page 1242: ... has been Installed A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list wi...

Page 1243: ...movable HDD Kit 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper x 2 2 HDD Handle x 2 3 HDD Connector Plate x 2 8 HDD Lock Plate Shaft x 2 4 HDD Cover x 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate x 1 6 HDD Door Guide x 1 7 HDD Lock Plate x 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer x 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label x 1 11 Connector Fixing Block x 2 12 Conversion Connector x 2 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red x 1 FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig 14 IV Cable x 1 FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A ...

Page 1244: ...DD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation TYPE 8 Standard HDD Option HDD 80GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 x 9 18 Screw P Tight M3x8 x 4 19 R HDD Label x 1 F 9 546 ...

Page 1245: ...e x 1 FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 5 Power Cable 80mm x 2 FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 7 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow 14 Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 1 LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin x 1 FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 2 STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0842 or A STS Sig 8 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 9 Signal Cab...

Page 1246: ...addle x 1 20 Screw TP M3x6 x 10 19 HDD Connection Plate x 1 16 LED Board Large x 1 FK2 8324 or A LED 17 LED Label Small x 1 18 LED Label Large x 1 24 Wire saddle Middle x 1 25 Ring Core x 1 22 Wire saddle Small x 5 CD Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation Notice for FCC IC China RoHS Notice 3 CD Guides of HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Ki...

Page 1247: ...red in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Dev...

Page 1248: ...AP T 9 21 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installa...

Page 1249: ...e instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this functi...

Page 1250: ...with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to sa...

Page 1251: ...ttings of the machine the backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system admini...

Page 1252: ...gnal Cable and Power Supply Cable 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 549 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 550 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9...

Page 1253: ...emovable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Install 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 553 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 554 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 555 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 556 ...

Page 1254: ...Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Install 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 557 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 558 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 559 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit ...

Page 1255: ...er 11 screws loosen F 9 561 14 Remove the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x1 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 562 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 screw Removed screw will not be used F 9 563 16 Remove the Power Cable 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 1 connectors NOTE Removed Power ...

Page 1256: ...cryption Mirroring Kit Install 17 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 screws Removed screw will not be used x2 F 9 565 18 Remove the HDD 80GB installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit The removed HDD Fixation Plate and the screws will not be used The HDD 80GB installed as standard will be used in Disassembling Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Ho...

Page 1257: ...vable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 claws Claws x2 F 9 567 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 568 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 569 ...

Page 1258: ...yption Mirroring Kit 3 Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer 1 screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Holes Bosses F 9 570 4 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 5 x2 F 9 571 5 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 screws Removed ...

Page 1259: ... the HDD Support Plate Use the HDD and screws removed in previous step 4 screws x4 HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate F 9 574 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate opposite direction compare...

Page 1260: ...ning between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 577 5 Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order Otherwise the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly x2 Hole Boss F 9 578 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening th...

Page 1261: ...ON Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw F 9 580 7 Install the HDD Handle 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 581 8 Affix the HDD No 1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 9 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the numb...

Page 1262: ...with removable HDD Kit 4 Vibration prevention Dumpers enclosed with option HDD 4 spacers enclosed with option HDD 4 screws binding with flat washer M3x14 enclosed with option HDD x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 584 CAUTION Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate opposite ...

Page 1263: ... the Conversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 587 4 Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order Otherwise the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly x2 Hole Boss F 9 588 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be ...

Page 1264: ...nd end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw F 9 590 6 Install the HDD Handle 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 591 7 Affix the HDD No 2 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the ar...

Page 1265: ...edge saddle Edge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 595 3 Install the LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle 1 cable guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area of the LED ...

Page 1266: ... M3x6 CAUTION Be sure that the direction of installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board is opposite to the case when the fixed HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 597 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Power Cable 650 mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD K...

Page 1267: ...r are not protruded 5 Install the 2 wire saddles F 9 599 6 Install the cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Signal cable existing cable FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig Power sable 650mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit LED cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable an...

Page 1268: ...t or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 7 Fix the cables 7 wire saddles 2 edge saddles Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Edge Saddle x9 F 9 601 CAUTION When fixing the cables with wire saddles be sure to take up slack of them at A part and slack off them at B part If slacking off the cables at A part they may interefer the fan on the host machine when returing the Controller Box Wi...

Page 1269: ... next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH A CH B Power Cable Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable F 9 603 8 Install the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Power Cable from...

Page 1270: ...ver 1 included in the Removable HDD Kit F 9 605 11 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover Left Rear Sub Cover Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 112 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 ...

Page 1271: ...e NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 607 14 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 15 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label F 9 608 16 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Lowe...

Page 1272: ...TART 4 Execute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in ...

Page 1273: ...oing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work Only when installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following A...

Page 1274: ...has been Installed A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list wil...

Page 1275: ...e Removable HDD Kit 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper x 2 2 HDD Handle x 2 3 HDD Connector Plate x 2 8 HDD Lock Plate Shaft x 2 4 HDD Cover x 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate x 1 6 HDD Door Guide x 1 7 HDD Lock Plate x 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer x 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label x 1 11 Connector Fixing Block x 2 12 Conversion Connector x 2 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red x 1 FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig 14 IV Cable x 1 FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow...

Page 1276: ...Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Installation TYPE 9 2 Option HDDs 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 x 9 18 Screw P Tight M3x8 x 4 19 R HDD Label x 1 F 9 611 ...

Page 1277: ... Blue x 1 FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 5 Power Cable 80mm x 2 FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 7 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow 14 Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 1 LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin x 1 FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 2 STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0842 or A STS Sig 8 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 9 Signal...

Page 1278: ... Saddle x 1 20 Screw TP M3x6 x 10 19 HDD Connection Plate x 1 16 LED Board Large x 1 FK2 8324 or A LED 17 LED Label Small x 1 18 LED Label Large x 1 24 Wire saddle Middle x 1 25 Ring Core x 1 22 Wire saddle Small x 5 CD Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation Notice for FCC IC China RoHS Notice 3 CD Guides of HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring ...

Page 1279: ... stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local...

Page 1280: ... MEAP T 9 23 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Insta...

Page 1281: ... the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this fun...

Page 1282: ...in with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to...

Page 1283: ... settings of the machine the backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system adm...

Page 1284: ...it Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 614 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 615 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddle...

Page 1285: ...HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation P 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 618 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 619 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 620 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 621 ...

Page 1286: ... Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation P 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 622 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 623 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 624 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3...

Page 1287: ... 11 screws loosen F 9 626 14 Remove the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x1 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 627 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 screw Removed screw will not be used F 9 628 16 Remove the Power Cable 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 1 connectors NOTE Removed Power Ca...

Page 1288: ...tion Mirroring Kit Installation P Installation TYPE 9 2 Option HDDs 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation P 17 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below Removed HDD unit will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will not be used x2 F 9 630 ...

Page 1289: ... Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation P Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 claws Claws x2 F 9 631 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 632 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 633 ...

Page 1290: ...rroring Kit Installation P 3 Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer 1 screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Holes Bosses F 9 634 4 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 5 x2 F 9 635 5 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 screws Re...

Page 1291: ...sed with option HDD 4 spacers enclosed with option HDD 4 screws binding with flat washer M3x14 enclosed with option HDD x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 637 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the position where the HDD connector is p...

Page 1292: ...een the Conversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 640 4 Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order Otherwise the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly x2 Hole Boss F 9 641 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws ...

Page 1293: ...re to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw F 9 643 6 Install the HDD Handle 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 644 7 Affix the HDD No 1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and a...

Page 1294: ...sed with option HDD 4 spacers enclosed with option HDD 4 screws binding with flat washer M3x14 enclosed with option HDD x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 647 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the position where the HDD connector is p...

Page 1295: ...een the Conversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 650 4 Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order Otherwise the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly x2 Hole Boss F 9 651 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws ...

Page 1296: ...round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw F 9 653 6 Install the HDD Handle 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 654 7 Affix the HDD No 2 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the...

Page 1297: ...d the edge saddle Edge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 658 3 Install the LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle 1 cable guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area of th...

Page 1298: ...ews TP M3x6 CAUTION Be sure that the direction of installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board is opposite to the case when the fixed HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 660 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Power Cable 650 mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable...

Page 1299: ...r Cover are not protruded 5 Install the 2 wire saddles F 9 662 6 Install the cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Signal cable existing cable FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig Power sable 650mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit LED cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Ca...

Page 1300: ...Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation P 7 Fix the cables 7 wire saddles 2 edge saddles Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Edge Saddle x9 F 9 664 CAUTION When fixing the cables with wire saddles be sure to take up slack of them at A part and slack off them at B part If slacking off the cables at A part they may interefer the fan on the host machine when returing the Controller ...

Page 1301: ...ng the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH A CH B Power Cable Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable F 9 666 8 Install the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Power Cabl...

Page 1302: ...Rear Cover 1 included in the Removable HDD Kit F 9 668 11 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover Left Rear Sub Cover Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 12 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install ...

Page 1303: ... Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 670 14 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 15 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label ...

Page 1304: ...After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mode Checking the Se...

Page 1305: ...host machine The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work Only when installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrat...

Page 1306: ...attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list will not be used Removable HDD Kit 1 Hinge S...

Page 1307: ...HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Contents Removable HDD 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3 X 6 x 9 18 Screw P Tight M3 X 8 x 4 11 Connector Fixing Block x 2 12 Conversion Connector x 2 19 R HDD Label x 1 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red x 1 FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig 14 IV Cable x 1 FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 15 Power Cable 650mm x 1 FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow F 9 673 ...

Page 1308: ...e x 1 FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 5 Power Cable 80mm x 2 FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 7 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow 14 Encryption Board x 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 1 LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin x 1 FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 2 STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0842 or A STS Sig 8 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red x 1 FK...

Page 1309: ...Checking the Contents HDD Data Encry 23 Wire saddle Large x 1 21 Edge Saddle x 1 20 Screw TP M3x6 x 10 19 HDD Connection Plate x 1 16 LED Board Large x 1 FK2 8324 or A LED 17 LED Label Small x 1 18 LED Label Large x 1 24 Wire saddle Middle x 1 25 Ring Core x 1 22 Wire saddle Small x 5 CD Guide HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit User Documentation HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice Installation Procedur...

Page 1310: ... stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local...

Page 1311: ...l MEAP T 9 25 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Inst...

Page 1312: ...g the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this fu...

Page 1313: ...gin with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location t...

Page 1314: ...e settings of the machine the backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system ad...

Page 1315: ...le and Power Supply Cable 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 676 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 677 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 678 5 R...

Page 1316: ...t HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing the Sig 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 680 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 681 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 682 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 683 ...

Page 1317: ... Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing the Sig 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 684 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 685 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 686 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 H...

Page 1318: ...1 screws loosen F 9 688 14 Remove the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x1 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 689 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 screw Removed screw will not be used F 9 690 16 Remove the Power Cable 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 1 connectors NOTE Removed Power Cabl...

Page 1319: ...7 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 screws Removed screw will not be used x2 F 9 692 18 Remove the HDD 80GB installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit The removed HDD Fixation Plate and the screws will not be used The HDD 80GB installed as standard will be used in Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD step1 2 screws x2 F 9 693 Installing the Removable HDD ...

Page 1320: ...D Kit CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 695 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 696 3 Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer 1 screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Remov...

Page 1321: ...Removed screw will be used in step 5 x2 F 9 698 5 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 4 x2 F 9 699 Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD 1 Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate Use the installed HDD 80GB removed in Removing the Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable step 18 4 screws HDD HDD Support Plate x4 F 9 700 2 Install the HDD Connector Plate first ...

Page 1322: ...ole Connector Label F 9 702 If there is no gasket with the HDD removed from the host machine prepare the gasket with the following part number and perform step 3 KE8 1134 030 3 Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below CAUTION Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label free metal surface of the HDD surface Gasket HDD Connector side Screw hole F 9 703 4 Install the Conversi...

Page 1323: ...Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 706 6 Install the HDD Cover 1 claw 1 screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw F 9 707 7 Install the HDD Handle 2 screws TP round ...

Page 1324: ...Removable HDD Kit Assem 8 Affix the HDD No 1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 9 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX F 9 709 10 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 left side 2 screws TP round end M3x6 x2 F 9 710 11 Install the HDD to Slot 2 right side F 9 711 12...

Page 1325: ... Edge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 713 3 Install the LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle 1 cable guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area of the LED cable from ...

Page 1326: ...x6 CAUTION Be sure that the direction of installing the Encryption Board is opposite to the case when the fixed HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 715 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Power Cable 650 mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit STS Cable 550 mm Li...

Page 1327: ... Controller Cover are not protruded 5 Install the 2 wire saddles F 9 717 6 Install the cable to the Encryption Board Signal cable existing cable FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig Power sable 650mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit LED cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and t...

Page 1328: ...it Installing the LED Board Installing the En 7 Fix the cables 7 wire saddles 2 edge saddles Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Edge Saddle x9 F 9 719 CAUTION When fixing the cables with wire saddles be sure to take up slack of them at A part and slack off them at B part If slacking off the cables at A part they may interefer the fan on the host machine when returing the Controller...

Page 1329: ... next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption Board are shown below Keep Slot 1 in the condition where no HDD is installed and only connect the cables Connect Slot 1 to CHB Connect Slot 2 to CHA Power Cable Slot 2 HDD1 Slot 1 Blank CH A CH B Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Signal Cable Red F 9 721 8 Install the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Encryption Board Pow...

Page 1330: ... Rear Cover 1 included in the Removable HDD Kit F 9 723 11 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover Left Rear Sub Cover Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 12 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install...

Page 1331: ...f Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 725 14 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 15 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label...

Page 1332: ...r 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mode Checking the Securi...

Page 1333: ...rator can immediately detect the problem and request servicing work when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Maintenance of the Security Functions Ask the system adminis...

Page 1334: ...led A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents The parts with a gray in the contents list will not be used O...

Page 1335: ...vable HDD Kit 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper x 2 2 HDD Handle x 2 3 HDD Connector Plate x 2 8 HDD Lock Plate Shaft x 2 4 HDD Cover x 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate x 1 6 HDD Door Guide x 1 7 HDD Lock Plate x 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer x 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label x 1 11 Connector Fixing Block x 2 12 Conversion Connector x 2 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red x 1 FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig 14 IV Cable x 1 FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HD...

Page 1336: ...ncryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Contents Removab Installation TYPE 11 Option HDD 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Contents Removab 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 x 9 18 Screw P Tight M3x8 x 4 19 R HDD Label x 1 F 9 729 ...

Page 1337: ...x 1 FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 5 Power Cable 80mm x 2 FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 7 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow 14 Encryption Board x 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 1 LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin x 1 FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 2 STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 pin x 1 FM4 0842 or A STS Sig 8 Power Cable 430mm x 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red x 1 FK2 ...

Page 1338: ...Kit Checking the Contents HDD Data 23 Wire saddle Large x 1 21 Edge Saddle x 1 20 Screw TP M3x6 x 10 19 HDD Connection Plate x 1 16 LED Board Large x 1 FK2 8324 or A LED 17 LED Label Small x 1 18 LED Label Large x 1 24 Wire saddle Middle x 1 25 Ring Core x 1 22 Wire saddle Small x 5 CD Guide HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit User Documentation HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice Installation Procedure ...

Page 1339: ...tored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local D...

Page 1340: ...EAP T 9 27 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Install...

Page 1341: ...he instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this funct...

Page 1342: ... with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO H The default administrator user name and password are as follows User Name Administrator Password password 3 Click User Control 4 Put a checkmark to Select All and then click Export 5 Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click Start Export 6 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to s...

Page 1343: ...ettings of the machine the backup data may not be completely restored or some documents may be automatically printed Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine or documents that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system admin...

Page 1344: ...nd Power Supply Cable 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously F 9 732 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw x3 Claw F 9 733 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 734 5 Remov...

Page 1345: ...D Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing 6 Remove the 2 screws open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips F 9 736 7 Hold the 2 Grips and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1 approximately 10mm toward front F 9 737 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 claw F 9 738 9 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 739 ...

Page 1346: ...tion Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing 10 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 740 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 claw F 9 741 12 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 screws x2 Harness F 9 742 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harne...

Page 1347: ...rews loosen F 9 744 14 Remove the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles 1 cable retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x1 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 745 15 Open the HDD Lid 1 screw Removed screw will not be used F 9 746 16 Remove the Power Cable 2 edge saddles 5 wire saddles 1 connectors NOTE Removed Power Cable wi...

Page 1348: ...on TYPE 11 Option HDD 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installing the Removable HDD Kit 17 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below Removed HDD unit will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will not be used x2 F 9 748 Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 claws Claws x2 F 9 749 ...

Page 1349: ...e HDD Kit CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 750 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 751 3 Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer 1 screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the R...

Page 1350: ... x2 F 9 753 5 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 4 x2 F 9 754 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD 1 Purchase option HDD and assemble the second HDD 1 Option HDD enclosed with option HDD 1 HDD Support Plate enclosed with option HDD 1 HDD Connector Plate enclosed with removable HDD Kit 4 Vibration prevention Dumpers enclosed with option HDD 4 spacers enclose...

Page 1351: ...t Plate opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD Screw hole Screw hole Connector Label F 9 756 2 Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below CAUTION Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label free metal surface of the HDD surface Gasket HDD Connector side Screw hole F 9 757 3 Install the Conversion Connector CAUTION Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversi...

Page 1352: ...xation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 760 5 Install the HDD Cover 1 claw 1 screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw F 9 761 6 Install the HDD Handle 2 screws TP round en...

Page 1353: ...el to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX F 9 763 9 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 left side 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 764 10 Ins...

Page 1354: ...ddle Edge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 767 3 Install the LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 wire saddles 1 edge saddle 1 cable guide 1 connector CAUTION Be sure to allow extra cable at A area in the condition that the Controller Box is fully opened Be sure to tuck the B area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the B area This is to prevent the B area of the LED cable f...

Page 1355: ...CAUTION Be sure that the direction of installing the Encryption Board is opposite to the case when the fixed HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 769 2 Install the cables to the PCB on the backside Power Cable 650 mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit STS Cable 550 mm Light...

Page 1356: ...ntroller Cover are not protruded 5 Install the 2 wire saddles F 9 771 6 Install the cable to the Encryption Board Signal cable existing cable FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig Power sable 650mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit LED cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the ...

Page 1357: ...ng Kit Installing the LED Board Installing 7 Fix the cables 7 wire saddles 2 edge saddles Edge Saddle Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Edge Saddle x9 F 9 773 CAUTION When fixing the cables with wire saddles be sure to take up slack of them at A part and slack off them at B part If slacking off the cables at A part they may interefer the fan on the host machine when returing the Controller Bo...

Page 1358: ...xt procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption Board are shown below Keep Slot 1 in the condition where no HDD is installed and only connect the cables Connect Slot 1 to CHB Connect Slot 2 to CHA Power Cable Slot 2 HDD1 Slot 1 Blank CH A CH B Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Signal Cable Red F 9 775 8 Install the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Encryption Board Power ...

Page 1359: ...ar Cover 1 included in the Removable HDD Kit F 9 777 11 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover Left Rear Sub Cover Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable 12 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install th...

Page 1360: ...eader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles B A F 9 779 14 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 15 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1 Right Rear Cover 1 LED Label F ...

Page 1361: ...After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mode Checking the Se...

Page 1362: ...nistrator can immediately detect the problem and request servicing work when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Maintenance of the Security Functions Ask the system adm...

Page 1363: ...he Buffer Path simultaneously be sure to install this equipment first If the Inner Finisher or the Buffer Path is installed this equipment cannot be installed unless it is removed For details of installation procedure refer to the Service Manual Installation procedures for the USB Device Port E1 and USB Device Port E2 and USB Device Port E3 are similar Illustrations and photo for the Image Reader ...

Page 1364: ...ate X 1 12 DP Upper Cover Unit X 1 TP Round End M3 6 X 10 Use 5 of them Use 6 of them Do not use with the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 or Card Reader RS Tightening M3 8 5 X 1 F 9 784 15 Paper Feed Sheet P X 1 16 DP Mounting Plate P X 1 13 DP Lower Cover Unit X 1 22 DP Support Plate X 1 23 DP Cable Guide Unit X 1 24 DP Bottom Cover X 1 21 DP Mounting Plate B X 1 USB Device Port E2 Only USB Device Po...

Page 1365: ...Cover X 1 27 Wire Saddle Large X 1 28 Wire Saddle Small X 1 USB Device Port E3 Only CAUTION 11 May be used or not be used depending on the form of the Reader Front Cover 13 Included in the package as a unit in the case of USB Device Port E1 E2 only 25 26 27 28 DP Lower Cover Unit is divided into 4 parts and included in the package in the case of USB Device Port E3 only CD Guides FCC IC Instruction...

Page 1366: ...evice Port 1 Move the Control Panel in the arrow direction and open the DADF 2 Remove the Reader Left Cover in the arrow direction 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 2 Claws x2 x2 Claws F 9 788 F 9 789 3 Remove the Reader Right Cover in the arrow direction 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 2 Claws x2 x2 Claws 4 Move the Control Panel Base Cover in the arrow direction under the Control Panel 1 Screw F 9 790 F 9 791 ...

Page 1367: ...e Reader Unit B1 only x3 Flat Screw M4X6 6 Remove the Reader Front Cover 3 Bosses F 9 792 F 9 793 NOTE The Reader Front Cover may or may not have a cut off to attach the DP Mounting reinforcing Plate If it has a cut off it has a sheet affixed Remove the sheet if it has a cut off and install the DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate at step 10 If it does not have a cut off do not install the DP Mounting Re...

Page 1368: ...tion Procedure Installing the USB Device Port 7 Remove the sheet if it is attached to the Reader Front Cover The removed sheet will not be used 8 Remove one USB Cable and one harness from the guide F 9 795 F 9 796 9 Remove 2 screws using a stubby driver and move the Control panel Lower Cover x2 0 F 9 797 ...

Page 1369: ...cing Plate 1 Boss 1 Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 Boss 11 Route USB Cable and Harness through the hole of DP Support Plate 1 Wire Saddle 1 Edge Saddle Hole x2 Wire Saddle Edge Saddle F 9 798 F 9 799 12 Install the Reader Front Cover 3 Bosses 2 Screws 1 Screw Flat Screw M4x6 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 only CAUTION Do not catch the sheet with the Reader Front Cover シート F 9 800 13 Install the Rea...

Page 1370: ... only 16 Assemble the DP Base and the DB Base Cover 2 Bosses 4 Hooks NOTE Align 2 hooks A and bosses long holes to the DP Base and then insert them The installation will be difficult if the positioning holes for bosses are aligned first Hook A Hook Boss Hook Hook A F 9 801 17 Install the Wire Saddle Small to the DP Lower Cover Unit which was assembled in the previous step Wire Saddle Small F 9 802...

Page 1371: ...e Port 18 Install the DP Support Plate and the DP Mounting Plate P to the DP Lower Cover Unit 2 Bosses each 2 Screws Binding M4x6 each Boss x4 DP Mounting Plate P DP Support Plate Boss F 9 803 19 Install the DP Board 3 Screws TP Round End M3x6 x3 20 Insert the USB Cable and Harness through the hole of the DP Support Plate Hole F 9 804 F 9 805 ...

Page 1372: ...Reader Unit B1 B2 Be sure to tighten the 2 screws TP M3x6 on the DP Support Plate first When the DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate is installed 2 Bosses 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 2 Screws Binding M4x6 x4 x4 Boss Boss Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 Color Image Reader Unit B1 B2 F 9 806 When the DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate is not inst...

Page 1373: ... 22 Return the Control Panel Lower Cover to its original position 2 Screws x2 23 Route the USB Cable and Harness through the hole of DP Lower Cover Unit from bottom to top and install the included USB Cable as shown if the figure x2 Hole F 9 808 F 9 809 24 Secure the USB Cable as shown in the figure 1 Wire Saddle Do not close the Wire Saddle F 9 810 ...

Page 1374: ...er make sure that the Harness is not protruding from the DP Lower Cover Unit to prevent the cable from being trapped F 9 811 F 9 812 26 Peel the release paper for the Paper Feed Sheet P to A area and affix to the DP Bottom Cover as shown in the figure NOTE When affixing it be sure to align it with the marking lines and push the B part against the C part Be sure that the Paper Feed Sheet P is on th...

Page 1375: ...29 Insert the protrusion of the DP Bottom Cover and attach the DP Bottom Cover while remove the remaining release paper from Paper Feed Sheet P 4 Claws CAUTION Be sure that the A part is inserted into the Control Panel Unit Be careful not to trap cables with the B part Be careful not to trap the harness and the USB Cable with the DP Lower Cover and the DP Bottom Cover Make sure that the Paper Feed...

Page 1376: ...er A2 simultaneously be sure to refer to step 3 and later of Installing the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 before installing the DP Upper Cover 31 Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 Protrusion 2 Hooks 2 Claws CAUTION Be careful not to trap cables x2 Claw Claw Protrusion Hook NOTE When installing the Card Reader sales company s option simultaneously be sure to refer to step 2 a...

Page 1377: ...rib A without removing the release sheet of it Turn over the DP Sheet for Europe with the plain side up and install it while folding the bar code part Rib A Rib F 9 819 1 DP Fireproof Sheet 2 Cushions 1 DP Sheet for Europe 1 Transparent Cover 2 hooks and 1 claw Hook DP Sheet DP Fireproof Sheet Transparent Cover Claw Cushion 33 Remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover 34 Connect the pow...

Page 1378: ...sary when installing simultaneously with the USB Device Port 1 Remove the following parts 1 Transparent Cover 1 claw and 2 hooks 1 DP Sheet 2 Cushions Do not use the removed Cushions 1 DP Fireproof Sheet Do not use the removed DP Fireproof Sheet DP Fireproof Sheet Hook Cushion DP Sheet Transparent Cover Claw F 9 821 2 Install the Card Reader and place the cable as shown in the figure NOTE Work the...

Page 1379: ...ver is installed properly Claw Transparent Cover DP Sheet Hook 4 When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover 5 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 6 Turn ON the main power switch F 9 823 Installing the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 NOTE Step 1 and 2 are not necessary when installing simultaneously with the USB Dev...

Page 1380: ...n installing simultaneously with the USB Device Port start the procedure from step 3 3 Remove the Card Slot closed from the DP Upper Cover and attach the Card Slot F 9 825 F 9 826 4 Install Multimedia Card Slot and Slot Holder together 4 Screws TP Round End M3x6 x4 Multimedia Card Slot Slot Holder 5 Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow 2 Hooks 1 Protrusion 2 Claws CAUTION Be ca...

Page 1381: ...ribs and pushing it against the rib A Rib A Rib F 9 829 F 9 830 8 Affix the Multimedia Label to the back side of the DP Sheet for Europe as shown in the figure 9 Install the DP Sheet for Europe and the Transparent Cover 2 Hooks 1 Claw DP Sheet Transparent Cover Hook Claw 10 When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover 11 Connect the power ...

Page 1382: ...quest it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator Writing Check 1 Select 1 for the following service mode Level 2 Default value 0 CPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI MEM 2 To make the setting value effective turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine 3 Mount the Memory Media to the Multimedia Card Reader Writer Check that the Mount Mark is indi...

Page 1383: ...eck 6 After scanning of the original is completed press Start Storing Confirm that data is stored in the media and press Main Menu on the Control Panel F 9 836 Reading Check 7 Make the following selection from Main Menu Access Stored Files Memory Media Memory Media A 8 Select the files stored in step 4 to 6 and then press the Print button F 9 837 F 9 838 ...

Page 1384: ...tton and print the file Then check that the file is printed correctly 10 Press the Main Menu button on the Control Panel F 9 839 F 9 840 Memory Media Removal 11 Press the Mount Mark in the bottom right Then select the memory media to be removed and press the Remove button 12 Press the OK button Then check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom right on the Main Menu screen F 9 841 F 9 ...

Page 1385: ...ts included in the package A symbol is described on the illustration in the case of using the parts included in the package of this product Packaged Item Symbols in the illustration The frequently performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure Connector Disconnect Screw Tighten Remove Connect Secure Free Harness Push Insert Plug in Turn on Sound Check Check Visual Check Claw Rem...

Page 1386: ... B1 be sure to install the Serial Interface Kit K1 or Copy Control Interface Kit A1 beforehand Serial Interface Kit K1 and Control Interface Kit A1 cannot be used concurrently Checking the Contents Serial Intreface KIT K2 7 Support Plate X 1 8 RS Conversion Cable Long X 1 9 Screw TP M3x6 X 3 1 Serial RS Conversion Board X 1 2 IA Harness Protection Sheet X 1 3 RS Conversion Cable X 1 4 Hexagonal Sc...

Page 1387: ...on Installation Outline Drawing Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing ...

Page 1388: ...y open the Right Upper Cover F 9 846 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS tightening M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw Claw x3 F 9 847 4 When the Reader is equipped remove the Reader Power Supply Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 848 5 Disconnect the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication C...

Page 1389: ... the Main Controller PCB 1 Installation Installation Procedure Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 6 Remove the 2 screws and open the Grips in 2 areas x2 Grips F 9 850 7 Hold the 2 Grips While avoiding the removed harness remove the Main Controller PCB 1 F 9 851 ...

Page 1390: ...sed 2 Screws Removed screws are not used x2 F 9 852 2 Clean the affixing side Controller Box Frame with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 3 Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1 NOTE Because the working space is limited use scale etc for cleaning After affixing the I Harness Protection Sheet be sure to press it with scale etc to prevent coming off F 9 853 4 Remove...

Page 1391: ... K2 Installation Installation Procedure Installing the Serial Interface KIT K2 5 Connect the RS Conversion Cable to the Serial RS Conversion Board F 9 855 6 Install the Serial RS Conversion Board 1 Screw which was removed in the procedure 4 2 Washers 2 Hexagonal Screw 1 Connector F 9 856 ...

Page 1392: ...simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 857 2 Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable 3 When the Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable G...

Page 1393: ... Service Tools General Timing Chart General Circuit Diagram Signal Input Output List General Circuit Diagram List of User Mode Backup Data Detail of HDD partition Soft counter specifications Appendix ...

Page 1394: ...andard tools set the following special tools are required when servicing the machine Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks Digital multimeter FY9 2002 A Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks Door Switch TKN 0093 A Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Use for electrical checks ...

Page 1395: ...ng images Loupe CK 0056 B Used for checking images Cleaning tool A To clean the feed guide This is not a service tool 1 of this are enclosed at shipment of the host machine Tospearl 240 FY9 6007 000 B ITB Cleaning Blade Lubricant Reference Category A Must be kept by each service engineer B Must be kept by each group of about five engineers C Must be kept by each warkshop T 10 1 ...

Page 1396: ...6026 Lubricating oil Mineral oil paraffin family SUPER LUBE GREASE Tool No FY9 6005 Lubricating oil Lubrication e g drive areas friction areas Silicone oil FLOIL G 5000H GREASE Tool No FY9 6022 Lubricating oil EM 50L Lubrication e g gears Special oil Special solid lubricating agent Lithium soap Tool No HY9 0007 Lubricating oil Lubrication e g scanner rail SHC oil FLOIL G337 Tool No FY9 6029 Conduc...

Page 1397: ...assette 1 pickup motor Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette 1 pre registration sensor Registration sensor Registration motor Fixing inlet sensor Fixing delivery motor First Second delivery motor First delivery sensor Fixing motor Fixing heater Drum motor M Pre exposure LED M Primary charging AC bias M Developing DC bias M Developing motor M Primary transfer bias M Primary charging DC bias M Laser M...

Page 1398: ...harging AC bias Bk Start key ON Imaging ready timing Printer unit Developing DC bias Bk Scanner motor Bk Developing motor Bk Image formation system Primary charging DC bias Bk Laser Bk Developing AC bias Bk Cassette 1 pickup motor Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette 1 pre registration sensor Registration sensor Registration motor Fixing inlet sensor Pickup feed system First Second delivery motor F...

Page 1399: ...HANSO2 EX CLK Pickup feed driver PCB high speed clock 2 HANSO2 EX S2M Pickup feed driver PCB serial slave 2 HANSO2 EX M2S Pickup feed driver PCB serial master 2 HANSO1 EX CLK Pickup feed driver PCB high speed clock 1 HANSO1 EX S2M Pickup feed driver PCB serial slave 1 HANSO1 EX M2S Pickup feed driver PCB serial master 1 CPU RESET CPU reset ITB YORIM CLK ITB displacement control motor clock RIKANM ...

Page 1400: ...Bk toner analog TNR ANLG C C toner analog TNR ANLG M M toner analog TNR ANLG Y Y toner analog MULTI SIZE Multi purpose size sensor OHP ANALOG Transparency sensor analog Jack No Abbreviated Signal Name Signal Name J112 12V IL HV 12V Interlock for HVT PCB HV3 DC CS HVT 3 PCB DC 1 HV3 DC VS HVT 3 PCB DC 2 HV TR2 REV PWM Secondary transfer PWM 1 HV TR2 CV PWM Secondary transfer PWM 2 THRM CNNT Thermis...

Page 1401: ...UT B Third delivery motor B Jack No Abbreviated Signal Name Signal Name J204 EX PAPER FAN2 ON Delivery fan 2 ON EX PAPER FAN2 LOCK Delivery fan 2 LOCK 2 3EX DOOR SNS Second third delivery door sensor EX1 SNS First delivery sensor EX TRAY1 GULL First delivery tray full sensor FUEXM A Fixing delivery motor A FUEXM A Fixing delivery motor A FUEXM B Fixing delivery motor B FUEXM B Fixing delivery moto...

Page 1402: ...t fan 2 LOCK R DOOR SNS Right door sensor J214 LS SHUTM A Laser shutter motor A LS SHUTM A Laser shutter motor A LS SHUTM B Laser shutter motor B LS SHUTM B Laser shutter motor B PCRG FAN F ON Process cartridge fan front ON PCRG FAN F LOCK Process cartridge fan front LOCK LS SHUTM HP SNS1 Laser shutter sensor Jack No Abbreviated Signal Name Signal Name J215 CST1M A Cassette 1 pickup motor A CST1M ...

Page 1403: ... 1TR ON POSI SNS Primary transfer detachment sensor 2 J303 TNR CL ON Y Toner supply clutch Y ON TNR CL ON M Toner supply clutch M ON TNR CL ON C Toner supply clutch C ON TNR CL ON K Toner supply clutch Bk ON Jack No Abbreviated Signal Name Signal Name J304 ITB MTR BRK ITB motor Break ITB MTR ON ITB motor ON ITB MTR LOCK ITB motor Lock ITB MTR GAIN ITB motor Gain ITB MTR CLK ITB motor Clock ITB MTR...

Page 1404: ...or Bk J310 TNR SNS Y Piezo sensor Y TNR COUNT Y Toner supply sensor Y TNR BTL OPEN Y Toner cap position sensor Y TNR BTL OPEN HP Y Toner container cam HP sensor Y TNR SNS M Piezo sensor M TNR COUNT M Toner supply sensor M TNR BTL OPEN M Toner cap position sensor M TNR BTL OPEN HP M Toner container cam HP sensor M TNR SNS C Piezo sensor C TNR COUNT C Toner supply sensor C TNR BTL OPEN C Toner cap p...

Page 1405: ...J1102 2 3 4 5 1 J1010 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1004 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5077M 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 J1022 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1021 2 3 1 J1020 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5010M 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5006M 1 3 2 J5087M MT2 SOLD6 1 3 2 J5087F 2 3 1 J5007M 2 3 1 J5007F 4 1 2 3 J5012L MT1 2 1 6 5 4 3 J426 3 4 5 6 1 2 J5008F MT5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J834 FT7 MT3 1 6 5 4 3 2 J5010F 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5006F 11 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1...

Page 1406: ... 2 J700 1 2 J804 3 4 5 6 1 2 J425 3 4 5 6 1 2 J662 2 6 1 5 4 3 J451 1 4 3 2 J424 1 3 2 J301 2 1 J302 2 3 1 J650 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 J423 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J211 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 J129 1 3 2 J801 1 2 J5080F 2 1 J5080M 3 4 5 6 1 2 J691 2 3 4 1 J413 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 1 J421 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 8 1 J808 2 1 J701D J701DH 1 2 J5082L 1 2 J5082D J5082DH 2 3 4 1 J5081M 1 4 3 2 J5081F 2 3 4 1 J427 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J428 1 2...

Page 1407: ...HVSEL_HV1_MUX2 HVSEL_HV1_MUX1 HVSEL_HV1_MUX0 HVSEL_HV2_MUX2 HVSEL_HV2_MUX1 HVSEL_HV2_MUX0 I2C_SDA I2C_SCL PEDE_RESET PEDE_CST2M_CLK PEDE_CST1M_CLK PEDE_EX_CLK PEDE_EX_S2M PEDE_EX_M2S SHUKUTAI_MODE SIG_RMT_24VDCP DRM_RD_HEAT_OFF ZEROX_IN J5044LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J5044L J3002DH 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J3002D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1...

Page 1408: ...1 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J816 J816H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J813 J813H J5037LH 7 6 1 5 4 3 0 1 9 8 2 J5037L 21 0 2 1 1 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J125 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 1 0 2 21 J203 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J202 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J103 3 2 1 1 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 1...

Page 1409: ... J851A_BUS 1 17 J854 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 J114 J864 J863 J853 5 4 3 2 1 J6166 1 2 3 4 5 J6165 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 J871 5 4 3 2 1 J6160 1 2 3 4 5 J6159 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 J867 1 8 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J862 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 18 17 J825D J825LH 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 9 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 8...

Page 1410: ...3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 1 1 J305 3 2 1 J6018 1 2 3 J6017 6 5 4 3 2 1 J6015 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J303 11CSR 8PK N 1 2 2 1 1 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 J6012 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 J6011 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 J6016 2 8 9 3 4 5 1 6 7 J6014 2 8 9 3 4 5 1 6 7 J6010 7 6 1 5 4 3 9 8 2 J307 1 2 3 4 5 6 J6013 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ...

Page 1411: ...J661 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5017 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5015L J5015LH 3 2 1 J6153 1 2 3 J6044 3 2 1 J6043 1 2 3 J6042 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J660 3 2 1 J6152 3 2 1 J6041 1 2 3 J6040 3 2 1 J6039 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 J659 1 2 3 J6151 1 2 3 J6038 3 2 1 J6037 1 2 3 J6036 3 2 1 J6033 3 2 1 J6035 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5035 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5022L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5019L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5016L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5022D 7 6 5 4...

Page 1412: ...8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5070L 7 6 1 5 4 3 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 9 8 2 J5029L 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J312 7 6 1 5 4 3 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 9 8 2 J5079L J5079LH 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J5079D J6003LH 1 2 3 4 J6004L 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J5029D 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5030L J5030LH 3 2 1 J6046 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 J5030D 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4...

Page 1413: ... 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 1 1 J5032L 3 2 1 J6096 J6064DH 3 2 1 J6064D 1 2 3 J6064L 3 2 1 J5057L J5057LH J5058DH 3 2 1 J5058D 2 1 J5056L 1 2 J5041LH J6093 3 2 1 J5041L J5056DH 2 1 J5056D 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J5055D 1 2 3 J6076 1 2 3 J5058L J5108LH 1 2 3 J5108L 1 2 3 J6095 2 1 J5055LH 2 1 J6073L 1 2 J6073D J6073DH 3 2 1 J6075 2 1 1 2 7 6 1 5 4 3 7 1 6 1 ...

Page 1414: ...15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 1 7 1 J204 1 2 3 4 J5110L J5110LH J6080LH 3 2 1 J6080L J5028DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5028L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5028D 3 2 1 J6171 1 2 3 J6080D J5054DH 1 2 3 J6099 J5099DH 2 8 9 3 4 5 1 6 7 J5099D 3 2 1 J6077 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5068L 3 2 1 J5054L 1 2 3 J6087 1 2 3 J6085 3 2 1...

Page 1415: ...5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 11 J5075L 2 1 J5061L FT4 FT3 J5012DWH J5061DH 1 2 J5061D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5036L J5012DB_ 0 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5036D 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J42L J5060DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 J5060D J5012LA J5012LWH 7 6 1 5 4 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 9 8 2 J216 2 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J42D 2 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1...

Page 1416: ...4 5 6 J6155 6 5 4 3 2 1 J6156 1 2 3 J6123L J6123LH J5048LH 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 1 7 1 J5048L 1 7 9 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 J5048D 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J215 J5049LH 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5049L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J6157 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J6060DH 1 2 3 4 J6060D 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 J6057L 6 5 4 3 2 1 J6158 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 1 7 1 J207 15 14 13 12 11 10...

Page 1417: ... 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5050L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 J5050D 1 2 3 4 J605 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5051L 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 J601D J755DA J755DB 1 2 3 J6148 3 2 1 J606 J6111DH 3 2 1 J6111D J755L J755LB J755LA J755DB_ 0 15 J755LB_ 0 15 ...

Page 1418: ...6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J5011D J5040DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J5040D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J235 1 2 J6133L 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5064L J5064LH J5065LH 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J5065L J6133DH 1 2 J6133D 1 2 3 J6129 1 2 3 J6132 1 2 3 J6131 1 2 3 J6130 1 2 J6138L 1 2...

Page 1419: ...J1007 5 4 3 2 1 J811 1 2 3 4 5 J4002 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J9001 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J4001 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J8003 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J8202 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J8006 2 3 1 CN1M 2 3 1 J8002 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 18 17 J1 17 18 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J8007 2 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 J8308 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 J8309 7 6 1 5 4 3 0 1 9 8 2 J8302 7 6 1 5 4 ...

Page 1420: ...ge Board Board to Cable Connection Exsample J104 or 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 J6173D J6174DH 1 2 3 J6172 2 1 G4FAX board G1 W LAN Option A IPSEC Option SATA FLASH CCM 10 3S RS Conv Copy card reader ISOLDE A IA L IRIGOLETTO A CARMEN A CL4 Debug SRAM MINERVA MDS FRAM Counter DDR2 DIMM DDR2 DIMM DDR2 DIMM GIOVANNI A GU short ORFO A 00 EMU EFI F Link EFI I F image PRESS A EFI controller option EFI control...

Page 1421: ...Delete Register Name Yes Display Settings Default Settings Item Setting Description Device Information DeliveryAvailable Default Screen at Startup Main Menu Quick Menu Copy Scan and Send Send Fax Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Secured Print Web Browser Workflow Composer Remote Scanner Print Server Scan Lock Analyzer Tutorial No Open Status Monitor Cancel On Off No Default S...

Page 1422: ...ettings Default Settings Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available Adjust Time 00 00 to 23 59 in one minute increments 00 00 No Date Time Settings Date and Time Setting 12 digit number No Time Zone GMT 12 00 to GMT 12 00 GMT 05 00 No Daylight Saving Time On Off Start Date Month Day Time April 1st Sunday 2 00 End Date Month Day Time October Final Sunday 2 00 No Time Format 24 H...

Page 1423: ...nfirm Network Connection Set Changes On Off No TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 On Off Yes IP Address Settings IP Address 0 0 0 0 Yes Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Yes Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Yes DHCP On Off Yes RARP On Off Yes BOOTP On Off Yes PING Command IP Adress 0 0 0 0 No IPv6 Settings Use IPv6 On Off Yes Stateless Address Settings Use Stateless Address On Off Yes Manual Address Settings Use Man...

Page 1424: ...l for performing time synchronization 1 to 48 hours 24hours Yes NTP Server Address IP address or host name Yes Check NTP Server Yes FTP Print Settings Use FTP Print On Off Yes User User name for FTP server login 24 characters maximum guest Yes Password Password for FTP server login 24 characters maximum 7654321 Yes WSD Print Settings Use WSD Print On Off Yes Use WSD Browsing On Off Yes Use Multica...

Page 1425: ...the Same Domain On Off Yes Set Authentication Use Proxy Auth On Off Yes User Name 24 characters maximum Yes Password 24 characters maximum Yes Confirm Dept ID PIN On Off Yes IPSec Settings Use IPSec On Off Yes Receive Non policy Packets Allow Reject Yes Edit Yes Delete Yes Policy On Off Yes Register Policy Name 24 characters maximum Yes Register Selector Settings Local Address All IP Addresses IPv...

Page 1426: ...ges across print queues Minimize form changes within print queues Yes Rprinter Settings Print ServerName 47 characters maximum Yes File ServerName 47 characters maximum Yes Printer Number 0to15 0 Yes NDS PServer Settings Print ServerName 64 characters maximum Yes Tree Name 32 characters maximum Yes Context 256 characters maximum Yes Print Server Password 20 characters maximum Yes Printer Number 0t...

Page 1427: ...Access Permission Read Write Read Only Yes Community Name Community Name 32 characters maximum public Yes Community Name2 Settings Yes Community Name2 On Off Yes MIB Access Permission Read Write Read Only Yes Community Name Community Name 32 characters maximum public2 Yes Use SNMPv3 On Off Yes User Settings User On Off Yes Register User MIB Access Permission Security Settings Authent Algorithm Aut...

Page 1428: ...rt Thumbprint Certificate Yes Display Use Location Displays what the key pair is being used for Yes TTLS Settings Use TTL On Off Yes TTLS Settings MSCHAPv2 PAP Yes PEAP Settings Use PEAP On Off Yes Same User Name as Login Name Yes User Name 24 characters maximum Yes Password 24 characters maximum Yes Firewall Settings IPv4 Address Filter Send Filter Yes Use Filter On Off Yes Default Policy Allow R...

Page 1429: ...CAddress Up to 100 IPv4 addresses can be stored Yes IP Address Block Log Time Category IP Address Result Yes External Interface Default Settings Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available USB Settings Use USB Device On Off Yes Use USB Host On Off Yes Use MEAP Driver for USB Device On Off Yes Use MEAP Driver for USB External Drive On Off Yes Accessibility Default Settings Item S...

Page 1430: ...idness Settings Standard Level 1 Level 2 No Fine Adjust Zoom X 1 0 to 1 0 0 1 increments 0 Y 1 0 to 1 0 0 1 increments 0 No Color Balance Yellow Magenta Cyan Black 8 to 8 0 No Fine Adjust Density High Dark Area Medium Low Light Area 8 to 8 0 No Adjust Action Default Setting 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached Item Setting Description Device Inform...

Page 1431: ...ther No 3 If the Inner 2 Way Tray F1 and Copy Tray J1 Are Attached Tray A Copy Mail Box Printer Receive Fax Other No 3 Tray B Copy Mail Box Printer Receive Fax Other No 3 Tray C Copy Mail Box Printer Receive Fax Other No 3 If the Inner Finisher A1 and Inner Finisher Additional Tray A1 Are Attached Tray A Copy Mail Box Printer Receive Fax Other No 3 Tray B Copy Mail Box Printer Receive Fax Other No...

Page 1432: ...or Booklet Finisher C1 and Buffer Pass Unit G1 Are Attached Do Not Collate Collate Page Order Offset Group Same Pages Offset Group Staple Corner Top Left Bottom Left Top Right Bottom Right Double Left Right No If the Staple Finisher C1 or Booklet Finisher C1 Buffer Pass Unit G1 and External 2 3 Hole Puncher B1 Are Attached Do Not Collate Collate Page Order Offset Group Same Pages Offset Group Stap...

Page 1433: ...051 C5045 Series Black 16 Magenta 8 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 C5030 Series Black 16 Magenta 12 Yes Initialize No Scan Settings Timing to Raise Feeder Tray 1 When Start is pressed When Performing from Panel Yes Feeder Jam Recovery Method 1 From 1st Page From Stopped Original Yes Scanner Noise Settings 1 Fast Quiet Yes Streak Prevention On Off Yes Black Scan Speed Image Quality Priority Speed Priori...

Page 1434: ...gs 3 Server URL Max 128 characters No User Name Max 128 characters No Password Max 24 characters No Use Password for Each User On Off No Document Scan Lock Operational Settings Use Document Scan Lock Embedded Info On Off Yes Use Document Scan Lock On Off Yes Multiple Embedded Information Action Continue Job Cancel Job Yes Restrict Options On Off Yes Copy Default Settings Item Setting Description D...

Page 1435: ...on Page Print No Font List Print No RGB Test Page Print No CMY Test Page Print No RGB Color Chart Print No CMYK Color Chart Print No Printer Settings Custom Settings Utility Yes Restricting Printer Jobs On Off Yes PDL Selection Plug nplay 1 UFR II PCL5e PCL5c PCL6 PS3 FAX No Send Default Setting 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached 4 Indicates item...

Page 1436: ...f Yes TX Terminal ID Print Do Not Print Yes Printing Position Inside Outside Display Destination Unit Name On Off Telephone Mark 1 Fax TEL Yes Delete Failed TX Jobs On Off Yes Retry Times 0 to 5times 3times Yes Data Compression Ratio Compact Normal Low Ratio Yes YCbCr TX Gamma Value Gamma 1 0 Gamma 1 4 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 2 Yes Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending On Off Yes Limit New Destinatio...

Page 1437: ...Yes Print MDN DSN upon Receipt On Off Yes Use Send via Server On Off Yes Allow MDN Not via Server On Off Yes Restrict TX Destination Domain Restrict TX Destination Domains On Off Yes Permitted Domains Register Details Edit Delete No Autocomplete for Entering E mail Addresses On Off Yes Fax Settings Default Screen Standard Address Book No Change Default Settings Register Initialize No Register Opti...

Page 1438: ...FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed Line 1 Priority TX Prohibit TX Line 2 Priority TX Prohibit TX No If the Super G3 FAX Board Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board and Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board are installed Line 1 Priority TX Prohibit TX Line 2 Priority TX Prohibit TX Line 3 Priority TX Prohibit TX Line 4 Priority TX Prohibit TX No TX Start Speed 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200...

Page 1439: ...ection Vertical Horizontal Vertical Only Yes 2 On 1 Log On Off Yes Received Page Footer On Off Yes YCbCr RX Gamma Value Gamma 1 0 Gamma 1 4 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 2 Yes Handle Files with Forwarding Errors Always Print Store Print Off Yes Forwarding Settings Receive Type Validate Invalidate Register Registered Forwarding Settings Forward w o Conditions E Mail Priority Details Edit Delete Print List Yes ...

Page 1440: ...bps Yes Receive Password 20 digits maximum No Set Number Display Yes Line1 1 On Off Yes Line2 1 On Off Yes Line3 1 On Off Yes Line4 1 On Off Yes Store Access Files Default Setting Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available Common Settings Scan and Store Settings Register Edit Favorite Settings Register Edit Delete Up to 9 Set Keys Check Content No Change Default Settings Regist...

Page 1441: ...ebDAV Server Settings Authentication Type Basic Off Yes Use SSL On Off Yes Delete All Personal Spaces Delete No Initialize Shared Space Initialize No Prohibit Writing from External On Off Yes Authentication Management On Off Yes File Formats Allowed for Storing Printable Formats Only Common Office Formats All Yes Network Settings Network Place Settings Register Details Delete No Protocol for Exter...

Page 1442: ...h Register Edit Delete Yes Change Default Display of Address Book Local LDAP Server Remote No Address Book PIN Seven digit number Yes Manage Address Book Access Number On Off Yes Require Password for Exporting Address Book On Off Yes Register LDAP Server Receive Type Validate Invalidate Register Details Edit Delete Forward w o Conditions Print List E Mail Priority No Auto Search When Using LDAP Se...

Page 1443: ...N Register Edit Delete Limit Functions Yes Page Totals Clear Print List Clear All Totals Large2 Count Management No Allow Printer Jobs With Unknown IDs On Off Yes Allow Remote Scan Jobs With Unknown IDs On Off Yes Allow Black Copy Mail Box Print Jobs On Off Yes Allow Black Printer Jobs On Off Yes Device Management Default Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional eq...

Page 1444: ... Settings Registration Value On Off Dept ID On Off Address Book On Off Web Access Favorites On Off Printer Settings On Off Paper Information On Off Workflow Composer On Off Communication Log Details Print List Report Settings Report Settings Auto Print 100 transmissions On Off Specify Print Time On Off 00 00 to 23 59 Separate Report Type On Off Limited Functions Mode On Off No Limit Functions When...

Page 1445: ... Delete Display Use Location Displays what the key pair is being used for No Certificate Settings Key and Certificate List Key and Certificate List for Users Certificate Details Version Serial Number Signature Algorithm Issue Destination Start Date of Validity End Date of Validity Issuer Public Key Cert Thumbprint Certificate No Delete No Certificate Settings CA Certificate List Certificate Detail...

Page 1446: ...ings On Off On Password Max 8 characters No Register Update Software Install Applications Options License Access Number 4 degits at a time No Software Management Settings Select Log Display Display Update Logs Display System Logs No Test Communication No Data Management Default Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached Item Setting Description ...

Page 1447: ...g PC Paper Information Settings HDD Clear Clear Yes Remote UI Export Import PC No Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Favorite Settings HDD Clear Clear Clear Yes 1 Remote UI Export Import PC Yes 2 SST Sramimg PC 1 Backup is available only Favorite Settings in Scan and Send 2 If the machine can be activated with download...

Page 1448: ...amimg PC If the machine can be activated with download mode in safe mode at the time of HDD failure backup of Sramimg may be possible in some cases In this case install the system after replacing the HDD and check that the machine starts safe mode Then active the download mode in safe mode and restore the backup data so that data can be restored while retaining Box information in HDD Data File of ...

Page 1449: ...ey information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF SRAM M CON2 Clear 1 Clear 2 Clear Clear 2 Clear 2 No 3 Yes SST Sramimg PC 1 After clearing the backup key information in the HDD it is automatically restored from the key in the SRAM M CON2 2 After clearing the key information in the SRAM it is automatically restored from the backup key in the HDD 1 2 When replacing the HDD and Main Controll...

Page 1450: ...6 Address book Setting for Forwarding Disabled APL_KEEP 7 MEAP stored data Disabled APL_LOG 8 System log storage area Enabled CRBDEV 9 Advanced Box area Enabled APL_CDS 10 Area for distribution server Enabled APL_GEN Details of universal data Category Data Category Data Settings Registration Preferences Setting for Advance Box User information of Advanced Box Adjustment Maintenance Registration in...

Page 1451: ...d white 2 008 Remote copy full color large 009 Remote copy full color small 010 Remote copy mono color large 011 Remote copy mono color small 012 Remote copy black and white large 013 Remote copy black and white small 014 Remote copy full color mono color large 015 Remote copy full color mono color small 016 Remote copy full color mono color 2 017 Remote copy full color mono color 1 018 Remote cop...

Page 1452: ...tal A full color mono color 1 150 Total B1 151 Total B2 152 Total B large 153 Total B small 154 Total B full color 1 155 Total B full color 2 156 Total B black and white 1 157 Total B black and white 2 No Counter Details 158 Total B mono color large 159 Total B mono color small 160 Total B black and white large 161 Total B black and white small 162 Total B1 double sided 163 Total B2 double sided 1...

Page 1453: ... 280 Local copy full color small 281 Local copy mono color large 282 Local copy mono color small 283 Local copy black and white large 284 Local copy black and white small 285 Local copy full color mono color large 286 Local copy full color mono color small No Counter Details 287 Local copy full color mono color 2 288 Local copy full color mono color 1 289 Local copy full color large double sided 2...

Page 1454: ...l 2 511 Color scan large 512 Color scan small 601 Box print Total 1 602 Box print Total 2 No Counter Details 603 Box print large 604 Box print small 605 Box print full color 1 606 Box print full color 2 607 Box print mono color 1 608 Box print mono color 2 609 Box print black and white 1 610 Box print black and white 2 611 Box print full color large 612 Box print full color small 613 Box print mon...

Page 1455: ...obile Print full color large 768 Mobile Print full color small 769 Mobile Print black and white large 770 Mobile Print black and white small 771 Mobile Print full color large double sided 772 Mobile Print full color small double sided 773 Mobile Print black and white large double sided 774 Mobile Print black and white small double sided 801 Report print Total 1 802 Report print Total 2 No Counter ...

Reviews:

No comments